all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 |
|
Host User Manual | Users Manual | 1.70 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 983.79 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
users manual | Users Manual | 1.52 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Agent Authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 254.46 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Antenna Spec | Cover Letter(s) | 436.27 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 157.88 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | External Photos | native | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Internal Photos | native | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | ID Label/Location Info | native | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report |
1 2 3 4 | Host User Manual | Users Manual | 1.70 MiB |
Train Chief II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU
(Brake &Throttle Industrial Version) Failure to return the Warranty Registration document (enclosed) to Control Chief within 30 days of purchase will void any warranty responsibilities on behalf of Control Chief Corporation Control Chief Corporation 200 Williams Street Bradford, PA 16701 814-362-6811 * 1-800-233-3016 * 814-368-4133 (fax) www.controlchief.com 95-00-0-xxx-MAN Control Chief Corporation, a world leader in wireless radio and infrared remote control products has developed and expanded upon this powerful technology. More than three decades of experience in designing, manufacturing and installing state-of-the-art remote communication systems emphasize Control Chiefs mission. Our systems are tailored to virtually any environment or application. Control Chief provides training, technical support, and comprehensive system design to maximize performance. It is our honor to uphold this reputation of innovative engineering and superior product performance. Publication: 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 Copyright 2010 Control Chief Corporation All Rights Reserved. 200 Williams Street, Bradford, Pennsylvania, 16701 Web Page: www.controlchief.com Telephone: (814) 362-6811, FAX: (814) 368-4133 TRAIN CHIEF II is a registered trademark of Control Chief Corporation. Communicator is a registered trademark of Control Chief Corporation. SLC 500 is a trademark of Rockwell Automation. PanelView is a trademark of Rockwell Automation. TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION / SAFETY 1-1 Introduction 1-1 Common Acronyms 1-1 Receiver / Controller Unit (RCU) Installation Kit 1-2 1-2 Lightweight Operator Control Unit (OCU-BTIND) 1-2 Reference Drawings Safety 1-3 CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS General Specifications 2-1 2-1 Lightweight OCU-DBT Specifications RCU Specifications 2-1 CHAPTER 3 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION 3-1 The Lightweight OCU-BTIND OCU-BTIND Control Groups 3-1 3-7 The RCU 3-13 RCU Mounting Locomotive Interface 3-14 3-15 The Installation Kit General Installation Practices 3-16 CHAPTER 4 START UP AND OPERATING PROCEDURES 4-1 Locomotive Stops (Definitions) 4-2 Brake Monitoring Setup for Remote Control Operations 4-2 4-4 Transfer to Remote Control and PCS Reset 4-5 Air Brakes and Safety Features Test Normal Locomotive Operation 4-6 Transferring from Remote to Manual 4-10 CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS 5-1 Special Features (Included Options) OCU Two-Way Operational Messages 5-2 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 i Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL CHAPTER 6 DETAILED COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS Lightweight OCU Features 6-1 IR Registration Process 6-2 OCU Controls 6-2 OCU Keypad, Indicators, and Display 6-6 Battery and Battery Charger Details 6-9 Typical; Locomotive Pneumatic Interfaces 6-10 CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING 7-1 Lightweight OCU Troubleshooting 7-2 Transmitter Diagnostics SLC 500 Troubleshooting 7-5 7-7 Control Chief Specific PLC Modules 7-9 Troubleshooting Communications Faults Electrical and Pneumatic System Troubleshooting 7-10 CHAPTER 8 PRODUCT SUPPORT & SPARE PARTS Product Support 8-1 8-1 Returning OCU for Repair 8-1 Contacting Control Chief Spare Parts and Accessories 8-2 CHAPTER 9 DETAILED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 9-1 Locomotive Antenna System Pneumatic Filter Service Instructions 9-1 9-2 OCU Lithium-Ion Battery Maintenance Control Chief Recommended Training Outline 9-3 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 ii Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL INTRODUCTION / SAFETY 1 Introduction This Owners Manual provides operating and troubleshooting information for the installer and end user of the Train Chief II Locomotive Remote Control System (LRCS) with a Lightweight Operator Control Unit (OCU) Brake & Throttle variant for Industry (BTIND). The Train Chief II LRCS has been designed as a permanently installed (fixed) system, directly interfaced to the appropriate locomotive electrical and pneumatic controls. The system consists of the following main components: (1) - the Receiver / Controller Unit (RCU), (2) - the wireless remote-control radio OCU, (3) - the installation kit. Common Acronyms CFR - Code of Federal Regulations FRA - Federal Railroad Administration LRCS - Locomotive Remote Control System OCU - Operator Control Unit PTC - Positive Train Control PLC - Programmable Logic Controller Receiver / Controller Unit The RCU contains the main control electronics and pneumatic hardware of the remote control system. This includes; the PLC controller (the Allen Bradley SLC 500), the Control Chief Communicator module and Control Chief Watchdog module, analog and discrete interface modules, pneumatic proportional control valves, air regulation, control relays, solenoid valves, and pressure sensing devices. RCL - Remote Control Locomotive RCO - Remote Control Operator RCU - Receiver / Controller Unit RCT - Remote Control Transmitter RCR - Remote Control Receiver interface The RCU interface to the locomotive involves both electrical and pneumatic connections. The electrical is primarily accomplished through DC relay contact closures, wiring into the locomotives existing electrical control system. The pneumatic interface typically involves direct air service the dedicated pneumatic control devices in the RCU. A dedicated DC/DC converter and line conditioning module are provided to interface the locomotives existing DC supply to the RCU. tie-ins using Figure 1-1 The Receiver / Controller Unit 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 1-1 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL The Installation Kit In order to effectively and reliably interface to the locomotive controls / operations, various kitted items are provided to complete the installation. An antenna kit is provided with the components necessary to allow the radio antenna to be mounted on the locomotive cab. Surge suppressors are provided for installation on all inductive devices (i.e. solenoid coils, electrical contactor coils, etc.) to minimize electro magnetic interference (EMI). Optional color-coded xenon strobe indicator lights can be supplied to provide visual status indication to personnel during remote control operation. The Lightweight OCU-BTIND The Lightweight OCU model DBT is specifically designed for industrial locomotive operations. The model DBT is designed to meet the demanding requirements of locomotive operators by providing an operator control unit that is easy to use, safe, rugged, dependable, and based on a commonly recognized configuration. The Lightweight OCU meets these requirements with an ergonomic shape that eliminates sharp corners and accommodates an easy reach of all control switches. These features provide an intuitive operation scheme enabling operators to maintain their focus on yard movements. Figure 1-2: Lightweight OCU Brake & Throttle Industrial configuration Reference Drawings The system drawing package contains the following typical drawings, which are referenced throughout this document. These drawings will be specific to your system with exact configuration details. Note: XXXX references a Control Chief assigned system serial number. Typical Drawing List DRAWING NUMBER E-9568-00-1 E-9568-03-1 E-9568-31-1 THRU -9 E-9568-33-1 AND E-9568-41-1 E-9568-53-1 E-9568-91-1 E-9568-99-1 DESCRIPTION OCU ASSEMBLY / LAYOUT RECEIVER / CONTROLLER LAYOUT ELECTRICAL WIRING PNEUMATIC INTERFACE SYSTEM ACCESSORIES COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 1-2 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Safety The safety guidelines in this manual are not intended to replace any rules or regulations or any applicable local, state, or federal governing laws. The following information is to be used in conjunction with all other rules and/or regulations already in existence. It is important to read all safety information before operating any wireless radio remote control system. The Federal Railroad Administration (FRA) has published a Notice of Safety Advisory 2001-1 (in the Federal Register, Vol 66, #-31, Pg. 10340) addressing the establishment of recommended minimal guidelines for the operation of remote control locomotives. A copy of all referenced FRA regulations can be obtained directly from the FRA or contact Control Chief for help in obtaining a copy of these regulations. The term Remotely Controlled Locomotives or Remote Control Locomotives (RCL) refers to a locomotive, which, through use of a wireless radio operator control unit and receiver system, can be operated by a person not physically located at the controls within the confines of the locomotive cab. The wireless Remote Control Operator (RCO) must exercise extreme caution and be alert at all times. Only properly trained persons (certified and qualified in accordance with 49 CFR Part 240, as conventional operation of a locomotive under the same circumstances would require) should be operating RCLs. RCLs should not be operated by any person who cannot read or understand signs, notices and operating instructions that pertain to the locomotive operation. Any person operating a remote controlled locomotive should possess the following knowledge and/or skills:
Current certification on methods of safe train handling, operating rules, conditions of equipment, personal safety practices
Knowledge/training on hazards specific to locomotive operation
Knowledge/training of safety rules for RCLs
Knowledge of the radio transmitter/receiver equipment/system
Knowledge/training on all required inspections and testing
Knowledge on transferring control from one operator to another
Reporting unsafe or unusual operating conditions Upon going off duty, each RCO should place the RCL in manual operation and properly secure it and the OCU to prevent unauthorized operation. The recommended practice for OCU security includes the designation of a dedicated, lockable location for OCU storage, which can have access controlled to only appropriately trained / knowledgeable personnel. When operating a RCL, the RCO should NOT:
Ride on a freight car under any circumstances
Mount or dismount moving equipment
Operate any other type of machinery
Stand or walk within the gage of the track or foul the track on which the movement is occurring When the using the OCU the RCO should always wear a 4-point breakaway vest. RCOs should ensure that the track is clear and properly aligned ahead of the remotely controlled movement. Therefore, RCL operations should be operated at restricted speed not to exceed a speed that will enable stopping the movement within half the range of vision assuring that all movements are protected. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 1-3 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Strict procedures must be followed to ensure that there can only be one RCT in active control of the RCL at any one time. Prior to performing any function (as prescribed in 49 CFR 218.22.c.5) the RCO should apply three-point protections; (1) fully apply the locomotive and train brakes, (2) center the reverser, and (3) place the generator field switch to the OFF position. Passenger trains should NOT be operated by use of a remote control device. The following security procedures are recommended:
Have instructions for the proper storage, handling and security of RCTs when not in use or in the operators possession.
Operation control handles located in the RCL cab should be removed or pinned in place to prevent accidental or intentional movement while the RCL is being operated in remote.
Have strict procedures in place to ensure that only the intended RCT is assigned to the appropriate RCL. All inspections and calibrations must be performed as required. Each RCL should have a tag placed on the control stand throttle indicating the locomotive is being used in a remote control mode. The tag should be removed when the locomotive is placed back in manual mode. In areas where RCL operations are being conducted, warning signs should be posted indicating that there are remote control locomotives in use. These warning signs should be highly visible and posted at conspicuous locations so as to maximize their exposure to those most likely to encounter RCL operations. Whenever worker protection is required (according to 49 CFR Part 218) the locomotive should be placed in manual mode and be properly secured. The appropriate blue signal protection should then be provided. All accidents and/or incidents (described in 49 CFR Part 225) must be reported to FRA using the appropriate remote control reporting codes. CAUTION THE RECEIVER UNIT OR RELAYS ARE NOT RATED AS EXPLOSION PROOF. THE RECEIVER UNIT MUST NOT BE IN EXPLOSIVE ENVIRONMENTS UNLESS APPROPRIATE SECONDARY ENCLOSURE MEASURES ARE TAKEN. WARNING THE UNIT MUST BE WIRED TO THE CORRECT VOLTAGE; FAILURE TO DO SO MAY DAMAGE THE SYSTEM. NOTE IN AN EMERGENCY, PUSH E-STOP TO STOP WIRELESS RADIO CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT The antenna(s) to be used with this module must be installed with consideration to the guidelines for RF exposure risk to all nearby personnel, and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. INSTALLED OR OPERATED 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 1-4 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL 2 SPECIFICATIONS WARNING:
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY CONTROL CHIEF CORPORATION COULD VOID THE USERS AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.
FCC Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS Notice This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device RSS FCC Partie 15 et du Canada Avis Industrie Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC et Industrie Canada exempts de licence standard RSS (s). Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne peut pas provoquer d'interfrences et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence pouvant causer un mauvais fonctionnement du The Control Chief Lightweight OCU Family model(s) comply with FCC and Industry Canada RF exposure requirements when used as described in this manual. Only use authorized accessories to hold the device to the body while operating the device. Le contrle en chef lger OCU famille modle (s) se conformer la FCC et exigences d'Industrie Canada d'exposition RF lorsqu'il est utilis comme dcrit dans ce manuel. N'utilisez que des accessoires autoriss placer l'appareil sur le corps pendant le fonctionnement du dispositif. General Specifications Frequency Operating Range Temperature Range System Diagnostics System Address Capacity Encoding/Decoding Method Data Security Communication Security Modulation Response Time 902-928 MHz (FCC Part 15) 2500 feet (1.06km) environment dependent
-20 to +140 F (-30 to +60 C) Various LED indicators 65,000 +
Microprocessor/software based Real time 16 bit CRC OCU registers with Locomotive via Infra-Red communication port to exchange and establish RF network addresses CPFSK (Continuous Phase Freq Shift keying) 250 milliseconds 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 2-1 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Lightweight OCU Specifications Dimensions Weight Carrying Method 6(h) x 5(d) x 10(w)
(15.2cm x 12.7cm x 25.4cm) 3.9 lbs (1.8 Kg) with battery Four point vest-harness, break-away style Environmental Conditioning Weatherproof (IP-65) OCU Diagnostics Switches Supply Voltage Battery Life RF Power Output Antenna Type 2-line 16 character display Push buttons, toggle switches, knobs. 7.4 V Lithium-Ion rechargeable battery pack 12 hours continuous duty 1 watt Internal, Di-pole Receiver / Controller Specifications Enclosure Weight Dimensions Electrical Interface Connection NEMA 12 dust tight Approximately 95 lbs (~36 Kg) 30.0 x 20.0 x 11.0 (76.2 x 51 x 30 cm) Various cable connections Pneumatic Interface Connection Various push-in type tubing connections Mounting Provisions Power Source Required Pneumatic Source Required Top/bottom tabs @ 16 centers Locomotive DC supply Locomotive main air reservoir; Max 150 psig Min 90 psig Due to Control Chief Corporations commitment to continuous improvement, the above specifications are subject to change without notice. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 2-2 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL 3 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION The Lightweight OCU-BTIND Train Chief II equipped locomotives are controlled by using one or two Lightweight OCUs. Each OCU is a small 3.9 lb hand operated device that gives an operator complete throttle and braking control of the locomotive up to 2500 feet away. Control of the locomotive can be passed between two OCUs when the optional Selective Dual Control feature is installed. OCU Control Groups The OCU has controls for:
1. Movement commands (direction, throttle and braking) 2. Miscellaneous locomotive commands (bell, horn, bail and sand) 3. OCU operations (power, reset, status, pitch, tilt time extend) It also has visual and audio signals indicating the status of commands to the locomotive and OCU operational status. Movement Controls Throttle Selector Reverser Selector EMERGENCY Mushroom Switch Independent Brakes
(Locomotive) Automatic Brakes
(Train) Figure 3-1: Lightweight OCU-BTIND Movement Controls Reverser (Directional) Selector: This 3-position switch selects locomotive movement direction as Forward, Reverse, or Neutral. Note: Train Chief II does not allow you to change the direction of movement while the locomotive is in motion. If attempted, Train Chief II will automatically stop the locomotive by commanding a Full-Application Locomotive Stop (see page 4-1). EMERGENCY Mushroom Switch: Push in to activate an Emergency Locomotive Stop. See page 4-1 for E-Stop actions. For normal operations the EMERGENCY switch must be pulled out. Note: E-Stop develops high brake cylinder pressures that increase the chance of sliding wheels. Only use the EMERGENCY mushroom switch when absolutely necessary. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-1 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Throttle Selector: Ten-position selector represents the throttle position available in the cab. However, one additional feature of the OCU throttle is the HALT function. HALT: commands the throttle to idle, removes the generator field, and also gradually applies independent brakes. IDLE: commands throttle to idle and removes generator field but does not apply brakes. The remaining positions, 1 through 8, command the same throttle settings as the control cab console settings. Automatic Brakes: This 3-position spring centered switch allows the operator to release or apply train brakes by reducing brake pipe by the following pressures:
Release Minimum Light Medium Full The Charge position is used to pressurize the air brake system. 0-psi reduction 6-8 psi reduction 10 psi reduction 18 psi reduction 26 psi reduction The center switch position (LAP) maintains the last brake setting. Each time the switch is pressed (must be held for 0.5 sec) the train brakes are incremented to the next higher/lower setting. On the First application of Auto Brake the locomotive brake portion of the train brake application is automatically bailed off. Whenever the switch is pulled (must be held for 2 sec) the train brakes immediately revert back to Release position. Independent Brakes: This 6-position selector allows the operator to apply independent locomotive brakes to achieve the desired stopping power. Some positions limit and override the throttle control. Selectable positions are:
Release (0 psi): this is the normal operating position when operating in power mode
(Throttle positions 1-8). (Note RELEASE selection is indicated when all Independent Brake LEDs are off.) B1: Applies 1/5 of the available independent brake pressure to the brake cylinders. B2: Applies 2/5 of the available independent brake pressure to the brake cylinders. Throttle selections T1 to T8 are allowed. Throttle selections T1 to T8 are allowed. B3: Applies 3/5 of the available independent brake pressure to the brake cylinders. Throttle selections T1 to T3 are allowed. See notes 1 and 2. B4: Applies 4/5 of the available independent brake pressure to the brake cylinders. Throttle selections T1 to T3 are allowed. See notes 1 and 2. FULL: Applies total available independent brake pressure to the brake cylinders. Throttle selections T1 to T3 are allowed. See notes 1 and 2. NOTE 1: If throttle is advanced T4 to T8 the default programming will reduce throttle to IDLE. To recover throttle operations return throttle selector to IDLE. NOTE 2: The threshold parameters for limiting throttle vs. brake settings B1 to FULL can be adjusted per owners operating rules and requirements. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-2 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Misc. Locomotive Controls Reset & Sand Bell / Horn Reset & Bail Optional Functions:
Headlight or Tilt Extend Figure 3-2: Lightweight OCU-BTIND Bell / Horn switch:
This is a 3-positon switch. It is latched at the rear (OFF) position and at the center (BELL) position. The forward (HORN) position is spring loaded to return to BELL position when released. Return the switch to the OFF position to silence the Bell. 1. Bell function only: whenever the locomotive is stopped and the Throttle Selector is moved from Halt to some movement position, Train Chief II sounds the bell for 5 seconds. 2. Horn function only: The horn function is also used to acknowledge or accept a Pitch from a transferring OCU. Optional Functions: (OCU-BTIND only) This button can control headlights or act as an additional TILT EXTEND button. See Chapter 5 for full description of options. Reset / Bail button:
When depressed briefly the button acts as a RESET for several functions. 1. It resets the ALERT warning. See page 4-7 for description of ALERT function. 2. It allows the RCU to allow a brake release when the operator moves the Throttle selector out of the HALT position. When depressed for longer than 2 seconds the second function of BAIL is activated. The BAIL function allows the independent brakes to be released while the train brake continues to be applied. Reset / Sand button:
When depressed briefly the button acts as a RESET for several functions. 1. It resets the ALERT warning. See page 4-7 for description of ALERT function. 2. It allows the RCU to allow a brake release when the operator moves the Throttle selector out of the HALT position. When depressed for longer than 2 seconds it activates the sanders in the direction of movement. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-3 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL OCU Operation Controls and Associated Functions IR Port Pitch Power Tilt Time Extend (F1) Status (F4) Figure 3-3: Lightweight OCU-BTIND Controls Power Button:
Push-On / Push-Off switch to apply power to the OCU. Power is supplied from the battery pack and the power bridge. Depending on the charge state of the power bridge, the OCU may activate for a short time without an installed battery. See page 6-2. Pitch button:
The PITCH button is used to transfer movement control of the locomotive from one OCU to another. Refer to page 4-2 in this manual describing the Selective Dual Control feature. Tilt Time Extend (F1):
The Tilt Time Extend button extends the allowable tilt time to 60 seconds. To activate this command the operator must depress the F1 button for 2 seconds until the OCU beeps to acknowledge the command. Status (F4):
Depressing the F4 key causes the OCU to initiate a status report from the locomotive or activate a status menu that will be shown on the OCU display. Refer to the OCU display section on page 6-8 for more details. IR Port:
The IR port is used when registering the OCU to the locomotive. Aligning the IR ports of the OCU and RCU during setup allows specific information to be exchanged between them. This creates a secure communications link between them for the duration of the remote control session. See Chapter 4 for complete registration procedures. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-4 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL OCU Keypad, Indicators and Display The location of the LEDs, Character-display, and Intensity sensor are shown in the diagram below. All LEDs will illuminate during the power on sequence to allow detection of inoperative LEDs. B A C D J H G F E Figure 3-4: Display Panel for Brake-Throttle Unit
[A] Independent Brakes
[B] Auto Brakes
[C] Reverser
[D] Throttle
[E] Headlight Bright Indicator
[F] 16 Character Display
[G] Low Battery Indicator
[H] OCU A / B Indicator
[J] Ambient Light Sensor Steady LEDs at the respective locations in the above figure show the selected positions of the OCU controls. Battery Compartment The 7.4 volt Lithium-Ion battery is secured in the compartment by its own locking lip and does not require a latching cover. Additional details are described on page 6-1. Fig 3-5: Battery and Battery Well 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-5 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL OCU Harness The harness system is an integral part of the LRCS. With the many situations encountered in rail equipment operations it is imperative the OCU does not constantly occupy an operators hands. Control Chief has combined the OCU support harness with a high visibility safety vest to avoid the operating gear and safety gear conflicts that are sometimes present when having to don separate items. The Control Chief Break-away Safety Vest uses hook-
and-loop material at the shoulders and waist belts to be easily opened and release the operator in the event of being entangled. o The hook and loop fabric also allows size adjustment for secure fit and carry of the OCU. The vest should be kept clean to maintain high visibility. o Hand cleaning with mild detergent soap (non-
abrasive) or citrus cleaner is recommended. o The vest can be machine washed with common laundry detergents but useful service life will be reduced. o Use of petroleum solvents
(diesel kerosene, alcohol) is not recommended. o Use of chlorinated cleaners (bleach, powders, fuel, etc) is not recommended. o Use of machine dryers is not recommended. Fig 3-6 Breakaway Safety Vest with Integral Harness 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-6 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL The Receiver / Controller Unit (RCU) The RCU consists of the control electronic and pneumatic components. The electronic components consist of the programmable logic controller (the SLC 500 PLC) with various I/O and specialty modules, the transfer switch and various DC relays. The pneumatic components consist of proportional air control valves, solenoid ON/OFF valves, pressure switches, pressure transducers and pressure regulators, all mounted on specifically designed manifolds. The RCU is mounted inside the locomotive cab on a dedicated rail system (Unistrut). The RCU is then interfaced to the locomotive system(s) via cable wiring and DOT rated plastic tubing as per the specific pneumatic and electrical requirements. For more details on the configuration of your system please refer to your system drawing package, specifically, drawing number E-9568-03-1 RECEIVER / CONTROLLER LAYOUT.
www.controlchief.com
Figure 3-7: Typical RCU Layout Transfer Switch, Intermediate Relays and DC Conditioning Module The transfer switch is used to select between MANUAL and REMOTE operations. This switch utilizes a switch-block arrangement that allows for various hardwired control functions. The intermediate relays are used to control a number of auxiliary electrical devices such as status lights, horn, sanding, and others depending on the locomotive requirements. The intermediate relays may be located inside the enclosure or on the enclosure door. Refer to your system prints for details specific to your system. The DC conditioning module is used to condition the wheel slip and E-Stop inputs from 74VDC down to 24VDC prior to going to the PLC input module. A DC-to-DC solid state isolated voltage converter is provided to reduce the locomotive DC battery voltage to regulated 24VDC. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-7 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Programmable Logic Controller - SLC 500System The SLC 500 is the control center for the Train Chief II system. The SLC 500 incorporates the necessary I/O modules to control the various locomotive interfaces based on a ladder logic program, specifically, developed for locomotive remote control and tuned for your particular application. 1746-P3 POWER SUPPLY Allen-Bradley SLC 500 power supply modules include a LED that illuminates when the power supply is functioning properly. Power supplies are designed to withstand a brief power loss (brown-out) for a period of between 0.02 to 3 seconds, depending upon loading conditions. The P3 fuse is accessible by opening the modules front panel located to the upper left of the input terminal block. A replacement fuse can be obtained from your local AB distributor or through Control Chief Customer Service. CHASSIS The chassis houses the P3 power supply, processor, and all the I/O modules. All components slide easily into the chassis along guides formed into the chassis. No tools are required to insert or remove the processor or I/O modules. The power supply and removable terminal strips on the I/O modules do require a philips screwdriver for removal and installation. SLC 500 PROCESSOR The SLC 500 processor utilized in the Train Chief II system contains the primary control program. The processor is programmed using ladder logic which is uniquely suited for control applications. For troubleshooting purposes the processor provides several LED indicators; RUN, FAULT, and BATT (other modules will have additional indicators, but the ones listed are the most important). MEMORY MODULE The memory module is a plug-in to the processor module and provides non-volatile and secure program storage for the specific ladder program for your particular application. ANALOG MODULE(S) The analog modules incorporate high-resolution providing for precision control of analog outputs, which are typically used to control the proportional pneumatic valves for locomotive brake, trainline brakes, and where applicable, pneumatically controlled locomotive throttle. The modules also incorporate high resolution inputs to precisely monitor the controlled pressures. The modules feature input filtering providing high immunity to electrical noise. OUTPUT MODULE(S) The output module(s) provide the means with which to actuate the various functions on the locomotive system. Typical functions controlled by the output modules include; generator field, reverser directional selection, sand, horn, bell, throttle position, and indicator lights/strobe. Intermediate relays are used (located in the locomotive interface panel) where a control function current rating may exceed the rating of an output module. All output modules provide LED indicators for each output point. The LEDs illuminate when the processor applies power to an output terminal. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-8 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL INPUT MODULE(S) The input module(s) provide a means to monitor critical functional states of the locomotive system. Typical system parameters monitored are the manual throttle, manual reverser, external E-Stop switches, pressure switches, and wheel slip. The module features input filtering, optical isolation, and built-in surge protection. All input modules provide LED indicators for each input point. The LEDs illuminate when the proper signal is received at an input terminal. REMOTE CONTROL WITH ALLEN-BRADLEY SLC 500 SLC 500 remote control is facilitated by the implementation of Control Chiefs Communicator module and Watchdog relay module. This advanced technology is a result of Control Chiefs partnership with Rockwell Automation to develop remote control capability for the SLC 500. The following paragraphs discuss how the remote control capability is implemented in the Train Chief II system providing safe and reliable operation. Figure 3-8: SLC 500 PLC 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-9 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL WATCHDOG SYSTEM Remote control systems based on the SLC 500 controller with the Communicator module will utilize a multiple feature watchdog safety system. The first watchdog circuit is built into the wireless Communicator module and monitors the operation of the module CPU. Should this watchdog time out, then an automatic interrupt is generated which faults the SLC 500 CPU and clears all SLC output tables. An additional watchdog feature within the module will clear the module I/O image table if communication with the remote unit is lost. The High Current Relay/Watchdog module incorporates two (2) additional watchdog safety systems. Each watchdog safety system consists of a circuit that drives a dedicated output relay. Each circuit monitors a critical system function to verify proper system operation. The dedicated watchdog relay outputs are used to control the E-Stop relay in the locomotive interface panel. DEVICENET SCANNER MODULE The DeviceNet scanner module included in this Train Chief II system provides the standard field bus data interface to the Control Chief Triad Module. DeviceNet is the field bus protocol used in this system. This interface provides for a 2-way data exchange between the Triad processor and the PLC backplane I/O map. THE CONTROL CHIEF TRIAD MODULE. The Control Chief Triad Module is not part of the PLC rack assembly, but is directly wired to the PLC through the DeviceNet scanner. This module consists of three (3) sub units (hence the name Triad) all working together to receive radio data (radio sub unit), decode and format the data, and transfer the data over DeviceNet to the PLC (field bus sub unit). This module also includes a safety watchdog sub unit. This sub unit is monitors various watchdog heartbeats as well as the RF link to ensure the proper operation of all controller sub systems. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-10 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Pneumatic Components The following pneumatic components comprise the pneumatic control and interface for the Train Chief II system and are included in the RCU, mounted on the specifically designed enclosure back plate. PROPORTIONAL VALVES AND MANIFOLD Manifolds have been specifically designed to integrate the brake pneumatic components. Referred to as the proportional valve manifold, one manifold integrates all components used both normal and emergency brake control with the required regulators. Another proportional valve manifold is used for normal and emergency trainline brakes, when present. PRESSURE REGULATORS Supply air from the locomotive main reservoir is controlled using a 0-100-psi regulator, for the pneumatic components used in the Train Chief II system. A second stage 0-100-psi regulator is used to further control the air used for emergency brake system. Both regulators are located at the supply end of one of the proportional valve manifolds. PRESSURE MONITORING Main reservoir pressure is monitored by a dedicated transducer on the solenoid valve manifold. Brakes and Trainline pressures are monitored by feedback from a dedicated transducer fed from the actual application points on the locomotive. EMERGENCY SOLENOIDS The Brake Emergency Stop (BKES) solenoid is used to apply air for independent emergency brake application. Additional a dedicated (TLES & TL DUMP) solenoid valves are used to dump brake pipe air for emergency trainline brake application SOLENOIDS VALVES Solenoid valve(s) are provided (and integrated on a dedicated manifold) that are used to control additional locomotive functions such as horn/bell, sanding, and uncoupling. Refer to your system specific documentation to find which features are included on your system.
Figure 3-9: Typical Pneumatic Components 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-11 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Receiver / Controller Unit Mounting The RCU should be securely mounted inside the locomotive cab. The mounting location should allow for reasonable access for both the electrical and pneumatic interfaces, but also be picked to avoid interference with normal locomotive cab operations. www.controlchief.com Figure 3-10: RCU Physical Details The best approach for mounting is to erect a simple rail system allowing for some adjustment yet providing a good secure support. It is recommended that the mounting frame be erected using metal rails strong enough to support the enclosures weight (~95 lbs.). As shown above. The mounting tabs on the RCU enclosure are on 14 centers and are ~31 between top and bottom. Be sure to leave adequate clearance below the unit to make all interface connections and in front to allow for the access panel opening. The following figure provides a basic mounting concept. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-12 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Locomotive Interface Figure 3-11 Introduction The connection of the RCU to the locomotive is achieved through both electrical and pneumatic
(air) interfaces. All locomotive interface connections are located on the bottom of the RCU. The RCU manages all necessary connections for the specific locomotive functions. Once interfaced, the RCU becomes an integral part of the locomotive system and utilizes the locomotive DC power and main air reservoir supply. This enables the Train Chief II system to support the full functionality of the locomotive without any non-typical system configurations. Below is discussion on some of the key elements of the locomotive interface. Refer to the system prints for the detailed interfacing requirements for your specific locomotive. Main Air Supply Shut-Off Valve and Filter Assembly Located on the bottom of the RCU unit is the main air supply input for all pneumatic functions controlled by the system. Ahead of the main air supply inlet (installed separately in the locomotive cab) there must be a pneumatic shut-off valve and filter assembly (supplied in the installation kit). The shut-off valve must be in the closed position (handle is at a right-angle to the air-line) for manual and in the open position (handle in-line) for remote. The assembly also includes two (2) filter housings: one is a particulate filter and the second is a coalescing unit. These filters protect the pneumatic components in the system. These filters must be part of your scheduled maintenance for the locomotive to insure optimum performance and maintain warranty requirements. Manual/Remote Transfer Switch The manual/remote transfer switch is located on the right-hand side of the RCU. The function of the switch is to transfer out critical manual (cab) locomotive functions when switching from manual to remote, and to transfer out critical remote functions when switching from remote to manual. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-13 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Manual/Remote Transfer Switch Selections and Functions Function Strobe Ignition Wire Throttle Switch Head Light Reverser Manual
(CAB) OUT IN IN IN IN Remote Comments IN OUT OUT OUT OUT Strobe active ONLY in remote mode Disables engine start when in remote mode. Disables manual throttle lever in remote mode. Disables manual headlight switch in remote mode. Disables reverser lever in remote mode. Dedicated Locomotive Hook-Ups Locomotive connections to the locomotive interface panel are accomplished through the bottom of the panel via dedicated locomotive hookups. These hookups consist of connector sockets based on system options to facilitate ease of installation.
The pneumatic connections are located on the bottom left of the panel, and include quick connect ports for main air, locomotive brake, train brake, and bail.
The rectangular connector is for the general locomotive interface cable. The cable is 30-
conductor with a strain relief. lights, and other optional features.
The round connector(s) are for specific functions such as external E-Stop, strobe status Refer to system prints, drawing E-9668-03-01 for more application specific details. Refer to Figure 6-7 for detailed pneumatic interface diagram. Always refer to your system prints for details specific to your system configuration. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-14 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL The Installation Kit Each system is shipped with an installation kit which includes various materials required for the integration of the receiver / controller unit into the locomotive systems. The types of standard materials provided included:
Power Supply Input Filter and Surge Suppressor. The DC locomotive power is conditioned by an input filter and surge suppressor. The function of this module is to protect the Train Chief II equipment from the electro-magnetic (EM) noise from the locomotive power source to insure reliable operation of the remote control system.
Surge Suppressors. Additional surge suppressor devices are provided to be installed across all locomotive devices that are considered inductive loads (coils, contactors, etc.). This is required to further control EM noise, created by the inductive devices, which may interfere with the control electronics.
Strobe Light. A strobe light, to be placed on the outside for the locomotive cab, is included to provide visual indications of system status during remote operation.
Locomotive Antenna System. The antenna system consists of a length of coaxial cable, mounting bracket, wave whip antenna, and the necessary parts and instructions to install the antenna cable and antenna. The locomotive antenna kit contains 20 of cable (custom length versions are available) with a TNC female bulkhead connector pre-installed (the other end is un-terminated to facilitate field installation), antenna mounting brackets, TNC right angle plug, cable strain relief, and instructions. The installation crimping tool kit (P/N 90-70-0-074) is required for proper antenna connector installation.
Cables. Pigtail cables are provided for the electrical interface between the receiver /
controller and the locomotive controls. Cables are provided with mating connectors at one end for direct connection to the receiver / controller enclosure.
Shock Mounts. Vibration shock mounts are provided for the mounting of the receiver /
controller in the locomotive cab. These are required to minimize the transfer of locomotive vibration and prevent damage to the receiver / controller components.
Pneumatic Interface Hardware. A variety of hardware is provided for the pneumatic interface between the receiver / controller and the locomotive air systems. A water separation/ filter assembly, shuttle valve, nylon tubing and various DOT-approved fittings are typical in this kit.
J1 Valve Kit. A J1 brake control valve can be provided, if trainline brakes are required. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-15 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL General Installation Practices WARNING: Before attempting to service any pneumatic components, ensure the air system has been vented to atmosphere (zero pressure in air lines). CAUTION: Contaminants in the air system can significantly reduce the component life and performance of the remote control pneumatics. Therefore, to insure long component life and optimum system performance it is essential to implement a preventive maintenance schedule for the locomotive pneumatics system. This should include draining water from the main reservoir tank and replacing filter cartridges. Failure to maintain main reservoir and/or filter may void the warranty. General Installation Practices
Resolve any problems with the locomotives operation prior to attempting any remote equipment installation or operation.
All field wiring should be done by a qualified electrician. All electrical work and practices must meet all federal, state, and local codes and standards.
Route all wire and/or cable to avoid moving parts, mechanical vibration points, pinch points, and high temperature surfaces. All wiring/cabling should be secured and must meet all federal, state, local, and industry standards.
Do not run power (high voltage > 50V) together with control (low voltage < 50V) wire or cable.
Electrical wiring running through the engine compartment should be contained in conduit of proper rating for the environmental conditions present.
All field plumbing should be done by a qualified technician. All plumbing work and practices must meet all federal, state, local, and industry standards.
Route all tubing and/or pipe to avoid moving parts, mechanical vibration points, pinch points, and high temperature surfaces. All tubing/piping should be secured and must meet all federal, state, local, and industry standards
All plastic plumbing components must be DOT Approved.
All equipment must be shock mounted in an appropriate manner to withstand all normal operational conditions. installation parts kit.
Always read and follow all instructions provided with specific components in the field
System specific requirements are included in the system print package. Please review before beginning the installation. If you have any questions please contact Control Chief Application Engineering department. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-16 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Specific Installation Requirements
During the installation you may have to mark-up prints. Upon completion of the installation forward these prints to Control Chief Corporation Application Engineering so the mark-ups can be incorporated in our drawings and an updated copy provided.
Locomotive Antenna Installation. Always consider the following general guidelines:
using the magnet mount hardware provided in the accessories kit. o The locomotive antenna should be mounted on the cab roof in a vertical position o The locomotive antenna should have a minimum clearance of 36 between it and any other obstruction mounted on the cab roof. If the minimum clearance is not possible, then the installation must be tested to determine if the proximity of obstructions impact system performance. antenna(s). o Do not locate antenna in close proximity of any existing UHF/VHF (voice) o Pick a location (typically as high as possible) that provides a clear path between o Ensure the antenna cable routing to the receiver / controller unit is such that the the antenna and the likely transmitter location(s). antenna cable will not be cut or damaged by any moving parts.
Wiring and Grounding. To avoid EM interference and ensure control system reliability, specific grounding and shielding practices are required. The following list provides the minimum guidelines and practices required:
o All coaxial and/or shielded cables are to be grounded at ONE end only. The cable shield must be grounded at the end closest to the transmitted voltage source (i.e. power supply end for transducers not at the transducer itself). o All required grounding must be to a common ground plane, which in turn has a o Bonding of the locomotive ground connection must be done using a copper braid single ground (bonding) connection to earth ground.
(provided). DO NOT SUBSITUTE.
Remote E-Stop Installation. All externally mounted remote E-Stop enclosures must be NEMA 4 rated. All remote E-Stop enclosures provided are NEMA 4 or better. Any field modifications must be done in such a way as to maintain this rating. All enclosure penetration must be appropriately sealed to prevent environmental leakage. Dowty washer should be used on all cable connectors.
Suppressors Installation Requirements. Another very important requirement, to minimize EMI, is the installation of suppressors across ALL inductive loads (solenoid valve and relay/contactor coils). Control Chief will provide all the appropriate suppressors based on your locomotive design. It is very important to identify all inductive loads present and to have the appropriate suppressors installed prior to remote control operation. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 3-17 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL 4 START UP AND OPERATING PROCEDURES Locomotive Stops The locomotive remote control system can automatically initiate either of two (2) types of locomotive stops, depending on the specific situation. The two locomotive stops are defined below and are referenced in subsequent operational descriptions. Full-Application Locomotive Stop - The full-application locomotive stop is automatically initiated in certain situations that are deemed non-emergency. This type of locomotive stop requires a reset of the OCU to resume normal operation. The full-application locomotive stop automatically initiates the following actions;
full application of independent (locomotive) brakes
full application of trainline brakes (when present)
locomotive throttle to idle
disengagement of generator field Emergency Locomotive Stop - The emergency locomotive stop is automatically initiated in certain situations (including the E-Stop command) that are deemed an emergency. This type of locomotive stop will require specific intervention in order to resume normal operation. The emergency locomotive stop automatically initiates the following actions;
emergency applications of independent (locomotive) brakes
emergency application of trainline brakes (when present)
locomotive throttle to idle
disengagement of generator field
After any emergency locomotive stop, the operator may not be able to restart the system from the remote OCU (or remote control station) because the locomotive will be in a Power Cut-off Switch (PCS) fault condition. To recover from this condition the operator may need to go to the locomotive cab to reset the PCS fault. PCS fault reset procedures will be dependant and specific to the locomotive. Locomotive PCS Fault The locomotive PCS fault is a latching condition that may occur on the locomotive that will prevent locomotive operation. This fault may occur whenever there is an emergency application of trainline brakes, based on a locomotive pressure switch that monitors the trainline brake air pressure.
The emergency application of trainline brakes will occur whenever the remote control system commands an emergency locomotive stop, forcing the PCS fault condition. This will happen whenever;
o an E-Stop button is pressed o the OCU tilt (man down) feature is triggered
Depending on the locomotive and whether it is in manual control or remote control mode, the procedure to reset a PCS fault may be different. It is the responsibility of the operator to understand the specific locomotive PCS fault reset procedures required. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 4-1 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Brake Monitoring In order to monitor brake related component failure, the system monitors the independent brake pressure. If the air pressure does not exceed at least 30 PSI within 3 seconds of a commanded FULL INDEPENDENT brake, then an EMERGENCY STOP condition is activated. To reset this condition, cycle power to the receiver cabinet only. When a brake monitor fault occurs, the Low Main Reservoir indicator light located on the top front of the receiver cabinet will flash at a rate of ON second and OFF second. This fault will force you to cycle power to the system to clear the fault. Setup for Remote Control Operation Initial Locomotive Setup It is essential for safe and efficient remote control operations that the locomotive is in proper working order in manual mode. Verify that all brake pipe hoses are connected and cutout valves are OPEN. Verify the transfer switch on RCU is in the MANUAL position. This switch is located on the right hand side of the unit. Verify the locomotive throttle is in idle and the reverser is centered. Start engine. Let engine idle in manual until main reservoir air pressure reaches 105-psi or greater. Verify the automatic brake valve handle is in the HANDLE OFF position. Wait for brake pipe pressure and equalizing reservoir pressure to equal zero. Both the brake pipe pressure and equalizing reservoir pressure must be equal before transferring to remote. Failure to do so will result in a locomotive PCS fault. CAUTION: Failure to position the automatic brake valve handle in the HANDLE OFF position could result in a brake release condition when the remote control system is switched back to manual mode. Place the transfer switch on the right side of the receiver / controller unit in the REMOTE position. Locate the isolation valve on the filter assembly air supply and make sure that the valve is in the ON/OPEN (UP) position. OCU Setup
All switches and levers should be in their OFF positions.
Set INDEPENDENT BRAKE Selector to fifth position for FULL service brake application.
Check AUTO BRAKE toggle in center position.
Place HORN/BELL switch in OFF position (toward operator).
Place the Reverser switch in NEUTRAL position.
Throttle selector in HALT position.
E-Stop pulled out.
OCU not tilted. Note: The operator should be wearing the break-away vest by this time. The unit should be secured to the break-away vest. The operator can adjust the equipment straps so the unit fits on the chest at a comfortable position. The break-away vest also has a waist belt to accommodate a comfortable fit using one of three belt sizes. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 4-2 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL
Turn on the Lightweight OCU by pressing the Power-On pushbutton at the lower right hand corner of the unit (see Figure 3-3). At power-on the OCU will perform a Power-On-
Self-Test (POST). When POST has completed successfully the unit is ready to be assigned to a Train Chief II equipped locomotive. A successful POST is indicated by the flashing OCU indicators and display message (OCU >
LOCO ALIGN IR). If an error is detected during the POST an error message will be displayed and the unit will be disabled. See the troubleshooting section for further details. OCU Assignment Procedure Register OCU with Locomotive How to Register the OCU for single man operation. At Receiver Power up: IR Indicating LED illuminated (RED)
Power up Transmitter and wait for POST. Follow prompts on Transmitter display.
Align Transmitter IR port with Receiver IR Window on Enclosure front (Fig 6.1).
Once the IR Process is complete the Transmitter will BEEP. Press the RESET button to initiated RF communication. The IR Indication LED will go off. At Transmitter Only Power up (Receiver already ON) LED Not illuminated:
Power up Transmitter and wait for POST. Follow prompts on Transmitter display.
Push & hold (for 3 seconds till LED comes on) the IR REQUEST pushbutton.
Align Transmitter IR port with Receiver IR Window on Enclosure front (Fig 6.1)
Once the IR Process is complete a Transmitter will BEEP. Pre4ss the RESET button to initiated RF communication. The IR Indication LED will go off. OCU Configuration Incompatibility Messages and Definitions:
Display Message Definition Action CONFIG RADIO Model/Owner is not compatible. OCU Models can not be interchanged with RCUs or with different equipment owners. OCU and RCU Radio model types incompatible BAND Radio out of Band Obtain the unit(s) configured for the RCU and register. Refer to the configuration label next to the IR Port on the RCU. (For MU&Go RCUs this label is inside the enclosure door.) Obtain the unit(s) configured for the RCU and register. Refer to the configuration label next to the IR Port on the RCU. (For MU&Go RCUs this label is inside the enclosure door.) Obtain the unit(s) configured for the RCU and register. Refer to the configuration label next to the IR Port on the RCU. (For MU&Go RCUs this label is inside the enclosure door.) 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 4-3 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Transfer to Remote Mode and Resetting Locomotive PCS Fault. To activate the communication link from OCU to locomotive, move the horn toggle to HORN. The locomotive should respond by sounding the locomotive horn. Return the toggle to OFF. Note: If the locomotive bell begins to sound it is an indication that the main reservoir is below 75-psi. This could indicate that the isolation valve is in the wrong position. Recheck the valve and continue with the start up procedure. If the valve is in the correct position then recharge the main air reservoir. This is accomplished by placing the directional switch on the OCU in NEUTRAL and increase engine throttle. Throttle will automatically reduce once the 105-psi main reservoir pressure in reached. Now activate the RESET button. Release the trainline brake by pressing the AUTO BRAKE toggle switch to the release position. The command is accepted when the keypad AUTO BRAKE REL indicator turns ON. Reset the locomotive PCS fault, if required.
Older systems did not provide an indication of when or if the PCS Fault was activated. If the system didnt respond the operator would go to the locomotive and manually reset the fault.
On newer systems the locomotive brake status lights are disabled when a PCS Fault is activated. To recover from PCS Fault the operator simply sounds the horn. When the fault is cleared the brake status lights should turn on.
The OCU with two-way communication link will be able to show a PCS Fault message on the OCU display. Ensure the Independent (locomotive) brake valve handle is in the FULL INDEPENDENT RELEASE position. WARNING:
The remote control system cannot control independent brakes until the independent brake valve handle is in the FULL INDEPENDENT RELEASE position. Ensure that the manual headlight switches are OFF, the dimmer switch is set to DIM, the generator field is ON, and the isolation switch is in the RUN position. If Trainline Braking option is installed:
For systems utilizing the J1 relay valve for trainline, place the trainline isolation valve to
For systems utilizing the 26L brake cover for trainline, place the trainline dump valve to the REMOTE position. the OPEN or REMOTE position. The remote control system now has primary control of the locomotive. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 4-4 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Air Brakes and Safety Features Test According to the FRA Safety Advisory 2001-01 it is recommended that the air brake and safety function of the OCU be tested at the beginning of any remote control activity. The following summary is provided in support of that practice. Locomotive Brake Test. Perform all required standard locomotive and trainline brake tests using the OCU to ensure all remote braking functionality. E-Stop Test. Perform an E-Stop from the OCU to verify remote activation of the emergency locomotive stop. Also test all other locomotive mounted E-Stop push buttons associated with the remote control system. Tilt Test. To test the Tilt feature of the OCU, tilt the OCU more than 45-degress. The OCU is operating properly when:
A continuous tone begins within approximately three (3) seconds
Then a Tilt Time Out occurs after approximately two (2) seconds of tone
The RCU responds by commanding an Emergency Locomotive Stop To recover from a Tilt Time Out Fault, return the OCU to normal operation position. Local Man-Down Alarm Test. To test the local man down alarm, maintain the OCU in a tilted position while in an active tilt alarm condition. After a period of not greater than 90-seconds and not less than 60-seconds the locomotive horn shall sound at an alternating rate of one second. The locomotive horn will continue to sound the man down alarm until the system is reset. Remote Man-Down Alarm Test (if present). If your system is equipped with the optional remote man down feature, the remote man down alarm is triggered when the local man down alarm is activated. Refer to the system configuration documents for your specific operational detail. Alert Test To test the Alert feature of the OCU
Place the Reverser selector in Neutral
Place Independent Brake to Full position
Set Auto Brake to RELEASE (or some application to hold the train in position)
Set Throttle selector out of HALT
Wait for approximately 50 seconds The OCU is operating properly when
A fast rate pulse tone begins after approximately 50 seconds
Then after approximately 10 seconds an Alert Time OUT occurs
The RCU responds by commanding Full Service Locomotive and Automatic Brake Application. To recover from an Alert Time Out, return the OCU Throttle selector to HALT position. Initial start-up and safety checks are completed. The system is ready for operation. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 4-5 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Normal Operation Train Chief II with Lightweight OCU Brake/Throttle Control Configuration As an operator, you can control movement with an OCU in several different ways. This section covers:
Setting movement direction
Starting (Train Handling)
Alert Operation
Stopping and changing directions
Emergency brake applications
Winter operation
Transferring operator control (Selective Dual Control option) Setting Movement direction Set direction of movement using the reverser selector.
Forward is the direction the short hood in the Train Chief II equipped locomotive faces.
Train Chief II does not allow you to change the direction of movement until the locomotive brakes are fully applied. Operating procedure:
Throttle selector to HALT.
Wait for locomotive to come to a complete stop.
Move Reverser to a desired direction selection. o If a direction change is made while the locomotive brakes are released, the OCU will declare a Reverser Change Alarm and the controller will command the throttle to idle, apply full locomotive brakes, and disengage generator field. o To recover from the Reverser Change Alarm place the Throttle selector to HALT position. Caution This Train Chief II configuration employs a Manual Throttle & Brake Control enabling the operator to achieve similar movement control as if the operator where at the locomotive control stand. This type of operation from a distance requires the operator to be very conservative about judging speed and stopping distances relative to being in or near the locomotive cab. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 4-6 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Starting (Train Handling)
Set Movement Direction (FWD or REV)
RELEASE Automatic Brakes by pulling the toggle switch for 1-2 seconds (if equipped).
RELEASE the locomotive brakes:
o Move the Independent Brake selector to RELEASE (rotation toward operator) as shown by all indicators off.
Press RESET (to reset brakes) the RESET. o Throttle selector must be moved from the HALT position within 3 seconds of pressing
Advance the throttle selector to the appropriate throttle position to generate the required power to slowly accelerate the train.
Use the Automatic or Independent Brake selectors to slow or stop the locomotive. o Locomotive brakes can also be applied by moving the throttle selector to HALT. o Press RESET o Within two seconds the Throttle selector must be moved out of HALT position or else
To resume movement (without reverser change):
the selection will be ignored. If ignored, place Throttle to HALT and repeat from RESET. Note: Radio Communications Typically the OCU transmits four messages per second to the locomotive equipment. If the locomotive does not receive a valid message within a set timeout period (typ 1.25 sec) a Full Service Brake Application will occur. During the timeout period the last valid command will prevail. Alert Operation The operator alert function is activated when the Throttle selector is moved out of the HALT position (regardless of the Reverser selection). If there has not been any function or command switch activity (i.e. periodic pressing of the RESET switch) for more than 60 seconds then Train Chief II will automatically initiate the Full-
Application Locomotive Stop command. o The Alert Timeout warning will cause a fast pulse tone after 50 seconds of command switch inactivity to alert the operator of an impending Full-Application Locomotive Stop. If the operator responds to the Alert Warning by pressing ANY button within 10 seconds the alarm is cleared.
To recover from an Alert Timeout, return the OCU Throttle selector to HALT position.
The specific time setting for the alert feature may be different, based on specific user o request. Refer to site operating rules. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 4-7 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Stopping and Changing Directions To stop the train manually using the Independent Brake selector:
Rotate the Throttle selector to IDLE
Rotate the Independent brake selector to apply the required braking power to bring the
Once the train is stopped a new direction can be selected using the reverser toggle train to a manually controlled stop. switch. To stop the train automatically using HALT:
Turn the Throttle selector to HALT and wait three (3) seconds for the HALT timeout indicated by a single OCU beep. The RCU will automatically apply a controlled application of independent brake. o set Independent Brake selector to RELEASE, o press RESET and within three (3) seconds move the Throttle selector out of HALT.
To recover from a Full Brake application Note: This is a more aggressive controlled stop where the Train Chief II system applies a ramped application of independent brake until a full-application locomotive stop is achieved. Trainline Brake Operation (when equipped) When the Train Chief II system is equipped with optional trainline brake control the Automatic Brake selector on the OCU will be used to apply and release train brakes.
The Automatic Brake release is selected when the toggle is pulled toward the operator o The receiver / controller commands full air pressure to the brake pipe which places the train brakes in a fully released state.
The trainline brakes are progressively applied each time the trainline brake switch is momentarily pressed away from the operator. o When the switch returns to center the last commanded pressure is maintained. o If desired, Bail off independent brakes by pressing the Bail function switch.
When the Automatic Brake selector is pressed for apply for more than two (2) seconds full service trainline brakes are commanded. Tilt When communications are active and the OCU is tilted, the audible indicator will sound a continuous beep (critical warning) for about 2 seconds before commanding an emergency locomotive stop. Once the emergency locomotive stop command is sent, the alarm no longer sounds continuously, but will sound once every 3 seconds to indicate that the locomotive emergency stop command continues to be sent.
This condition continues as long as the OCU remains tilted. The tilt condition is cleared when the OCU is returned to its upright position, or when power is turned off, or when the battery becomes fully discharged.
Once cleared, the tilt alarm will stop. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 4-8 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Tilt Extend The tilt extend is provided to facilitate operator tasks requiring two hands. To extend the tilt timeout the independent brakes must be applied.
Set the Throttle selector to HALT.
Press the F1 push button on the keypad until the OCU acknowledges the request with a beep then release F1.
The operator has 60 seconds to perform tasks while tilting the OCU.
The Tilt Extend is canceled when the operator moves the Independent Brake from the FULL application selection or moves the Throttle Selector out of HALT. Man Down Alarm When the tilt function has been active for more than 1 minute the locomotive horn will begin to cycle on and off or sound continuously depending on your site operating rules. The alarm will continue to be active until the receiver/controller is reset. If the OCU is returned to its normal operating position before the man down timer expires the alarm will be cleared. To recover from Man Down Alarm: recycle power on the RCU and OCU. Then perform initial setup procedures. See Chapter 4. Emergency brake Applications In emergency situations, emergency brakes are activated by pushing in the RED Mushroom push button next to the reverser switch. This action causes the OCU to send an operator Emergency Stop command. The controller will respond by commanding an Emergency Locomotive Stop. To recover from an operator Emergency Stop, pull-out the Red E-stop mushroom push button, Throttle selector to HALT, Independent Brake to FULL. Train Chief II will also apply emergency brakes when a serious fault occurs in the system. In either case, Train Chief II quickly opens the Brake pipe to apply emergency brakes to both locomotive brakes and trainline.
When operating with dual OCUs in Selective Dual Control operation, the locomotive will accept an Emergency Stop command from either OCU at any time. Note: An emergency brake application completely drains (dumps) the brake pipe on all cars. Recharging times will vary greatly depending on the number of cars connected and weather conditions. Operating under winter conditions During winter conditions, brake components may get covered with snow or ice and braking power may be reduced. Therefore, during these types of conditions, make regular brake applications to keep the braking components working properly.
With the locomotive moving at a speed of no greater than 4 mph (6 ft/sec), apply a small amount of brakes by moving the Independent Brake selector to Low position. This allows friction to melt away snow and ice on the shoes and wheels. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 4-9 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Transferring from Remote to Manual
Go to the locomotive and place the independent brake handle into the FULL APPLY position and the automatic brake handle to the EMERGENCY position.
Place the transfer switch on the receiver / controller unit in the MANUAL position.
Place the air valve that feeds the receiver / controller unit in the OFF/MANUAL position.
Place the brake pipe isolation valve in the MANUAL position.
Recover from the locomotive PCS fault condition using the normal procedure.
Move the auto automatic brake handle to the RELEASE position.
If Trainline Braking option is installed:
o For systems utilizing the J1 relay valve for trainline, place the trainline isolation valve to the MANUAL position. o For systems utilizing the 26L brake cover for trainline, place the trainline dump valve to the CLOSED or MANUAL position.
Move the independent brake handle to the SET position.
Turn off and secure the OCU to provide protection against unauthorized operation.
Resume normal operations. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 4-10 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL 5 OPTIONS The following optional features are included in your Train Chief II system. Special Features Supplied Independent Brake Bail Option The locomotive independent brakes are applied and released automatically by the locomotive brake distribution valve (if equipped), in a manner similar to that which is achieved when braking is controlled manually from the locomotive brake stand. The bail function allows the independent brake to be released while the trainline brake continues to be applied. Locomotive Mounted E-Stops In addition to the E-Stop button located on the OCU, up to four (4) additional hardwired E-Stop buttons can be provided on the locomotive. All E-Stop buttons are wired in series such that activation of any one will command the E-Stop reaction. These additional E-Stop buttons must be located on the locomotive, since they are hard wired into the receiver / controller unit. Wheel-slip Alarm Option When present, the existing locomotives wheel slip monitoring device can be monitored by the locomotive remote control system. When wheel slip is detected by the LRCS the throttle can be automatically reduced or maintained steady depending on customers decision at time of purchase. Throttle advance is also restricted while there is wheel slip being detected. Sanding Options Direct electric control has been provided to initiate the locomotive sanding function. Typically the dual function RESET / SAND pushbutton as described in Chapter 3 is employed on the OCU for this function. Sanding is always in the direction of travel. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 5-1 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL OCU Two-Way Operational Messages OCU Status Messages (Solicited) Item OCU Message Description Comments 1 2 3 4 BATT LVL E F MAIN RES XXX PSI BRK PIPE XX PSI BRKCLDNR XX PSI OCU Battery Level Main Reservoir Pressure (PSI) Brake Pipe Pressure (PSI) Brake Cylinder Pressure (PSI) Comments OCU Operational Warning and Alarm Messages (Unsolicited) Description OCU Message Item RCU Operational Action Full Locomotive Stop MR < 105 PSI Low MR
(Low MR Pressure) MAN DOWN OCU-A OCU E-STOP RCU E-STOP REVERSER
(Illegal Reverser Change) TILT
(Tilt Timeout) WHL SLIP Emergency Stop Emergency Stop Emergency Stop Full Locomotive Stop Operator requests an emergency External E-Stop on Locomotive activated (pushed IN) Direction change while in movement or not in STOP Emergency Stop Throttle hold Tilt Timeout Wheel Slip 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 5-2 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL 6 DETAILED EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTIONS Lightweight OCU Features The Train Chief II LRCS receiver/controller unit and Lightweight OCU operate with the Advanced Universal Transmitter system that allows the assignment of a given OCU to a specific locomotive. The OCU assignment system will allow any OCU to be assigned to any locomotive, with identical controls and configuration. This system provides an extensive degree of flexibility for any given equipment set. The Advanced Universal Transmitter incorporates an additional level of communication security to ensure that only authorized and authenticated (properly assigned) OCUs will work with locomotives within the designated group. www.controlchief.com Figure 6-1 IR Port Operational Description
Each receiver / controller unit (located in the locomotive) has a unique hard coded identification code and (within a group of locomotives) a discrete radio frequency.
Each OCU has a unique identification code and is radio frequency agile to operate on any of the locomotive groups frequencies.
The OCU and locomotive are field configured to operate together by using the OCU assignment procedure.
OCU assignment is accomplished through a duplex infra-red link that exchanges information (data) between the receiver / controller unit and the OCU. The receiver /
controller locomotives ID code and operating frequency and the OCUs ID code are exchanged during this process. Once completed, the specific OCU is assigned to that specific locomotive and RF communication and remote control operations can commence over the radio link.
Since both the locomotive and OCU have exchanged their unique identities, the OCU can only communicate with its assigned locomotive. If an attempt is made to assign the OCU to another locomotive, the assignment process will re-write the locomotives data in the OCU memory, disabling RF communication to the previous locomotive.
Since the locomotive receiver and OCU trade their unique identities they are then paired to the exclusion of other nearby OCU s and receivers until power is removed or a re-
assignment occurs. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 6-1 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL
Anytime the locomotive is returned to manual operation or the OCU power is switched OFF, the stored data will be lost requiring the assignment process to be repeated. The OCU will not lose its assignment data during a hot battery swap if the swap is accomplished promptly, within approximately 1 minute. IR Registration Process:
At Receiver Power up: IR Indicating LED illuminated (RED)
Power up Transmitter and wait for POST. Follow prompts on Transmitter display.
Align Transmitter IR port with Receiver IR Window on Enclosure front (Fig 6.1).
Once the IR Process is complete the Transmitter will BEEP. Press the RESET button to initiated RF communication. The IR Indication LED will go off. At Transmitter Only Power up (Receiver already ON) LED Not illuminated:
Power up Transmitter and wait for POST. Follow prompts on Transmitter display.
Push & hold (for 3 seconds till LED comes on) the IR REQUEST pushbutton.
Align Transmitter IR port with Receiver IR Window on Enclosure front (Fig 6.1)
Once the IR Process is complete a Transmitter will BEEP. Pre4ss the RESET button to initiated RF communication. The IR Indication LED will go off. OCU Controls 14 13 12 1 2 3 15 11 10 9 8 7 4 5 6 Figure 6-2: OCU-BTIND Main Controls 1. Throttle Selector:
Ten detents for HALT, IDLE and eight (8) increments of throttle position. The throttle selection is indicated by LEDs on the display. Throttle select positions:
Halt: commands the throttle to idle, removes generator field and applies independent brakes in a controlled manner. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 6-2 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Idle: commands the throttle to idle, removes generator field, but does not apply brakes. The remaining settings 1 8 command the same throttle settings as the control cab console settings of the same number. 2. Power Switch:
Recessed Push-ON Push-OFF switch controls power to the OCU. Pressing the button applies power to the unit from the battery pack and power bridge. Pressing the button again removes power to the unit. Depending on the charge state of the power bridge, the OCU may initiate its POST (Power-On-Self-Test) without an installed battery, but the unit will inhibit further operation until a battery pack is installed. 3. Pitch:
This button is used to transfer LRC command to another OCU for Pitch & Catch operations when Selective Dual Control is operational. Refer to page 4-2 in this manual describing the Selective Dual Control feature. 4. Horn / Bell Switch:
This is a 3-positon switch. It is latched at the rear (OFF) position and at the center (BELL) position. The forward (HORN) position is spring loaded to return to BELL position when released. Return the switch to the OFF position to silence the Bell. Specific to BELL function: Whenever locomotive independent brakes are fully applied and the Throttle selector is moved from Halt to some movement position, Train Chief II sounds the bell for 5 to 15 seconds. (Bell ringing durations are based on customer requirements for their operation.) Specific to HORN function: The Horn function is used to acknowledge or accept a Pitch from a transferring OCU. 5. Headlight / Extra Tilt Extend button: (options) When the Headlight option is installed this button can toggle the state of the locomotive headlights between DIM (default setting) and BRIGHT, or between ON and OFF. An indicator on the OCU keypad will indicate the state of the control. See Chapter 5 for full explanation. When the Tilt Extend option is installed this button will perform the same function as the F1 button on the keypad. 6. Audible Alarm:
The audible alarm provides a means with which to audibly prompt the operator of operational status thereby enabling the operator to maintain visual attention on the task at hand. The following table provides a description of the various alarm functions and their audible indications. Function OCU Assignment Success OCU Assignment Failure Alert Time-Out Warning Tilt Warning Tilt Time Extend Acknowledged OCU Detected Error Condition Low Battery Warning Low Battery Shutdown Warning Low Battery Shutdown Sound Pattern 1 Beep 2 Beeps Fast Beep rate for 10 seconds Constant tone for up to 3 seconds 1 Beep 3 Beeps Double beep every 30 seconds (up to 15 minutes.) Double beep every 15 seconds (up to 5 minutes.) 1 beep every 4 seconds replace battery pack to recover. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 6-3 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL 7. Independent Brake Selector:
Six position selector allows you to apply independent locomotive brakes to achieve the desired stopping power. Selectable positions are:
Release (0 psi): this is the normal operating position when operating in power mode (Throttle positions 1-8). (Note RELEASE selection is indicated when all Independent Brake LEDs are off.) B1: Applies 1/5 of the available independent brake pressure to the brake cylinders. Throttle selections T1 to T8 are allowed. B2: Applies 2/5 of the available independent brake pressure to the brake cylinders. Throttle selections T1 to T8 are allowed. B3: Applies 3/5 of the available independent brake pressure to the brake cylinders. Throttle selections T1 to T8 are allowed. B4: Applies 4/5 of the available independent brake pressure to the brake cylinders. When brake pressure reaches 20 PSI the throttle is limited to T4. See note. FULL: Applies total available independent brake pressure to the brake cylinders. When brake pressure reaches 20 PSI the throttle is limited to T4. See note. NOTE: The parameters used to establish thresholds for limiting throttle for a given brake pressure can be adjusted per owners operating rules and requirements. 8. Internal Tilt Switch:
Located behind the keypad is an internal tilt switch or sensing device. If the transmitter is tilted in any axis beyond 60-degress of upright for more than the preprogrammed tilt timeout setting
(typically 5 seconds), a tilt alarm becomes active. The tilt alarm feature is described in more detail in Chapter 4. 9. Reset (optionally Reset/Bail):
The pushbutton located at the top left hand corner of the OCU provides an Alert reset function:
1. It resets the Alert warning. See page 4-9. 2. It instructs the RCU to allow a brake release when the operator moves the Throttle selector out of the HALT position. CAUTION:
Unless the Reset pushbutton is released, an Alert Timeout error will occur and the system will command a Full-Application Locomotive Stop. This pushbutton can also perform the optional dual function of RESET / BAIL. Alert reset functions are same as above. The BAIL function allows the independent brakes to be released while the train brake remains applied. For the BAIL function, when the button is pressed for longer than 2 seconds the controller will bail off independent brake. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 6-4 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL 10. Automatic Brake Selector:
This 3-position spring centered switch allows you to release or apply train brakes by reducing brake pipe by the following pressures:
Release Minimum Light Medium Full The Charge position is used to charge the air brake system. 0-psi reduction 6-8 psi reduction 10 psi reduction 18 psi reduction 26 psi reduction The center switch position (LAP) maintains the last brake setting. Each time the switch is pressed (must be held for 0.5 sec); the train brakes are incremented to the next higher/lower setting. On the first application of Auto Brake the locomotive brake portion of the train brake application is automatically bailed off. Whenever the switch is pulled (must be held for 2 sec), the train brakes immediately revert back to Release position. 11. Emergency Stop Push Button:
This control is a push-pull mushroom switch. Push-in to activate an operator commanded Emergency Locomotive Stop. For normal operations the EMERGENCY mushroom must be pulled-out. Note: Emergency stop develops high brake cylinder pressures which increases the chance of locking the locomotive wheels. Therefore, only use the EMERGENCY mushroom switch when absolutely necessary. 12. IR Port:
Used to link OCU to Train Chief II locomotive controller. Align with IR Port on the RCU when registering a Lightweight OCU-BTIND with RCU. This is the access window for IR (infrared) communication from the OCU when registering with a RCU. Simply align the OCU IR port with the IR port per the instructions in Chapter 4. 13. Reverser Toggle:
This 3-position switch selects locomotive movement direction as Forward, Reverse, or Neutral. 14. Reset / Sand Button:
Pressing Reset for more than 2-seconds will activate Sanding by selected direction. The Reset/Sand push button is located at the top right hand corner of the OCU. 1. It activates the sanders in the direction of movement when held for longer than 2 seconds. 2. It resets the Alert warning. See page 4-9. 3. It instructs the RCU to allow a brake release when the operator moves the Throttle selector out of the HALT position. Unless the Reset pushbutton is released, an Alert Timeout error will occur and the system will command a Full-Application Locomotive Stop. 15. Internal Antenna:
To enhance robustness and reliability the OCU is equipped with an internal antenna. Keeping this susceptible component safely inside the OCU case minimizes repairs and downtime. CAUTION:
95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 6-5 Control Chief Corporation 1 2 TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL OCU Keypad, Indicators and Display 11 12 10 9 8 3 4 5 7 6 Figure 6-3: OCU-BTIND Keypad Indicators 1 INDEPENDENT BRAKE INDICATORS: Displays selected locomotive brake setting. Green LEDs indicate the wearers control setting and Red LEDs indicate settings for the companion operator during Selective Dual Control operations. The Independent Brake FULL LED will flash during a TILT warning alarm or to indicate that the OCU has commanded an Emergency Locomotive Stop. 2 AUTOMATIC BRAKE INDICATORS: Displays selected automatic (Trainline) brake setting. Green LEDs indicate the wearers control setting and Red LEDs indicate settings for the companion operator during Selective Dual Control operations. The Automatic Brake FULL LED will flash during an Alert timer alarm or to indicate that the OCU has commanded a Full-Application Locomotive Stop. 3 HORN / BELL Button Designator: Identifies toggle switch functions. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 6-6 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL 4 LOW BATTERY INDICATOR:
5 SOFTKEYS:
Blinking Battery Low. This is an indication that OCU operational time is limited. The battery pack should be replaced with a freshly charged pack. The limited operational time during LOW battery condition will vary based on ambient temperature, battery service time, and usage. Operational run time in the LOW battery condition can range from 15 to 45 minutes. Steady Battery Dead. The battery dead condition indicates the pack has reached a discharge level where continued operation cannot be assured reliable. When the OCU detects this condition, operation will be inhibited and the OCU is placed in the lowest power mode. F1 = Tilt Extend. Under normal conditions this will extend the allowable Tilt time before sounding Alarm. Also see page 4-9. To activate this command the operator must hold the key in the Tilt Ext position for 2 seconds until the OCU sounds a BEEP to acknowledge Tilt Ext has been activated. If the operator anticipates having to tilt the OCU for more than a few seconds, pushing the F1 Softkey extends the allowable tilt time to 60 seconds. Tilting the OCU more than 45-degrees turns ON an audible alarm for 3 seconds. If the OCU is not restored to the upright position before this alarm finishes, the OCU sends an Emergency Locomotive Stop command to the locomotive. If the OCU remains in the tilted condition for more than one minute the Man Down Alarm will become activated. Refer to Man Down Alarm (page 4-9) for more details. F2 = optional F3 = optional F4 = Status. Utilized to activate Status report on 2-line display pushbutton. 6 HEADLIGHT INDICATOR: Illuminates when headlights have been activated by front panel 7 DIRECTIONAL INDICATORS: Displays direction selected by front toggle switch. Green LEDs indicate the wearers control setting and Red LEDs indicate settings for the companion operator during Selective Dual Control operations. 8 THROTTLE SELECT INDICATORS: Displays selected locomotive throttle setting. Green LEDs indicate the wearers control setting and Red LEDs indicate settings for the companion operator during Selective Dual Control operations. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 6-7 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL 9 2-LINE x 8-CHARACTER DISPLAY: LED Dot Matrix displays system status messages. Two intensity levels depending on ambient light sensor. The display provides the operator with the following information:
General Display Message At Power On OCU Infrared Registration Acknowledgement Error Conditions Description Manufacturer ID Hardware Status Unit Serial Number Firmware Version Battery Condition Locomotive Running Number (typically a four digit number) Pitch & Catch Assignment (A or B) Network Info (Protocol and RCL operating Mode) Hardware Status (memory fault, program fault, others) Battery Conditions RF Diagnostics Below the 2-line 16 char LED Dot Matrix Display are four push buttons. These push buttons are used for OCU configuration and diagnostics. Future use is for specialized user applications, such as, initiating a remote switch actuation or other auxiliary track side application. 10 EMERGENCY STOP DESIGNATOR: Indicates E-Stop button location. 11 OCU A-B INDICATORS: Indicates OCU designation (A or B). 12 AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR: Used to automatically adjust backlighting, indicators, and display brightness. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 6-8 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Battery and Battery Charger Details Battery Pack:
The power source for the Lightweight OCU is a rechargeable 7.4 V Lithium-Ion battery pack specifically designed for the Lightweight OCU. The battery pack is designed to provide 12-
hours of continuous operation. The battery pack contains an internal capacity monitor. This monitor will be interrogated to report to the operator the remaining run time of the pack. The run time report will be shown to the operator via the display at power on and when the status SOFTKEY F4 is pressed. The Battery Pack is installed in the back of the OCU. Do not allow any metal to come in contact with the contact pads of the battery pack. If the battery contact pads do become shorted the internal protection mechanism will cause the battery to open circuit. If the battery is placed in the OCU the OCU is going to either not function or report a dead battery. Set the pack aside for a few moments to allow the protection circuit to reset. Advantages of Lithium-Ion batteries:
None of the memory effects of Ni-Cd batteries. Higher energy density than Ni-Cd or Ni-MH batteries. Battery Maintenance:
Proper care and maintenance will assure optimum performance of the batteries for your application. Do Not Incinerate. Do Not Disassemble. Do Not short connection pads. Do Not expose to high temps (>140F/80C). Disposal method per local and state regulations. Battery Charging:
Connect charger to appropriate power source and turn on power switch. Power indicator should be illuminated. Secure battery pack in charger. FAST charge indicator will turn ON. (The FAST indicator may not turn on if a fully charged battery pack is installed in the charger. This is normal.) FULL charge indicator will turn ON when pack reaches 85%. o o If a FAULT occurs during either FAST or FULL charge, cycle power switch OFF then ON. If the FAULT persists remove battery pack from service and return to factory for repair. DONE illuminates when both FULL and FAST charge indicators turn off. o Battery pack can remain in charger. o Charger will restart charging process when voltage recharge below drops battery threshold. Figure 6-5 Battery Charger 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 6-9 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Typical Locomotive Pneumatic Interface
Figure 6-6 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 6-10 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL 7 TROUBLESHOOTING Lightweight OCU Troubleshooting General The following troubleshooting procedure is provided to assist in the identification of specific problems and/or abnormal operation. Control Chief recommends that you contact us before attempting any field repairs. Power-On-Self-Test If errors are detected during POST (Power-On-Self-Test) the display will show an error message and further operation will be inhibited. POST Error Message example: POST, ERR
#123. If your unit reports a POST error message please note the message number, cycle power on the unit and begin operations again. If the POST error persists call Product Support
(contact information contained in Chapter 8 of this manual) to report the error and obtain additional details. Useful information to expedite the error resolution would be the system number and the information on the back label of the OCU (part #, serial #, railroad reporting mark ID). Fig 7-1: Power-On-Self-Test OCU Beeps When a Switch is Pressed This typically occurs on a power-up cycle and the switches have not been returned to their start-
up positions: E-Stop pulled out, direction to NEUTRAL, OCU not tilted, throttle at HALT, independent brake at FULL, and push buttons released (not jammed). OCU ERROR Indications If the 2-line LED display indicates ERROR then use this section to determine the next course of action. If there is a communication problem please refer to the Communication Troubleshooting section, page 7-9. When an ERROR condition occurs the OCU will send an immediate emergency locomotive stop command. The unit will remain in this condition until power is removed and the problem corrected. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 7-1 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL OCU Diagnostics The Lightweight OCU transmitter has a complete set of built-in diagnostic tests, to verify the functionality of all switches and levers. The tests are available by accessing the transmitters diagnostic mode and making a specific test selection using the function switches. CAUTION: Before performing any transmitter diagnostic test, transfer the locomotive to manual. The Diagnostic Mode and Menu Use the following procedure to enter transmitter diagnostic mode:
1. Once the unit is ready to register with the Locomotive the unit will respond to the following function switch selections. 2. F4 and F1: Lamp Test. To exit press F1. 3. F4 and F2: Switch Test. To exit cycle power. Lamp Test All indicators shall be ON. The display shall show the message, Running LAMP TST. To exit press F1. Fig 7-2: OCU-BTIND Lamp Test 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 7-2 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL The Switch Diagnostic Test If during the course of operations certain switch functions appear to be non-responsive or intermittent, use the transmitter diagnostic switch test for switch troubleshooting. The switch test provides a method to test transmitter switches without actually operating the locomotive. Press F1 and F4 simultaneously to enter the diagnostic switch test. Once in the test mode, rotating or activating the switches will show a corresponding change in the display groups identified in Fig 7-3. Refer to the tables below for switch to display indicator mapping. Front Left Switch Group Independent Brake Selector Keypad Functions F1, F2, F3, F4 Front Right Switch Group Throttle Selector Tilt Switch Status Indicator Fig 7-3: OCU Switch Diagnostic Display To exit diagnostic switch test, cycle power. Front Left Switch Group LH RESET LH FRONT PB AUTO BRAKE CENTER AUTO BRAKE RELEASE AUTO BRAKE APPLY BELL/HORN OFF BELL/HORN BELL BELL/HORN HORN Independent Brake Selector RELEASE B1 B2 B3 B4 FULL Display 02 04 00 10 20 80 00 40 Display B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 7-3 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL KEYPAD Function Softkeys Display Throttle Selector F1 F2 F3 F4 HALT IDLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Front Right Switch Group RH RESET RH FRONT PB REVERSER NEUTRAL REVERSER FWD REVERSER REV EMERG DEPRESSED EMERG PULLED OUT Tilt Indicator
(Upright)
(Tilted) 08 04 02 01 Display T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 Display 40 20 00 04 08 00 03 Display t T If the E-Stop switch is pushed in, the audible alarm will beep fast. To exit diagnostic switch test, cycle power. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 7-4 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL SLC 500 Troubleshooting This section provides a basic troubleshooting guide for the SLC 500 power supply and processor modules. Please review the tables below for the fault condition your system is exhibiting. Additional SLC 500 troubleshooting information is available in the Allen-Bradley publication 1746-6.2. If your attempts are not successful in correcting an error condition, please do not hesitate to contact Control Chief Product Support for assistance. Please refer to the Chapter 8 for required reporting details and contact information. WARNING: Do not remove any PLC modules with power applied. Note: The power supply module LED indicator should be ON when power is applied to the input terminals, however, the LED could be OFF even when input power is present. Check input terminals with a volt meter to verify power is removed. The following SLC 500 error condition tables provide troubleshooting assistance for SLC 500 power supply and processor LED states, their potential cause, and recommended actions to resolve the error condition. SLC 500 Error Conditions and Action - System Power Processor Power Supply POWER RUN CPU FLT Error Cause Actions OFF OFF OFF No Line Power OFF OFF OFF Inadequate System Power OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Power Supply Fuse Blown Power Supply Overloaded Defective Power Supply 1. Verify proper line voltage and connections on the power terminals. 2. Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection. 1. Check the incoming power fuse, check for proper incoming power connections. Replace fuse. If fuse blows again, replace the power supply. 2. 2. 1. Remove line power to power supply. Remove several output modules from the chassis. Wait five minutes. Reapply power. If condition reoccurs, re-calculate module configuration power required and verify proper power supply selection. This problem can occur intermittently if power supply is slightly overloaded when output loading and temperature varies. 1. Recheck other probable causes. 2. Monitor the line power to chassis power supply for possible transient or shorting. 3. Replace power supply. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 7-5 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL SLC 500 Error Conditions and Actions - Power Supply Source Processor Power Supply POWER RUN CPU FLT OFF OFF ON Error Cause Actions Inadequate System Power Improper Line Power Voltage Selection Verify proper input power supply voltage. SLC 500 Error Conditions and Actions - Processor Not in RUN Mode Error Cause Actions Processor Power Supply POWER RUN CPU FLT ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF Either Improper Mode Selected or User Program Logic Error Line Power Out of Operating Range ON OFF OFF Processor Not in RUN Mode ON OFF OFF Improper Seating of Power Supply, and/or Processor in the Chassis Defective Processor, Power Supply or Chassis 1. Verify selected processor mode. 2. If 5/03, then key switch must be in RUN position. 1. Check proper 120/240V power supply and incoming power connections. 2. Monitor for proper line voltage at the incoming power connections. 1. Remove power and inspect the power supply chassis connections and the processor chassis connections. 2. Re-install the devices and re-apply power. IMPORTANT: The processor only operates in slot 0 of chassis #1. 1. Attempt RUN mode selection of processor in existing chassis. 2. Place processor in another chassis not in the existing system. Apply power, reconfigure and attempt RUN mode selection. If unsuccessful, replace processor. 3. Try existing power supply in test chassis. If unsuccessful, replace power supply. If entry into the RUN mode is allowed, replace the existing chassis. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 7-6 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL SLC 500 Error Conditions and Actions - CPU Major Fault Processor Power Supply POWER RUN CPU FLT Error Cause Actions ON OFF ON CPU Fault CPU Memory Error Cycle power. If problem reoccurs, contact factory. ON OFF FL CPU Major Fault Hardware / Software Major Error Detected
(Erratic repetitive power cycling can cause a processor major hardware fault) Cycle power. If problem reoccurs, contact factory. OFF= No Illumination Control Chief Specific PLC Modules ON=Continuous Illumination FL=Flashing High Current Relay Module with Watchdog The primary function of this module is to monitor system operation and provide an active output
(by way of a dry contact closure) to indicate system status. The output is then used to control the E-Stop relay which switches the application of primary power to the control system. Operation The High Current Relay Module with Watchdog monitors system operation by way of two built-in watchdog circuits. The first watchdog monitors the SLC 500 processor. When this watchdog is satisfied it will enable relay output 0. The second monitors the ladder program. When the second watchdog is satisfied it will enable relay output 1. The output 0 and 1 are hardwired in series on the module (wired AND). The voltage source is wired to VAC-VCD WD IN. The high side of the E-Stop relay is wired to VAC-VDC WD OUT. (For additional details refer to your system prints.) The watchdogs are enabled once the OCU establishes a communication link with the portable controller. If either one of the two watchdogs does not receive a timely refresh it will time out which will turn off its associated relay output and disengage E-Stop relay resulting in an immediate E-Stop. The following error condition tables provide troubleshooting assistance for the High Current Relay Module with Watchdog, including their potential cause, and recommended actions to resolve the error condition. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 7-7 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL High Current Relay Module w/Watchdog LED Indicators RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR Indicators Error OFF 0 1 OFF OFF OFF ON ON Error Cause Action Normal Operation Normal Operation Enable command has not been issued Enable is commanded, watchdogs are satisfied, both outputs ON. Send HORN command from OCU. Continue operation. ON OFF ON Slot Select Fault Possible watchdog 0 fault. Replace Watchdog module. Select pulse is not functioning or possibly a problem on the module. ON ON OFF Application Toggle Fault Possible watchdog 1 fault. Application pulse is not functioning or possibly a problem on the module. If unsuccessful, contact factory. Replace Watchdog module. If unsuccessful, contact factory. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 7-8 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Troubleshooting Communications Faults First rule of troubleshooting communication problems check the antenna. Most communication problems are caused by a missing or damaged antenna, or damaged coaxial cable. If communication performance has degraded, always check to ensure the antenna is attached and the antenna coaxial cable has not been damaged. The communication link between OCU and receiver is low power RF and requires a higher level of readability than that needed for voice communications (i.e. interference that may be noticeable on a voice channel that does not necessarily render it unusable, would render a low power data link unusable). Locomotive Does Not Respond to the OCU Checklist:
1. OCU is setup for the locomotive attempting to establish communications. System number of OCU should correspond to the system number of the locomotive controller, or other configuration. Refer to system prints and/or specific system configuration instructions. 2. OCU power is ON. 3. OCU battery indication OK. 4. OCU switches in proper position for initial start, and press start. 5. SLC processor is in RUN mode. Locomotive Functions are Dropping Out 1. Are the dropouts occurring at a particular time of the day? This could indicate an unauthorized RF transmitter is operating on your licensed channel. 2. Has something changed in your operational environment? Are the dropouts occurring at a particular location or during a specific process? If equipment or processes have changed in your operation then possibly they have introduced some form of RF interference on your channel. If you are not able to isolate the particular cause of interference contact Product Service and report your findings. Additionally, a site spectrum analysis may need to be performed to confirm the interfering RF source. 3. If dropouts are random in time and place, then it is a good indication of a problem in the OCU or Communicator module. If you suspect this is the case, try a spare OCU and/or Communicator module. If you are not successful at isolating and/or correcting the problem after attempting the above suggestions then contact our Product Service department. Please refer to Chapter 8 for instructions when contacting Product Service. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 7-9 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Electrical and Pneumatic System Troubleshooting Refer to reference drawing E-XXXX-03-1 for component location and part numbers. (E-XXXX is your system number) WARNING: Before attempting to service any pneumatic components, insure the air system has been vented to atmosphere (zero pressure in air lines). CAUTION: Contaminants in the air system can significantly reduce the component life and performance of the remote control pneumatics. Therefore, to insure long component life and optimum system performance it is essential to implement a preventive maintenance schedule for the locomotive pneumatics system. This should include draining water from the main reservoir tank and replacing filter cartridges. NOTE: FAILURE TO MAINTAIN THE AIR SYSTEM WILL VOID THE WARRANTY The remote control pneumatic system can only perform as well as the air system is maintained. Description The primary controller used in the system is an Allen-Bradley SLC 500 PLC. A correct version of the program in the processor will be required. The electrical outputs should be checked using system schematics. This procedure is intended to be used to troubleshoot all electrical outputs and pneumatic outputs. Preliminary Inspection Before troubleshooting, verify the system wiring and pneumatic piping matches the system schematics. Test Equipment Voltmeter for testing outputs and troubleshooting as required. Notes: Most Allen-Bradley modules have removable terminal strips so unwiring is not necessary in order to change a module. Procedure
Verify main battery voltage with a voltmeter. Apply power to the system.
Verify main battery voltage input at input fuses on the EMI filter module. Check the output of the EMI filter module at the terminal strip.
Verify main battery voltage input (from the EMI filter module) at +64L and -64L input fuses on the locomotive interface mounted in the locomotive interface cabinet.
Verify +24VDC input to the SLC 500 power supply module 1746-P3.
Verify RED LED is ON located on the front panel of the power supply.
Verify the RUN LED is ON located on the processor module.
Activate the OCU (pushbutton switch ON) and establish communication (press the HORN button). 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 7-10 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Main Reservoir If main air supply goes low (below 75-psi) the low main air AMBER light will illuminate on the receiver / controller cabinet. To clear this alarm condition the main reservoir must be restored to 105-psi. Once the main reservoir is at 105-psi or greater the system can be reset. Main air reservoir pressure can be verified on the PLC module in slot #1, input #0 (I; 1.0). (4 mA = 0-psi, 20 mA = 150-psi) Independent Brake (Proportional regulator check) Using the voltmeter on VDC, check the voltage on I: 1.1 NOTE 1. This is the actual output of the proportional regulator. You should have approximately 5.5 VDC with the brake set. Releasing the brake should give you approximately 0 VDC. (0 VDC = 0-psi, 10 VDC = 150-psi). Ground should be referenced to the 24VDC-COM when taking voltage readings on the analog cards. For the 4-20 mA output to the proportional valves, the voltmeter must be set on amps-DC and the measurement is made at the analog output (0: 1.0). All current measurements must be made in series. In order to do a series measurement, the output wire must be disconnected from the PLC output, so that one meter lead can be hooked to the wire and the other lead to the PLC module output. The current being measured must flow through the meter. You should have approximately 12-13 mA with the brake set. Releasing the brake should give you approximately 4 mA. (4 mA = 0-psi, 20 mA = 150-psi). Pneumatic Throttle (when present) Take voltage reading at I: 2.0 NOTE 1 in the same manner as with the independent brake. This reading is the actual output of the throttle proportional regulator. (0VDC = 0-psi, 10VDC =150-
psi). Take current reading at O: 2.0 in the same manner as with the independent brake. This reading is the output to the throttle proportional valve. (4 mA = 0-psi, 20 mA = 150-psi) Automatic (Trainline) Brake Take voltage reading at I: 2.1 NOTE 1 in the same manner as with the independent brake. This reading is the actual output of the trainline proportional regulator. (0VDC = 0-psi, 10VDC =150-
psi). Take current reading at O: 2.1 in the same manner as with the independent brake. This reading is the output to the trainline proportional valve. (4 mA = 0-psi, 20 mA = 150-psi) Electrical Outputs (Aux functions):
Use the control station to activate all electric functions and verify that the corresponding LED on the output modules light while the output is active. Use the voltmeter to check voltage output for each electric function. Refer to schematic designated for the module in question to get reference voltage. NOTE 1: Some systems use pressure transmitters for feedback to the receiver system. In this case, inputs at I: 1.1, I: 2.0, and I: 2.1 should be read using the current method where 4 mA = 0-
psi and 20 mA = 150-psi. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 7-11 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL 8 PRODUCT SUPPORT, SPARE PARTS, AND ACCESSORIES Product Support When contacting Control Chief Product Service please have the following information ready
System Number. Located on the inside of the receiver / controller enclosure
Status of LED indicators on the control panel and PLC modules
Description of the problem and its associated operational conditions/situation Returning OCUs to Control Chief for Repair To return your OCU to Control Chief for repair, please call Product Service to request a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. The RMA number must be included on the shipping label and all correspondence related to the OCU. Contacting Control Chief Control Chief P.O. Box 141, 200 Williams Street Bradford, PA 16701 PHONE: (814) 362-6811 FAX: (814) 368-4133 Toll Free: (800) 233-3016 Web Page:http://www.controlchief.com E-mail: prodserv@controlchief.com Spare Parts and Accessories If you require troubleshooting or help in part number identification, contact our Product Support group for assistance. See reference above. If you require additional battery packs, a replacement harness, or other components please contact our Customer Service department. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 8-1 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Recommended Spare Parts Part Description Rotary Knob Lightweight OCU
(see NOTE 1) Receiver / Controller Unit Replacement kit for Particulate Filter Element Replacement kit Coalescing Filter Element Control Chief Watchdog Module Control Chief 10 Amp Relay Module
(see NOTE 2) Part Number Ref Figure 30-00-0-018 50-20-0-009 50-20-0-008 90-20-0-017 90-20-0-019 6-2 9-1 9-1 3-8 3-8 NOTE 1: The only readily replaceable parts on the OCU are the Independent Brake and Throttle knobs. Because the Lightweight OCU is registered with the RCU by way of the IR port it allows a high degree of equipment substitution. As long as the OCU is within configuration constraints, the user can switch to any available OCU for operations. When a unit is out-of-service, the user can turn operations around quickly by simply replacing the out-of-service unit with another. Then return the out-of-service unit to the factory for timely repair. To replace internal parts the customer must purchase maintenance training. Contact your sales representative for additional details. NOTE 2: A complete RCU spare parts list is available in separate document:
Train Chief II Spare Parts Catalog 95-15-0-001. Common Accessories Part Description Battery Charger, Li, Clip Style, 7.4 VDC, Single-Bay OCU 7.4VDC Lithium Battery Pack ANT 896-970MHZ 5DB NGP NMO MNT (Locomotive Antenna) LOCO BREAK-AWAY VEST. 36"-64" (sm, reg, xlg belts included) Extra belts Part Number 90-10-2-006 90-10-3-003 28-04-0-048 90-40-0-011 90-40-0-012 (SM) 90-40-0-013 (REG) 90-40-0-014 (XLG) 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 8-2 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL 9 DETAILED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Locomotive Antenna System To insure optimum system performance the locomotive antenna system should be inspected on a daily basis. This inspection would simply consist of a visual inspection of the antenna and the external cable. The visual inspection of the antenna would be to check the antenna is in place and not damaged. (The antenna should not be deformed.) A quick visual inspection of the external cable should be done to insure the cable is not damaged. Pneumatic Filter Service Instructions For best system performance replace the particulate and coalescing filter elements after a pressure drop of 10-psi has been reached or after one year of service or less depending upon your operating environment. Periodically check the bowl drains to monitor the level of water and containments in the filter,. If water is observed it is an indication the filter needs servicing. Order filter replacement kits from Control Chief Customer Service department. Pneumatic Filter Replacement Parts Figure 9-1 Part Number Description Filter Type PARTILCULATE 50-20-0-011 COALESCING 50-20-0-010 Replacement kit for Particulate Filter Element Replacement kit for Coalescing Filter Element Particulate filter: 5 micron element used as a primary filter to remove water, dust, and debris for the air line. Water removal efficiency at 90% or better at rated flow. Coalescing filter: Used as a secondary filter to remove up to 99.99% of oil and particles. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 9-1 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Filter bowls are fitted with automatic drains to drain accumulated liquids to minimize maintenance and insure optimum performance. Filter Installation and Maintenance Flush piping before installation. To maintain maximum efficiency of the filter and to avoid excessive pressure drop the filter must be kept clean. Removal (of filter assembly) from operation is not necessary to clean the filter. Disassembly is simple and can be performed inline. Before disassembling, shut off air supply and depressurize the filter. Clean all parts
(except filter element) with mild non-abrasive soap and blow out filter body before reassembling. Lithium-Ion Battery Maintenance The Lithium battery is the primary power source for Control Chief remote control OCUs. Proper care and maintenance will assure optimum performance of the batteries in all applications. The battery pack used in the Lightweight OCU is 7.4 VDC and has a typical application time of 12 hours (based on full capacity charge). Battery Care Summary
For optimum battery performance, only recharge the battery pack when the OCUs low battery indicator has activated.
Do not leave the OCU on for extended periods of time.
Do not charge in an area where the temperature is over 75o F.
Do not subject the battery to physical abuse such as dropping it or placing it on hot objects such as ovens, forges, etc.
Do not short the battery connection together. Injury may occur.
Always follow proper battery handling and disposal procedures. Always follow all manufacture instructions.
Do operate the OCU until the low battery indicator activates. Do not plan to operate the OCU for any extended time once the low battery indicator has activated. OCU Operating Duration per Battery Charge The Lightweight OCU and battery pack have been designed to give a minimum of 12-hours of continuous operation for the typical operating environment. Conditions that will degrade the daily capacity (run time) of the battery pack are, charging in high temperatures, operating in cold temperatures (below 32o F), and constant re-charging. Battery Disposal Dispose of all batteries in accordance with manufacturer, federal, and local regulations. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 9-2 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL Control Chief Recommended Operator Training Outline Purpose The purpose of this outline is to provide a guideline to help ensure operators are provided with a working knowledge of the remote control system. This guideline is not intended to qualify anyone as a certified operator and should be adapted to meet the needs of the customer and to cover applicable system options. Overview Provide a basic understanding of remote control operation and the basic components of the system. This should include, but not be limited to:
Basic remote control operation: Discuss the concept and benefits of being able to operate equipment by remote control.
Operational safety: Explain the need to ensure the path of travel is clear and the need to keep the equipment in sight while operating the remote control. Discuss local safety procedures and policies. Explain that Control Chief does not supersede any local safety policies.
Basic system components: Explain and identify the basic system components including the OCU, receiver, batteries, and battery charger.
Basic safety features: Explain the basic safety features of the system such as the effects of radio interference, loss of signal, and communication security. System Specific Components Provide a detailed explanation of the specific components of the system. This should include, but not be limited to:
OCU: Explain the specific components and operation of the OCU including:
1. Batteries: Explain operational capabilities, charging, proper care, and installation of the batteries. 2. Switches: Explain the purpose of all installed switches including key switches, E-
Stops, directionals, throttle/brake, trainline brake, horn, sand, uncouple and headlights. Explain the operation of locking and spring loaded switches. 3. Indicators: Explain the purpose of installed indicator lights and displays. 4. Antenna: Explain the purpose and care of the installed antenna. 5. Safety Features: Explain the built in safety features of the OCU, including tilt switch and tilt bypass, dead man timeout, spring loaded and locking switches 6. Start-up and Shutdown: Provide detailed instruction on proper start-up and shutdown procedures for the OCU with emphasis on proper switch settings and emergency shut down procedures. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 9-3 Control Chief Corporation TRAIN CHIEF II LRCS w/Lightweight OCU OWNERS MANUAL
Receiver: Explain the operator accessible features of the receiver and associated devices. This should include:
1. Overview of Receiver: Provide an overview of the receiver cabinet with a brief description of the electronic and pneumatic components, filter pack, diverter valves and transfer switch. 2. Alarms: Explain the purpose of any cabinet mounted alarms, including low air pressure, high temperature, low oil pressure and others, as applicable. 3. Indicators: Explain all indicators such as strobe lights, status lights, and displays. 4. Safety Devices: Explain the provided safety devices supplied with the system, including built in communications and output security, E-Stop switches, proximity switches, bell and horn configurations, man down alarm, wheel slip, and warning lights. Transfer Procedure Explain, in detail, the proper transfer procedure for changing between remote control and manual operation. Hands on Training Provide all operators with hands on training to ensure they are familiar with transfer, start-up, shutdown, and emergency stopping procedures. Safety Emphasize that Control Chief is concerned with the safety of the personnel and equipment. Discuss again the need to ensure safe operation of the remote control system, to ensure the path of travel is clear and that all local safety policies are observed. Questions and Concerns Attempt to answer all questions and concerns voiced by the operators directly related to the safe operation of the system. 95-00-0-xxx Rev 000 9-4 Control Chief Corporation
. This page is intentionally left blank Installation Questions?
Technical assistance is available from Control Chief. Please call us at 814-362-6811 or email the Service Department at prodserv@controlchief.com Control Chief Corporation 200 Williams Street PO Box 141 Bradford, PA 16701 814-362-6811 * 1-800-233-3016 * 814-368-4133 (fax) www.controlchief.com
1 2 3 4 | User Manual | Users Manual | 983.79 KiB |
MDS TransNET OEM Transceiver Model EL806 i i e e d d u u G G n n o o i i t t a a r r g e e p t O n I
M n E o O i t a Spread Spectrum Data Transceiver Including Instructions for 03-4053A01 Evaluation Development Kit l l a t s n I 05-3946A01, Rev. C JUNE 2007 QUICK START GUIDE The steps below contain the essential information needed to place the OEM trans-
ceiver in service. Because the transceiver is designed for use in other pieces of equipment, these steps assume that prior testing and evaluation have been conducted with the host device. If not, please refer to EVALUATION DEVELOP-
MENT KIT (P/N 03-4053A01) on Page 75 for interface wiring and configuration details. 1. Mount the transceiver module using the four holes provided. If possible, select a mounting location that allows viewing the status LEDs and provides ready access to the antenna connector. Use standoff hardware to secure the board to the host device. When mounting the board, use care to align the transceivers 16-pin header connector with the mating pins in the host device. 2. Connect the antenna system to the transceiver Use only with antenna/feedline assemblies that have been expressly tested and approved for such service by GE MDS. Use a matching connector to attach the antenna to the transceiver. For best performance, antennas should be mounted in the clear, with an unobstructed path in the direction of desired transmission/reception. 3. Apply power and observe the LEDs for proper operation. The LED command must be set to ON (LEDS ON). After 16 seconds The GP LED should be lit continuously The DCD LED should be lit continuouslyif synchronization with another unit has been achieved The Remote radio(s) should be transmitting data (TXD) and receiving data
(RXD) with its associated station RXD TXD DCD GP LED Indicator Descriptions LED Name Description RXD (CR3) Receive Data TXD (CR4) Transmit Data DCD (CR5) Data Carrier Detect GP (CR6) General Purpose Serial receive data activity. Payload data from con-
nected device. Serial transmit data activity. Payload data to con-
nected device. ContinuousRadio is receiving/sending synchro-
nization frames On within 10 seconds of power-up under normal conditions ContinuousPower is applied to the radio; no problems detected Flashing (5 times-per-second)Fault indication. See TROUBLESHOOTING on Page 59 OffRadio is unpowered or in Sleep mode CONTENTS 1.0 ABOUT THIS MANUAL.................................................................. 1 2.0 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION .............................................................. 1 2.1 Transceiver Features ................................................................... 2 2.2 Factory Hardware Options ......................................................... 2 2.3 Data Interface and Power (J3) Options ...................................... 2 Antenna Connector (J200/J201)................................................. 3 2.4 Model Number ............................................................................ 3 2.5 Spread Spectrum RadiosHow Are They Different? ............... 4 2.6 Typical Applications ................................................................... 4 Multiple Address Systems (MAS) ............................................. 4 Point-to-Point System................................................................. 5 Tail-End Link to an Existing Network ....................................... 5 Store-and-Forward Repeater ...................................................... 6 2.7 Transceiver Accessories ............................................................. 6 3.0 BENCHTOP SETUP & EVALUATION ........................................... 7 3.1 Initial Power-Up & Configuration .............................................. 8 Configuration Settings................................................................ 8 Configuring Multiple Remote Units........................................... 9 3.2 Tail-End Links ............................................................................ 9 3.3 Configuring a Network for Extensions ....................................... 10 3.4 LED Indicators ........................................................................... 10 4.0 TRANSCEIVER MOUNTING.......................................................... 11 4.1 Antenna & Feedline Selection .................................................... 13 Antennas..................................................................................... 13 Feedlines..................................................................................... 14 Antenna System Ground ............................................................ 15 5.0 PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION ................................................. 15 Antenna Aiming ......................................................................... 16 Antenna SWR Check.................................................................. 16 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide i Data Buffer SettingMODBUS Protocol ............................. 16 Hoptime Setting.......................................................................... 16 TotalFlow Protocol at 9600 with Sleep Mode ........................ 17 Operation at 115200 bps............................................................. 17 Baud Rate Setting ....................................................................... 17 Radio Interference Checks.......................................................... 17 5.1 How Much Output Power Can be Used? .................................... 17 6.0 OPERATING PRINCIPLES & SPECIAL CONFIGURATIONS ......................................................................... 19 6.1 Synchronizing Network Units .................................................... 19 Synchronization Messages ......................................................... 19 6.2 Establishing a Tail-End Link ...................................................... 20 6.3 SAF Operation with Extension Radios ....................................... 21 Simple Extended SAF Network ................................................. 21 Extended SAF Network.............................................................. 22 Retransmission and ARQ Operation .......................................... 22 SAF Configuration Example ...................................................... 23 6.4 Using AT Commands .................................................................. 23 Supported AT Commands........................................................... 24 Operating Notes when AT Commands are ON .......................... 25 6.5 Configuration Parameters for Store & Forward Services ........... 25 6.6 Using the Radios Sleep Mode (Remote Units Only) ................. 27 Sleep Mode Example.................................................................. 28 6.7 Low-Power Mode (LPM)Master Enabled .............................. 28 Setup Commands........................................................................ 28 Reading RSSI & Other Parameters with LPM Enabled............. 29 Power Consumption Influence by HOPTIME and SAF Settings29 6.8 Low-Power Mode versus Remotes Sleep Mode ........................ 30 Introduction ................................................................................ 30 Operational InfluencesHoptime and SAF............................... 31 Master Station Configuration ..................................................... 32 Antenna System for Co-Located Master Stations ...................... 32 7.0 DEALING WITH INTERFERENCE ................................................ 33 Terminal Interface....................................................................... 34 PC-Based Configuration Tool .................................................... 35 8.2 User Commands .......................................................................... 35 ii TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Entering Commands................................................................... 35 8.3 Detailed Command Descriptions ................................................ 41 ADDR [165000]....................................................................... 41 AMASK [0000 0000FFFF FFFF] ............................................ 42 AT [ON, OFF] ............................................................................ 42 ASENSE [HI/LO]....................................................................... 42 BAUD [xxxxx abc] .................................................................... 42 BAND [A, B, C]......................................................................... 43 BUFF [ON, OFF] ....................................................................... 43 CODE [NONE, 1255] ............................................................ 43 CSADDR [165000, NONE]..................................................... 44 CTS [0255]............................................................................... 44 CTSHOLD [060000]................................................................ 44 DEVICE [DCE, CTS KEY] ...................................................... 45 DLINK [xxxxx/ON/OFF]........................................................... 45 DKEY......................................................................................... 45 DTYPE [NODE/ROOT] ............................................................ 46 FEC [ON, OFF].......................................................................... 46 HOPTIME [7, 28]....................................................................... 46 INIT............................................................................................ 46 HREV ......................................................................................... 48 KEY............................................................................................ 48 LED [ON, OFF] ......................................................................... 48 LPM [1, 0] .................................................................................. 48 LPMHOLD [01000]................................................................. 49 MODE [M, R, X] ....................................................................... 49 MRSSI [NONE, 40...90] ........................................................ 49 OT [ON, OFF]............................................................................ 50 OWM [xxxxx] ............................................................................ 50 OWN [xxxxx]............................................................................. 50 PORT [RS232, RS485]............................................................... 50 PWR [2030].............................................................................. 50 REPEAT [010].......................................................................... 51 RETRY [010] ........................................................................... 51 RSSI............................................................................................ 51 RTU [ON, OFF, 0-80] ................................................................ 52 RX [xxxx]................................................................................... 52 RXD [0255].............................................................................. 52 RXTOT [NONE, 01440].......................................................... 52 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide iii SAF [ON, OFF] .......................................................................... 53 SETUP........................................................................................ 53 SER............................................................................................. 53 SHOW CON............................................................................... 53 SHOW PWR............................................................................... 54 SHOW SYNC............................................................................. 54 SKIP [NONE, 1...8].................................................................... 54 SLEEP [ON, OFF]...................................................................... 55 SREV.......................................................................................... 55 STAT........................................................................................... 55 TEMP.......................................................................................... 56 TX [xxxx] ................................................................................... 56 UNIT [1000065000]................................................................. 56 XADDR [031] .......................................................................... 56 XMAP [00000000-FFFFFFFF].................................................. 56 XPRI [031] ............................................................................... 57 XRSSI [NONE, 40...120] ....................................................... 57 ZONE CLEAR ........................................................................... 57 ZONE DATA .............................................................................. 57 Checking for AlarmsSTAT command .................................... 58 Major Alarms versus Minor Alarms........................................... 59 Alarm Codes Definitions........................................................... 59 9.2 LED Indicators ............................................................................ 60 9.3 Troubleshooting Chart ................................................................ 61 Saving a Web-Site Firmware File Onto Your PC ....................... 63 Using the I/O Points with InSite NMS Software.................... 73 Application ExampleDigital Input/Output at Remote............ 73 Evaluation PC Board .................................................................. 74 Connecting the Transceiver & Evaluation Board....................... 75 Antenna ConnectionTransceiver Module, J200/201 .............. 76 DC Power Connector, J3 ............................................................ 77 Diagnostic Connection, J4.......................................................... 77 DATA Connector, J5................................................................... 78 Transceiver Power Interface, J1 ................................................. 80 Assembly Drawing ..................................................................... 81 Parts List..................................................................................... 81 Evaluation PCB Interface to Transceiver PCB, J2 ..................... 83 PCB Schematic........................................................................... 83 iv TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C To Our Customers We appreciate your patronage. You are our business. We promise to serve and antici-
pate your needs. We strive to give you solutions that are cost effective, innovative, reliable and of the highest quality possible. We promise to build a relationship that is forthright and ethical, one that builds confidence and trust. We are committed to the continuous improvement of all of our systems and processes, to improve product quality and increase customer satisfaction. Copyright Notice This Installation and Operation Guide and all software described herein are Copyright 2007 by GE MDS, LLC. All rights reserved. The company reserves its right to correct any errors and omissions in this manual. RF Exposure Notice RF EXPOSURE Professional installation required. The radio equipment described in this guide emits radio frequency energy. Although the power level is low, the concentrated energy from a directional antenna may pose a health hazard. Do not allow people to come closer than 23 cm (9 inches) to the antenna when the transmitter is operating in indoor or outdoor environ-ments. In mobile applications (vehicle mounted) the above separation distance must be maintained at all times. More information on RF exposure is available on the Internet at www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulle-
tins. L'nergie concentre en provenance d'une antenne directionnelle peut prsenter un danger pour la sant. Ne pas permettre aux gens de s'approcher moins de 23 cm l'avant de l'antenne lorsque l'metteur est en opration. On doit augmenter la distance proportionnellement si on utilise des antennes ayant un gain plus lev . Ce guide est destin tre utilis par un installateur professionnel. Plus d'informations sur l'exposition aux rayons RF peut tre consult en ligne l'adresse suiv-ante: www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins ISO 9001 Registration GE MDS adheres to the internationally-accepted ISO 9001 quality system standard. FCC Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS Notice This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference that may cause undesired operation of the device. a) Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power
(e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide v b) The radio transmitter described herein (IC ID: 3738A-MDSEL806) is approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum per-missible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Warning: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC et Industrie Canada exempts de licence standard RSS (s). Son utilisation est soumise deux conditions:
(1) ce dispositif ne peut causer des interfrences, (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence pouvant causer un mauvais fonctionnement du dispositif. a) En vertu des rglements d'Industrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut fonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et un maximum (ou moins) approuvs pour gagner de l'metteur par Industrie Canada. Pour rduire le risque d'interfrence aux autres util-isateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent tre choisies de faon que la puis-
sance isotrope rayonne quivalente (PIRE) ne dpasse pas ce qui est ncessaire pour une communication russie. b) L'metteur radio dcrit ci-aprs (IC ID: 3738A-MDSEL806) a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antennes numres ci-dessous avec le gain maximal admissible et ncessaire antenne d'impdance pour chaque type d'antenne indiqu. Types d'antennes ne figurent pas dans cette liste, ayant un gain suprieur au gain maximum indiqu pour ce type, sont strictement interdites pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. Antenna Gain/Power Data (FCC) Antenna System Gain
(Antenna Gain in dBia minus Feedline Loss in dBb) Maximum Power Setting
(in dBm) EIRP
(in dBm) 6 (or less) 8 10 12 14 16 30 28 26 24 22 20 36 36 36 36 36 36 a. Most antenna manufacturers rate antenna gain in dBd. To convert to dBi, add 2.15 dB. b. Feedline loss varies by cable type and length. Consult manufacturer data. vi TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Antenna Gain/Power Data (Industry Canada ) Antenna System Gain
(Antenna Gain in dBia minus Feedline Loss in dBb) Maximum Power Setting
(in dBm) EIRP
(in dBm) 0 dBi Dipole 2 dBi Dipole 7.1 dB Omni 8.5 dBi Yagi 28.5 28.5 28.5 27 36 36 36 36 a. Most antenna manufacturers rate antenna gain in dBd. To convert to dBi, add 2.15 dB. b. Feedline loss varies by cable type and length. Consult manufacturer data. FCC Limited Modular Approval This device is offered as an FCC Part 15 Unlicensed Limited Modular Transmitter
(LMA). The transmitter module is approved for use only with specific antenna, cable and output power configurations that have been tested and approved for use when installed in devices approved by third-party OEMs, or produced by the Grantee (GE MDS). Modifications to the radio, the antenna system, or power output, that have not been explicitly specified by the manufacturer are not permitted, and may render the radio non-compliant with applicable regulatory authorities. Refer to Table 10 on Page 28 for more detailed information. When this device is placed inside an enclosure, a durable label must be affixed to the outside of that enclosure indicating the units FCC ID Number. The antenna(s) to be used with this module must be installed with consideration to the guidelines for RF exposure risk to all nearby personnel, and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. UL Notice The MDS TransNET OEM 900 (Model EL806) and TransNET OEM 2400 (Model EL806-24) is available for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D Hazardous Locations. Such locations are defined in Article 500 of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) publication NFPA 70, otherwise known as the National Electrical Code. Both transceivers models have been recognized for use in these hazardous locations by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA). The transceiver is as a Recognized Component for use in these hazardous locations, in accordance with CSA STD C22.2 No. 213-M1987. UL Conditions of Approval:
05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide vii The transceiver is not acceptable as a stand-alone unit for use in the hazardous loca-
tions described above. It must either be mounted within another piece of equipment which is certified for hazardous locations, or installed within guidelines, or conditions of approval, as set forth by the approving agencies. These conditions of approval are as follows:
1. The transceiver must be mounted within a separate enclosure which is suitable for the intended application. 2. The coaxial antenna cable, power input cable and interface cables must be routed through conduit in accordance with Division 2 wiring methods as specified in the National Electrical Code, Article 501.4(B). 3. The transceiver must be used within its Recognized Ratings. 4. Installation, operation and maintenance of the transceiver should be in accordance with the transceiver's installation manual, and the National Electrical Code. 5. Tampering or replacement with non-factory components may adversely affect the safe use of the transceiver in hazardous locations, and may void the approval. 6. A power connector with screw-type retaining screws as supplied by GE MDS must be used. When installed in a Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C or D hazardous location, observe the following:
WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is know to be non-hazardous. Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class 1, Division 2. Refer to Articles 500 through 502 of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) for fur-
ther information on hazardous locations and approved Division 2 wiring methods. ESD Notice To prevent malfunction or damage to this radio, which may be caused by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), the radio should be properly grounded by connection to the ground stud on the rear panel. In addition, the installer or operator should follow proper ESD precautions, such as touching a grounded bare metal object to dissipate body charge, prior to adjusting front panel controls or connecting or disconnecting cables on the front or rear panels. Environmental Information The equipment that you purchased has required the extraction and use of natural resources for its production. Improper disposal may contaminate the environment and present a health risk due to hazardous substances con-
tained within. To avoid dissemination of these substances into our environ-
ment, and to diminish the demand on natural resources, we encourage you to use the appropriate recycling systems for disposal. These systems will reuse or recycle most of the materials found in this equipment in a sound way. Please contact GE MDS or your supplier for more information on the proper disposal of this equipment. viii TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Manual Revision and Accuracy While every reasonable effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this manual, product improvements may result in minor differences between the manual and the product shipped to you. If you have additional questions or need an exact specification for a product, please contact our Customer Service Team using the information at the back of this guide. In addition, manual updates can often be found on the GE MDS Web site at www.GEmds.com. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide ix x TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C 1.0 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual is intended to guide technical personnel in the integration of MDS TransNET OEM transceivers into existing electronic equipment. The OEM transceiver is designed for use inside Remote Terminal Units (RTUs), Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) and other equipment associated with remote data collection, telemetry and control. The manual provides instructions for interface connections, hardware mounting, and programming commands. Following integration of the trans-
ceiver, it is recommended that a copy of this manual be retained for future reference by technical personnel. 2.0 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The OEM transceiver, (Figure 1), is a compact, spread spectrum wireless module designed for operation in the 900 and 2400 MHz license-free frequency bands. It is contained on one double-sided circuit board with all necessary components and RF shielding included. It need only be protected from direct exposure to the weather and is designed for rugged service in extreme temperature environments. The transceiver has full over-the-air compatibility with standard (non-OEM) TransNET transceivers manufactured by GE MDS. All transceiver program-
ming is performed via a personal computer or terminal connected to the module. There are no manual adjustments required to configure the trans-
ceiver for operation. Invisible place holder Figure 1. TransNET OEM Transceiver The transceiver employs Digital Signal Processing (DSP) technology for highly-reliable data communications, even in the presence of weak or inter-
fering signals. DSP techniques also make it possible to obtain information about the radios operation and troubleshoot problems, often eliminating the need for site visits. Using appropriate software at the master station, diagnostic data can be retrieved for any radio in the system, even while payload data is being trans-
mitted. (See Performing Network-Wide Remote Diagnostics on Page 61.) 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 1 2.1 Transceiver Features The OEM transceiver is designed for easy installation and flexibility in a wide range of wireless applications. Listed below are several key features of the transceiver which are described in more detail later in this guide. 902928 MHz operation using the TransNET OEM 900 24002482 MHz operation using the TransNET OEM 2400 User-selectable option to skip sub-bands with constant interference 65,000 available network addresses Network-wide configuration from the Master station eliminates most trips to Remote sites Data transparency ensures compatibility with virtually all asynchronous SCADA system RTUs Peak-hold RSSI averaged over eight hop cycles Operation at up to 115,200 bps continuous data flow Store-and-Forward repeater operation Data latency typically less than 10 ms Same hardware for Master or Remote configuration Supports RS/EIA-232 and RS/EIA-485 user interface Low current consumption; typically less than 3 mA in sleep mode NOTE: Some radio features may not be available on all models, or limited by the options pur-
chased, or the applicable regulatory constraints for the region in which the radio will op-
erate. 2.2 Factory Hardware Options There are a number options for the transceiver assembly that must be speci-
fied at the time the order. These include: antenna connector type, data inter-
face signalling and primary power. 2.3 Data Interface and Power (J3) Options Table 1 below lists the interface options that can be specified when the trans-
ceiver module is ordered. If you are uncertain as to the configuration of the unit you are using, please copy the model number code from the transceiver module and contact the GE MDS Customer Service Department for assis-
tance. 2 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Table 1. Data Interface & Power Options
(Factory Configurable Only) PAYLOAD DATA RS-232/485 TTL TTL DIAGNOSTICS DATA INPUT POWER RS-232 RS-232 TTL
+630 Vdc
+630 Vdc
+630 Vdc Antenna Connector (J200/J201) The PCB has solder pads for several RF connectors with different footprints but only one RF connector will be installed. Below is a table of connector options available from the factory when the order is placed. We do not recom-
mend retrofitting the PCB with an alternate connector as damage to the board could result and will void the factory warranty. Table 2. Antenna Connector Options Connector Description MMCX, JACK, RIGHT ANGLE MCX, JACK, RIGHT ANGLE MCX, STRAIGHT JACK RECEPTACLE MCX, STRAIGHT PLUG RECEPTACLE SMB, CON, COAX SMB RIGHT ANGLE SMB, STRAIGHT JACK RECEPTACLE SMA, JACK, RIGHT ANGLE RECEPTACLE SMA, PLUG RECEPTACLE, RIGHT ANGLE SMA, STRAIGHT JACK RECEPTACLE SMA, STRAIGHT PLUG RECEPTACLE 2.4 Model Number The radio model number is printed on the label on the end of the radios enclo-
sure. It provides key information about how the radio was configured when it left the factory. This number is subject to many variations depending on what options are installed and where (country) the product is used. Contact the fac-
tory if you have questions on the meaning of the code. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 3 2.5 Spread Spectrum RadiosHow Are They Different?
The main difference between a traditional (licensed) radio and the MDS TransNET transceiver is that this unit hops from channel to channel many times per second using a specific hop pattern applied to all radios in the network. A distinct hopping pattern is provided for each of the 65,000 avail-
able network addresses, thus minimizing the chance of interference with other spread spectrum systems. In the USA, Canada, and certain other coun-
tries, no license is required to install and operate this type of radio system, provided that RF power and antenna gain restrictions are observed. 2.6 Typical Applications Multiple Address Systems (MAS) This is the most common application of the transceiver. It consists of a central control station (master) and two or more associated remote units, as shown in Figure 2. This type of network provides communications between a central host computer and remote terminal units (RTUs) or other data collection devices. The operation of the radio system is transparent to the computer equipment. This application provides a practical alternative to traditional
(licensed) MAS radio systems. Invisible place holder RTU/PLC WITH TRANSCEIVER INSTALLED RTU/PLC WITH TRANSCEIVER INSTALLED RTU/PLC WITH TRANSCEIVER INSTALLED RTU/PLC WITH TRANSCEIVER INSTALLED MASTER SITE DATA TRANSCEIVER Figure 2. Typical MAS Network 4 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Point-to-Point System A point-to-point configuration (Figure 3) is a simple arrangement consisting of just two radiosa master and a remote. This provides a half-duplex communications link for the transfer of data between two locations. Invisible place holder Master Site DATA TRANSCEIVER Remote Site DATA TRANSCEIVER Host System Figure 3. Typical Point-to-Point Link Tail-End Link to an Existing Network A tail-end link is often used to extend the range of a traditional (licensed) MAS system without adding another licensed radio. This might be required if an outlying site is blocked from the MAS master station by a natural or man-made obstruction. In this arrangement, a spread spectrum transceiver links the outlying remote site into the rest of the system by sending data from that site to an associated transceiver installed at one of the licensed remote sitesusually the one closest to the outlying facility. (See Figure 4). As the data from the outlying site is received at the associated transceiver, it is transferred to the co-located licensed radio (via a data crossover cable) and is transmitted to the MAS master station over the licensed channel. Addi-
tional details for tail-end links are given in Section 6.2 (Page 19). Invisible place holder Master Station ACTIVE ACTIVE STBY STBY ALARM ALARM RX ALR TX ALR RX ALR TX ALR LINE LINE ENTER ESCAPE REPEATER STATION Remote Radio DATA TRANSCEIVER Null-Modem Cable S P R E A T O O D S P U TLYIN E C T R U G SITE M LIN K Remote Radio Remote Radio RTU RTU RTU DATA TRANSCEIVER OUTLYING REMOTE SITE MAS SYSTEM (LICENSED OR UNLICENSED) LICENSE-FREE SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEM Figure 4. Typical Tail-End Link Arrangement 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 5 Store-and-Forward Repeater Similar to a Tail-End Link, Store-and-Forward (SAF) offers a way to physi-
cally extend the range of a network, but in a simplified and economical manner. SAF operates by storing up the data received from one site, and then retransmitting it a short time later. Figure 5 shows a typical SAF repeater arrangement. SAF operates by dividing a network into a vertical hierarchy of two or more sub-networks. Extension radios (designated as MODE X) serve as single-radio repeaters that link adjacent sub-networks, and move data from one sub-network to the next. Additional information on SAF mode is provided in SAF Operation with Extension Radios on Page 20. Invisible place holder STORE & FORWARD REPEATER STATION Programmed as MODE M DATA TRANSCEIVER RTU DATA TRANSCEIVER Programmed as MODE X S P R E A T O O D S P U TLYIN E C T R U G SITE M LIN K Programmed as Programmed as MODE R DATA TRANSCEIVER MODE R DATA TRANSCEIVER RTU RTU Programmed as MODE R DATA TRANSCEIVER OUTLYING REMOTE SITE RTU Figure 5. Store-and-Forward Repeater Network 2.7 Transceiver Accessories One or more of the accessories listed in Table 3 may be used with the OEM transceiver. Contact your factory representative for availability and ordering details. Table 3. OEM Transceiver Accessories Accessory AC Power Adapter 2-Pin DC Power Plug Fuse (Internal) Omnidirectional Antennas 900 MHz Yagi Antennas Description Small power supply module designed for con-
tinuous service. UL approved. Input: 120/220 Vac Output: 12 Vdc @ 500 mA (20 Watts) Mates with power connector on the transceiver. Screw terminals are provided for wires. Fuse, 2A SMF Slo-Blo Rugged antennas suited for use at Master stations. Rugged directional antennas suited for use at Remote stations. Part No. 01-3682A02 73-1194A39 29-1784A03 Various;
Consult factory Various;
Consult factory 6 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Table 3. OEM Transceiver Accessories (Continued) 2400 MHz Antennas 900 MHz Bandpass Filter TNC-to-N Adapter Cable
(3 ft./1 meter) TNC-to-N Adapter Cable
(6 ft./1.8 meter) TNC-to-N RF Adaptor Plug RS/EIA-232 Cable RJ-11 to DB-9 Adapter Cable Evaluation Development Kit Rugged directional antennas suited for use at Remote stations. Antenna system filter to aid in eliminating in-
terference from paging system transmissions. Coaxial cable used to connect the radios TNC antenna connector to a Type-N style commonly used on large-diameter coaxial cables. Coaxial cable used to connect the radios TNC antenna connector to a Type-N style commonly used on large-diameter coaxial cables. Adapts radios antenna connector to Type-N style commonly used on large-diameter coaxial cables. Shielded data cable fitted with DB-9 male and DB-9 female, 6 ft./1.8 meter. For connecting a PC terminal to the transceiver via the radios DIAG(nostics) connector. Used for programming and diagnostics. Kit containing two OEM Transceiver modules, whip antennas, two Evaluation Boards, support software on CD, cables, power supplies and other accessories needed to operate the trans-
ceiver in a benchtop setting. Various;
Consult factory 20-2822A02 97-1677A159 97-1677A160 97-1677A161 97-1971A03 03-3246A01 32-4051A01 3.0 BENCHTOP SETUP & EVALUATION As an integrator, your first task is to verify that the OEM module will function as intended with the host equipment. This section describes how to test the unit for operation with host devices such as RTUs, PLCs and similar gear. It covers the steps for making interface connections, powering up the trans-
ceiver, and setting configuration parameters using a connected PC. Evaluation of the module is best performed in a controlled environment, such as a shop or lab facility where you can readily test various hardware and programming configurations and observe the effects of these changes before final installation. Once you are satisfied that the transceiver module operates properly on the bench, you can plan the installation of the module inside the host device and be assured of proper operation in the field. NOTE: Before using the Evaluation PCB, please review the detailed information on the Eval-
uation PCB and its functions, see EVALUATION DEVELOPMENT KIT (P/N 03-4053A01) on Page 73. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 7 3.1 Initial Power-Up & Configuration When all of the cable connections described in Cable Connections for Benchtop Testing on Page 75 have been made, the transceiver is ready for initial power-up. Operation begins as soon as power is applied, and there are no manual adjustments or settings required. To place the transceiver into operation:
1. Ensure that all cable connections are properly wired and secure. Verify that no metallic objects are touching the underside of the evaluation board which might cause a short-circuit. 2. Apply DC power. The GP indicator (CR6) on the transceiver board should light continuously. 3. Using a connected PC terminal, configure the unit with the proper mode
(master or remote), network address and data parameters. See Configuration Settings below for programming details. 4. Observe the transceivers LED indicators for proper operation. Table 4 on Page 11 shows the functions and normal indications of the LEDs. 5. Verify that the transceiver is transmitting and receiving data (TXD, RXD) in response to the master station and/or connected terminal device. Configuration Settings This section explains how to set the essential operating parameters of the transceiver. For more information on connecting a PC terminal, refer to User Commands on Page 34. 6. The three essential settings for the Transceiver are as follows:
ModeMaster, Remote, or Extension Network Addressa unique number from 1 to 65000 Data Interface Parametersbps, data bits, parity, stop bits a. Set the Mode using the MODE M (Master), MODE R (Remote), or MODE X (Extension) command. (Note that there can be only one Master radio in a system.) If any MODE X radios are used in the network, SAF must be turned on at the Master station. The MODE X radio must be programmed with an Extended Address (XADDR). Units that need to hear the MODE X radio must be programmed with an appropriate XPRI and/or XMAP value. (See SAF Operation with Extension Radios on Page 20 for more information.) b. Set a unique Network Address (165000) using ADDR command. Each radio in the system must have the same network address. Tip:
Use the last four digits of the Masters serial number to help avoid conflicts with other users. 8 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C c. Set the baud rate/data interface parameters. Default setting is 9600 bps, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit. If changes are required, use the BAUD xxxxx abc command where xxxxx denotes the data speed
(300115200 bps) and abc denotes the communication parameters as follows:
a = Data bits (7 or 8) b = Parity (N for None, O for Odd, E for Even c = Stop bits (1 or 2) NOTE: 7N1, 8E2 and 8O2 are invalid interface parameters for this transceiver. Configuring Multiple Remote Units In most installations, the Remote radios will be programmed with virtually the same set of parameters. This process can be streamlined by testing key pieces of equipmentsuch as the Master, Remote, and any Extensionson a benchtop setup prior to installation. This allows you to test various config-
urations in a controlled environment. Once the evaluation network is working satisfactorily, you can save the configuration of each unit in a data file on your PC through the use of TransNET Configuration Software. You can then open the Remote configu-
ration file and install it in the next Remote radio. The software prevents you from overwriting unit or other mode-specific parameters. 3.2 Tail-End Links A tail-end link is established by connecting an MDS TransNET Series radio back-to-back with another identical radio such as a licensed MDS x710B Series transceiver. This can be used to link an outlying Remote site into the rest of an MAS network. (Figure 4 on Page 5 shows a diagram of a typical tail-end link system.) The wiring connections between the two radios in a tail-end link system should be made as shown in Figure 11. r e v i s e i r e S 0 1 7 x S D M e c s n a r T e t o m e R
) e n i l y e k g n i r i u q e r e c v e d r o
i DCE DB-25 RXD TXD GND RTS 3 2 7 4 DCE 16-pin header (J3) 10 14 5 16 TXD RXD GND CTS If required. M E O T E N s n a r T
) i r e v e c s n a r T e t o m e R Y E K S T C E C V E D I
Figure 6. Data Interface Cable Wiring for Tail-End Links 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 9 Any device on the left that requires a keyline, as in this illustration, will require the bottom line (CTS to RTS) and the TransNET OEM on the right will need its DEVICE type set to CTS KEY. See DEVICE, on Page 44 for details. 3.3 Configuring a Network for Extensions The installation and configuration of an Extension transceiver is straightfor-
ward with only a few unique parameters that need to be considered and set at each unit. In every network there can be only one Master station. It will serve as the sole gateway to the outside world. The tables in Configuration Parameters for Store & Forward Services on Page 24 detail the parameters that need to be set on each type of radio in the network. For a detailed description of this network design, see SAF Operation with Extension Radios on Page 20. 3.4 LED Indicators The LED indicators are located to the right of the transceivers shield cover
(near J3) and show important information about status of the module. The functions of LEDs are explained in Table 4 below. NOTE: For the LEDs to function, they must be enabled using the LEDS ON command. Within 16 seconds of power-up, the following indications will be seen if the unit has been properly configured and is communicating with another trans-
ceiver:
GP (General Purpose) lamp lit continuously DCD lamp lit continuously (if unit is synchronized with another station) 10 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Remote radio(s) transmitting data (TXD) and receiving data (RXD) with another station. Table 4. LED Indicator Descriptions RXD TXD DCD GP LED Name RXD (CR3) Receive Data TXD (CR4) Transmit Data DCD (CR5) Data Carrier Detect GP (CR6) General Purpose Description Serial receive data activity. Payload data from connected device. Serial transmit data activity. Payload data to connected device. ContinuousRadio is receiving/sending syn-
chronization frames On within 10 seconds of power-up under nor-
mal conditions Continuous Power is applied to the radio; no problems de-
tected Flashing (5 times-per-second) Fault indication. See TROUBLESHOOTING on Page 57 Off Radio is unpowered or in Sleep mode 4.0 TRANSCEIVER MOUNTING This section provides information for mounting the OEM transceiver in a host device. The module need only be protected from direct exposure to the weather. No additional RF shielding is required. Figure 7 shows the dimensions of the transceiver board and its mounting holes. If possible, choose a mounting location that provides an unobstructed view of the radios LED status indicators when viewing the board from outside the host device. Mount the transceiver module to a stable surface using the four mounting holes at the corners of the PC board. Standoff spacers should be used to main-
tain adequate clearance between the bottom of the circuit board and the mounting surface. (Fasteners/anchors are not normally supplied.) 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 11 Figure 8 on Page 12 provides details for the locations of the RF and interface connectors. 3.45
(87.5 mm) w p V ie o T 3.11
(7.9 cm) Side View 1.49
(3.8 cm) 0.63
(16 mm) Figure 7. Transceiver Mounting Dimensions 3
. 4 5 3
. 1 0 J 3
. 2 5 J 2 0 0 1
. 8 2 5
. 5 5
. 2 2 5 1.81
(46 mm)
U
2 2 0 5
. 1 5 0 T Y P
. 1
. 4 7 5
. 5 0
. 1 8 5 Figure 8. RF and Interface Connectors Locations RF connector shown in J200 location 12 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C 4.1 Antenna & Feedline Selection Antennas The equipment can be used with a number of antennas. The exact style used depends on the physical size and layout of a system. Contact your factory representative for specific recommendations on antenna types and hardware sources. In general, an omnidirectional antenna (Figure 9) is used at the Master station site in an MAS system. This provides equal coverage to all of the Remote sites. NOTE: Antenna polarization is important. If the wrong polarization is used, a signal reduction of 20 dB or more will result. Most systems using a gain-type omnidirectional antenna at the Master station employ vertical polarization of the signal; therefore, the Remote an-
tenna(s) must also be vertically polarized (elements oriented perpendicular to the hori-
zon). When required, horizontally polarized omnidirectional antennas are also available. Con-
tact your factory representative for details. Figure 9. Omnidirectional Antenna
(mounted to mast) At Remote sites and point-to-point systems, a directional Yagi antenna
(Figure 10), is generally recommended to minimize interference to and from other users. Antennas are available from many sources including GE MDS. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 13 Invisible place holder Figure 10. Typical Yagi Antenna mounted to a mast Feedlines The choice of feedline used with the antenna should be carefully considered. Poor-quality coaxial cables should be avoided, as they will degrade system performance for both transmission and reception. The cable should be kept as short as possible to minimize signal loss. For cable runs of less than 20 feet (6 meters), or for short range transmission, an inexpensive type such as Type RG-8A/U may be acceptable. Otherwise, we recommend using a low-loss cable type suited for 900 MHz, such as Times Microwave LMR 400 or Andrew Heliax. Table 5 lists several types of feedlines and indicates the signal losses (in dB) that result when using various lengths of each cable at 900 MHz and Table 6 for 2.4 GHz. The choice of cable will depend on the required length, cost considerations, and the amount of signal loss that can be tolerated. Table 5. Length vs. loss in coaxial cables at 900 MHz Cable Type LMR 400 1/2 inch HELIAX 7/8 inch HELIAX 1-1/4 inch HELIAX 1-5/8 inch HELIAX 10 Feet
(3.05 Meters) 50 Feet
(15.24 Meters) 100 Feet
(30.48 Meters) 300 Feet
(91.44 Meters) 0.39 dB 0.23 dB 0.13 dB 0.10 dB 0.08 dB 1.95 dB 1.15 dB 0.64 dB 0.48 dB 0.40 dB 3.9 dB 2.29 dB 1.28 dB 0.95 dB 0.80 dB Unacceptable Loss 6.87 dB 3.84 dB 2.85 dB 2.4 dB 14 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Table 6. Length vs. loss in coaxial cables at 2400 MHz Cable Type LMR-400 1/2 inch HELIAX 7/8 inch HELIAX 1-1/4 inch HELIAX 10 Feet
(3.05 Meters) 0.70 dB 0.35 dB 50 Feet
(15.24 Meters) 3.50 dB 1.73 dB 100 Feet
(30.48 Meters) 6.61 dB 3.46 dB 0.20 dB 0.15 dB 0.99 dB 0.73 dB 1.97 dB 1.45 dB 300 Feet
(91.44 Meters) Unacceptable Loss 17.3 dB 9.85 dB 7.50 dB Antenna System Ground Precautions should be taken to assure the antenna and its support structure are bonded to a good earth ground system to minimize the impact of voltages created by lightning and atmospheric charges. CAUTION: Safety grounding systems are beyond the scope of this manual. Below you will find some elementary advice. These are generalities; every location and installation is unique and requires a unique safety grounding system design. Please consider con-
sulting a radio system engineer or other professional for advice on ground system design. A well-designed ground system will minimize risk of electrical shock to personnel and the chances of equipment damage. Antenna SelectionChoose an antenna that offers a DC ground or direct low-impedance ground connection for all metallic components. This will allow static charges on the antenna system to be safely dissipated to ground. It will also provide a low-impedance path to an earth/safety ground in the event of a lightning discharge. Support Earth/Safety GroundThe structure that supports your antenna system should have a large-gauge ground wire that goes as directly as possible to a safety/earth ground system. If a tower is used, it should have its own ground system. Do not use the buildings AC-power supply ground as a safety ground for lightning protection. Chassis GroundConnect a safety/earth ground to the ground post provided on the electronic/electrical equipment. If a ground terminal is present, bond the chassis to the safety ground at a point that is as close as possible to the antenna system and primary power entry points on the chassis. 5.0 PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION After the basic operation of the radio has been checked, you may wish to opti-
mize its performance using some of the suggestions given here. The effective-
ness of these techniques will vary with the design of your system and the format of the data being sent. Complete instructions for using the commands referenced in this manual are provided in RADIO PROGRAMMING on Page 33. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 15 Antenna Aiming For optimal performance, directional antennas must be accurately aimed in the direction of desired transmission. The easiest way to do this is to point the antenna in the approximate direction, then use the Remote radios RSSI command (Received Signal Strength Indicator) to further refine the heading for maximum received signal strength. In an MAS system, RSSI readings are only meaningful when initiated from a Remote station. This is because the Master station typically receives signals from several Remote sites, and the RSSI would be continually changing as the Master receives from each Remote in turn. Adjust the antenna for the highest
(most positive) value to ensure the greatest communication reliability. Antenna SWR Check It is necessary to briefly key the transmitter for this check by placing the radio in the SETUP mode (Page 52) and using the KEY command. (To unkey the radio, enter DKEY; to disable the SETUP mode and return the radio to normal operation, enter Q or QUIT.) The SWR of the antenna system should be checked before the radio is put into regular service. For accurate readings, a wattmeter suited for 1000 MHz is required. One unit meeting this criteria is the Bird Model 43 directional watt-
meter with a 5J element installed. The reflected power should be less than 10% of the forward power
(2:1 SWR). Higher readings usually indicate problems with the antenna, feedline or coaxial connectors. Data Buffer SettingMODBUS Protocol The default setting for the data buffer is OFF. This allows the radio to operate with the lowest possible latency and improves channel efficiency. MODBUS protocol and its derivatives are the only protocols that should require the buffer to be turned on. See BUFF [ON, OFF] on Page 42 for details. NOTE: The BUFF ON setting may introduce high latency. For time-critical MODBUSTM ap-
plications, buffering can also be achieved by setting the RXD delay value. This lowers the latency, but may not be as robust as BUFF ON. The desired RXD value can be ap-
proximated by the following:
RXD value = (9600/BAUD value) * HOPTIME value * REPEAT value * SAF multi-
plier. (The SAF multiplier is 1 for SAF OFF and 2 for SAF ON.) As an example, with 9600bps, HOPTIME 7, REPEAT 3, SAF ON, the RXD delay should typically be set to 42. ([9600/9600] * 7 * 3 * 2 = 42) Hoptime Setting The default hop-time setting is 7 (7 ms). An alternate setting of 28 millisec-
onds may be used to increase throughput, but at the cost of increased latency. More information on the HOPTIME command can be found on Page 45. 16 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C TotalFlow Protocol at 9600 with Sleep Mode For reliable operation with TotalFlow meters, use the default settings for 9600 with the following alterations:
HOPTIME 28Allows large data packets FEC OFFImproves store-and-forward performance for a large contin-
uous data stream BUFF ONEnsures ungapped 4-second polls if unit is in sleep mode Operation at 115200 bps Burst throughput at 115200 bps is supported at all settings. The radio will always buffer at least 500 characters. Sustained throughput at 115200 bps is only possible when the data path is nearly error-free and the operating settings have been properly selected. For sustained operation at 115200 bps, use the following settings: SAF OFF, FEC OFF, REPEAT 0, RETRY 0, HOPTIME 28. Baud Rate Setting The default baud rate setting is 19200 bps to accommodate most systems. If your system will use a different data rate, you should change the radios data interface speed using the BAUD xxxxx abc command (Page 41). It should be set to the highest speed that can be sent by the data equipment in the system. (The transceiver supports 300 to 115200 bps.) Radio Interference Checks The radio operates in eight frequency zones. If interference is found in one or more of these zones, the SKIP command (Page 53) can be used to omit them from the hop pattern. You should also review 7.0 DEALING WITH INTER-
FERENCE, when dealing with interference problems, when interference problems are encountered. 5.1 How Much Output Power Can be Used?
Refer to the Antenna Gain/Power Data charts at the front of this manual for approved antenna types and maximum RF power settings for the transceiver. You must ensure compliance with all applicable rules for the country of oper-
ation before placing the transmitter on the air. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 17 6.0 OPERATING PRINCIPLES & SPECIAL CONFIGU-
RATIONS IMPORTANT: The following discussion of setup and commands is generic to TransNET ra-
dios and networks. Since it is not known if your network will be made up of only TransNET OEM transceivers, or a mixture of OEM and standard pack-
aged versions, references to the DATA and INTERFACE ports can be used interchangeably. The DIAGNOSTIC port is only available on the standard transceiver and on the Evaluation PCB. For the TransNET OEM, this con-
nection can be made through the Evaluation PCB, or a user-provided connec-
tion. 6.1 Synchronizing Network Units The Master controls the synchronization for a given network for all modes. Setting the Master to SAF ON broadcasts a command from the Master to all radio units in the associated network either directly or through an Extension radio. This command puts all radios in the entire system in a special time-division duplexing mode that alternates between two timeslots. One time slot is for data communications upstream and the second for downstream communications. The Extensions are single radios which serve as bridges between adjacent sub-network levels. Extensions will undertake a Remote personality in one timeslot, and a Master personality in the alternate timeslot and provide communications with associated Remotes downstream. Extensions behave like two radios with their data ports tied together, first synchronizing with their upstream Master during their Remote personality period, and then providing synchronization signals to dependent Remotes downstream during their Master personality period. All Remotes synchronize to a corresponding Master. This can be the real Master (the MODE M unit), or it can be a repeater Extension that derives synchronization from the real Master. Payload polls/packets broadcast from the network Master will be repeated to all levels of the network, either directly to Remotes, or through network repeatersthe Extension station. The targeted Remote responds to the poll following the same path back to the Master. Synchronization Messages Remotes acquire synchronization and configuration information via SYNC messages. They can synchronize to the Master (the MODE M unit) or to any valid Extension (a MODE X unit). The Master will always transmit SYNC messages. An Extension will only start sending SYNC messages after synchronization is achieved with its Master. The ability to synchronize to a given radio is further qualified by the senders Extended Address (XADDR) and by the receivers Synchronization Qualifiers
(XMAP, XPRI, and XRSSI). 18 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C When a primary is specified (XPRI is 0...31), a radio will always attempt to find the primary first. If 30 seconds elapses and the primary is not found, then the radio attempts to synchronize with any non-primary radio in the XMAP list. Once every 30 minutes, if a primary is defined, the radio will check its synchronization source. If the radio is synchronized to a unit other than the primary, then the current RSSI value is compared to the XRSSI value. If RSSI is less than XRSSI (or if XRSSI is NONE) the radio will force a loss-of-synchronization, and hunt for the primary again (as described in the previous paragraph). By default, Extensions (and the Master) begin with XADDR 0. Synchroniza-
tion qualifiers are set to XMAP 0, XPRI 0, and XRSSI NONE, respectively. This default configuration allows any radio to hear the Master. When an Extension is added, the extended address of the Extension radio must be set to a unique value. All Remotes that need to hear that extension can specify this either by designating the extension as the primary (XPRI), or by including it in their list of valid synchronization sources (XMAP). 6.2 Establishing a Tail-End Link A tail-end link can be used to bring an outlying remote site into the rest of an MAS network. Figure 4 on Page 5 shows a diagram of this type of system. A tail-end link is established by connecting an OEM transceiver back-to-back with another unit such as a licensed MDS x710 Series trans-
ceiver. The wiring connections between the two radios must be made as shown in Figure 11. In addition, the DEVICE CTS KEY command must be asserted at the OEM radio. r e v i s e i r e S 0 1 7 x S D M e c s n a r T e t o m e R
) e n i l y e k g n i r i u q e r e c v e d r o
i DCE DB-25 RXD TXD GND RTS 3 2 7 4 DCE 16-pin header (J3) 10 14 5 16 TXD RXD GND CTS If required. M E O T E N s n a r T
) i r e v e c s n a r T e t o m e R Y E K S T C E C V E D I
Figure 11. Data Crossover Cable for Tail-End Links 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 19 6.3 SAF Operation with Extension Radios The Store-and-Forward (SAF) capability operates by dividing a network into a vertical hierarchy of two or more sub-networks. (See Figure 5 on Page 6.) Adjacent sub-networks are connected via Extension radios operating in MODE X which move data from one sub-network to the next one. The Store-and-Forward implementation adheres to the general polling princi-
ples used in most multiple-address systems (MAS). Polls originate from the Master station, broadcast to all radios within the network, and travel hierar-
chically downward. All Remotes will hear the same message, but only one Remote will respond. Messages within a hierarchy only travel in one direc-
tion at a time. Using SAF will cut the overall data throughput in half, however, multiple networks can be inter-connected with no additional loss in network throughput. Simple Extended SAF Network The following example depicts a two-level network utilizing a single Master
(M) and an Extension (X) radio. See Figure 12. In this network, messages directed to Remotes in the K sub-network, will be relayed through Extension radio Xj,k to the K-Remotes. Any response from a Remote in sub-network K will pass back through Extension radio Xj,k to the Master Mj. Radios in sub-network J operate on the same set of frequencies and sub-network K but with a different radio-frequency hopping pattern. In SAF operation, the Extension radios are set to MODE X (Details Page 48) and operate with a dual personality50% of the time it serves as a Remote station and 50% of the time as a Master for sub-network Remotes. Invisible place holder MJ Sub-Network J RJ RJ X J,K RJ Sub-Network K RK RK R K Figure 12. Simple Extended SAF Network Networks: J and K 20 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Extended SAF Network Below is an example of a multilevel network utilizing two repeatersXJ,K and XK,L. The example demonstrates the extensibility of the network. In this case, messages directed to Remotes in the sub-network L will be relayed through Extension radios XJ,K and XK,L. Like the previous example, the Extension radios split their operating time equally between their Master and Remote personalities. This multi-layered network can be extended indefi-
nitely without degradation in throughput, beyond that initially incurred by placing the network in the SAF mode. Invisible place holder MJ Sub-Network J RJ RJ X J,KI RJ Sub-Network K XK,L RK RK RL RL RL Sub-Network L Figure 13. Extended SAF Network Networks: J, K, L Retransmission and ARQ Operation Functionally, the sub-network side of an Extension behaves like a corre-
sponding connection between a Master and a Remote. When an Extension is using its Master personality it sends acknowledg-
ments and performs unconditional retransmissions based on its REPEAT count. When an Extension is using its Remote personality, acknowledgments are processed and retransmissions occur as needed, up to the number of times specified by the RETRY count value. If data arrives from a new source prior to completion of retransmissions, it is considered to be a violation of the polling model protocol. The new data takes precedence over the old data, and the old data is lost. In such a situation, new data is likely to be corrupted as it will have some old data mixed in with it. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 21 SAF Configuration Example The following is an outline for the configuration of a simple store-and-forward link. 1. Mode X and M RadiosCan have direct reports (Mode R radios) out-
side of the chain. 2. Data (Payload)Travels from Master to Remote, and back from Remote to Master. 3. Mode X and R RadiosExtension links can be protected by mapping one or more fall-back paths in case of a failure. Add secondary exten-
sion addresses (XADDR) into the XMAP table. (See XMAP
[00000000-FFFFFFFF] on Page 55.) For example, as shown in Figure 14, Remote D could use Remote C as its extension primary, and Remote B (X ADDR = 1) as an alterna-
tive in case of a failure of Remote C (X ADDR = 2). This arrange-
ment assumes a serviceable path between Remotes D and B and requires Remote D to be programmed with XMAP = 2 to correspond with the XADDR address of Remote B. Invisible place holder TransNET Radios:
A B C D E Radio Confguration:
= M
= 1234 MODE ADDR X ADDR =
X PRI
= None
= X
= 1234 MODE ADDR X ADDR = 1 X PRI
= X
= 1234 MODE ADDR X ADDR = 2 X PRI
= 1
= X
= 1234 MODE ADDR X ADDR = 3
= 2 X PRI XMAP
= 2
= R
= 1234 MODE ADDR X ADDR = 4 X PRI
= 3 Figure 14. SAF Configuration Example This configuration is easily arranged through the use of the Extension Map in the MDS TransNET Configuration Softwares Store-and-Forward Settings. 6.4 Using AT Commands A TransNET network may be configured to support protocols employing Hayes-Compatible modem commands through the radios AT Mode. In this mode, TransNET units can provide a communications replacement for dial-up modems where the RTUs and the protocol do not contain address-
ability, and the establishment of a direct-communications link is the only way to determine if the RTU has data ready to be sent. This requirement is common in many older SCADA systems which were developed for direct connections where wire lines were the only communica-
tions link available at the time. Most of these older system implemented support for the AT commands needed in the host software, so TransNET units can be used without software modifications. 22 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C In this mode, the Masters DATA port is parsed for a subset of AT commands.
(See Supported Commands below). When an ATDTxxxxx data sequence is detected, and xxxxx is a unit address of a radio in the network, the TransNET Master will establish a virtual link to that unit. It will remain in that state until either another ATDTxxxxx or ATH (hang-up/disconnect) is detected. (Note:
Unaddressed Remotes in the network will not respond to user data. Data will only be exchanged between the equipment connected to the addressed Remote unit and the network or device connected to the Masters DATA port. To use this mode, the command AT ON must be selected at the Master Radio. The acknowledgment to an ATDT command is simulated by the Master; there is no true verification that the far-end connection is valid. Please consider the following additional information before using the AT commands:
Radio commands and AT commands are independent with unique syntax and functional objectives. ATDT is not a radio command; it is part of the payload data input and follows the syntax for Hayes-compatible landline modems. TransNET commands are entered through the RJ11 DIAGNOSTIC port on Master and Remote radios. AT ON and UNIT are examples of TransNET commands. AT commands are only entered through the Masters DATA port, and only when the TransNET command AT ON has been previously issued. The radio supports a subset of the Hayes-compatible modem AT set. Each command is entered without spaces, and always begins with AT, and ends with a carriage return key press. Supported AT Commands Supported modem commands on the payload port are:
AT <attention>
Replies with OK (Code 0). ATDT[xxxxx] <dial>
The command xxxxx represents 5-digit unit address with a leading zero (0) if applicable. This command replies with CONNECT (Code 1). Once connected, all characters are passed through until a +++ is seen. ATH <hang up> or +++
This command replies with OK (Code 0) and deletes any virtual connection to the currently addressed Remote station. ATV[x] <change verbosity>
x = 0, means use numeric messages x = 1, means use text messages (Default) Replies with OK (Code 0) AT <command errors>
Replies with ERROR (Code 4) Characters with <no AT command>
05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 23 Modem will echo characters in the data stream but will be ignored until a second AT is seen at which time the modem closes the virtual connection. Operating Notes when AT Commands are ON Radios will not poll with the embedded RTU simulator unless a connection is established. Network-wide diagnostics are unaffected by the dialed unit connection status. The use of the TransNET OT command (Output Trigger) can be of benefit in some configurations. See OT [ON, OFF] on Page 49 for configuration details. 6.5 Configuration Parameters for Store & Forward Services The installation and configuration of a radio network with an Extension using SAF is straightforward with only a few unique parameters that need to be considered and set at each unit. In every network there can be only one Master station. It will serve as the sole gateway to the outside world. The following three tables detail the parameters that will need to be set on each type of radio in the network. Network Master RadioTable 7 on Page 24 Extension Radio(s)Table 8 on Page 25 Remote Radio(s)Table 9 on Page 26 Table 7. Configuration Parameters for SAF Services Network Master Radio Parameter Operating Mode Network Address Command MODE M Details Page 48 ADDR Details Page 40 Description Sets the radio to serve as a Master. A number between 1 and 65,000 that will serve as a common network address. All radios in the network use the same number. 24 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Table 7. Configuration Parameters for SAF Services Network Master Radio (Continued) Parameter Extended Address Command XADDR Details Page 55 Description A number between 0 and 31 that will serve as a common address for radios that syn-
chronize directly to this Master. Typically, the Master is set to zero (0). Store-and-Forward Mode SAF ON Details Page 52 Enables store-and-forward capability in the network. Table 8. Configuration Parameters for SAF Services Extension Radio(s) Parameter Operating Mode Network Address Command MODE X Details Page 48 ADDR Details Page 40 Extended Address XADDR Details Page 55 Primary Extended Address XPRI Details Page 56 Extension Map XMAP Details Page 56 Extension Received Signal Strength Indicator XRSSI Details Page 56 Description Sets the radio to serve as an Ex-
tension. A number between 1 and 65,000 that will serve as a com-
mon network address. All radios in the network use the same number. A number between 0 and 31 that will serve as a common ad-
dress for radios that synchro-
nize directly to this Extension radio serving as Master for as-
sociated sub-network units. Zero (0) is recommended for the Master station. XADDR number of the prima-
ry or preferred radio with which this radio will synchro-
nize. Lists all XADDR values with which this radio can synchro-
nize, excluding the XPRI ad-
dress. The minimum RSSI level re-
quired to preserve synchroniza-
tion with a non-primary radio.
(Ineffective when XPRI is NONE) 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 25 Table 9. Configuration Parameters for SAF Services Remote Radio(s) Parameter Operating Mode Network Address Command MODE R Details Page 48 ADDR Details Page 40 Primary Extended Address XPRI Details Page 56 Extension Map Extension Received Signal Strength Indicator XMAP Details Page 56 XRSSI Details Page 56 Description Sets the radio to serve as a Remote station. A number between 1 and 65,000 that will serve as a common network ad-
dress or name. Same number for all units in the same net-
work. XADDR number of the primary or preferred ra-
dio with which this radio will synchronize. Lists all XADDR values with which this radio can synchronize, excluding the XPRI address. The minimum RSSI lev-
el required to preserve synchronization with a non-primary radio. (Inef-
fective when XPRI is NONE) 6.6 Using the Radios Sleep Mode (Remote Units Only) In some installations, such as at solar-powered sites, it may be necessary to keep a Remote transceivers power consumption to an absolute minimum. This can be accomplished using the radios Sleep Mode feature. Power consumption (current) in sleep mode will be less at higher input voltages and more at lower input voltages. Power in the Sleep Mode at 13.8 Vdc is approx-
imately 3 mA. Sleep Mode can be enabled under RTU control by asserting a ground (or EIA/RS-232 low) on Pin 4 of the radios DATA connector. All normal func-
tions are suspended until it is awakened by removing the low from Pin 4. When Pin 4 is opened (or an EIA/RS-232 high is asserted), the radio will be ready to receive data within 75 milliseconds. The radio can be awakened more often if desired, by your RTU. NOTE: The SLEEP function must be set to ON; without this, a ground on Pin 4 will be ignored. 26 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C It is important to note that power consumption will increase somewhat as communication from the Master station degrades. This is because the radio will spend a greater period of time awake looking for synchronization messages from the Master radio. In order for the radio to be controlled by Pin 4, the units Sleep Mode must be enabled through the SLEEP [ON, OFF] command. See SLEEP [ON, OFF] on Page 54 for more information. NOTE: If INTRUSIVE polling is used in InSite NMS software, it is necessary to select SLEEP MODE INHIBIT ON from the Polling Options menu, on the Network Wide Diag-
nostic Polling screen. Sleep Mode Example The following example describes Sleep Mode implementation in a typical system. Using this information, you should be able to configure a system that meets your own particular needs. Suppose you need communications to each Remote site only once per hour. Program the RTU to raise an EIA/RS-232 line once each hour (DTR for example) and wait for a poll and response before lowering it again. Connect this line to Pin 4 of the radios DATA connector. This will allow each RTU to be polled once per hour, with a dramatic reduction in power consumption. 6.7 Low-Power Mode (LPM)Master Enabled The Low-Power Mode (LPM) puts Remote radios into a configuration similar to Sleep, but with some important distinctions. The most important difference is that the radio will automatically go to sleep in this mode, regardless of the condition of Pin 4 of the DATA interface connector. This feature trades increased latency to gain power savings. The low-power mode (LPM) automatically saves power at a Remote by instructing the Remote to shutdown for long periods of time between SYNC messages. Master transmissions are automatically blocked while the Remotes are asleep. Note, both Masters and Remotes are adaptive and will suppress a normal sleep interval until after the end of a current data transmission or reception. Setup Commands These are the command options and their applications:
LPM 1 at the Master enables low-power mode network-wide; all Remotes pick it up and start saving power by automatically sleeping. LPM 1 can work in conjunction with the AT dialing feature. The dialed unit will be forced awake; all others will sleep. LPM 0 at the Master is used to disable low-power mode (LPM)
(Default setting following an INIT or firmware upgrade.) For LPMHOLD 0 with REPEAT 0 setting, a Remote with no data to send will consume about 1/4 of its normal power consumption. Note that the SLEEP command must be enabled for the LPM to function. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 27 Reading RSSI & Other Parameters with LPM Enabled It may be desired to perform tests and review operational settings of a Remote radio which has been programmed to operate in the low-power mode. Follow the abbreviated procedure below to interact with the radio through a local computer. Disconnect the Remotes antenna to force it to lose sync with the Master Power-down the radio Connect a computer running TransNET configuration software to the Remotes DIAG(nostic) port. Power-up the radio Reconnect the antenna Measure the RSSI or review and change any parameters you desire Power Consumption Influence by HOPTIME and SAF Settings Table 10 shows representative current consumption and data delay values for various settings of TransNET radios setup for Low Power Mode, LPM (See LPM [1, 0] on Page 47). It assumes the primary power voltage is 13.8 Vdc and the polling rate is minimized to yield best-case power consumption
(current) values. The more each RTU is polled and asked to transmit, the more current will be consumed. Therefore, these values are the lowest that can be expected. Power consumption (current) is inversely related to data delay as shown in the table. When a radio is sleeping (LPM) mode, it is also waiting longer to deliver the payload data. Table 10. Power Consumption versus Hoptime and SAF Settings HOPTIME SAF OFF ON OFF ON 7 7 28 28 Current (ma) 16 10 7 4 Data Delay 350 ms 780 ms 1620 ms 3360 ms Note, the Store-and-Forward setting has a significant effect on power consumption, as it effectively doubles the HOPTIME to support LPM services. For the most power-efficient operation, turn on SAF even if you are not using repeaters. 28 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C 6.8 Low-Power Mode versus Remotes Sleep Mode The Low-Power Mode (LPM) puts Remote radios into an operational config-
uration similar to Sleep, but there are some important differences. Below is a comparison of the two modes. Table 11. Power-Conservation Modes Comparison Features Benefits Sleep Mode Manual control by connected equipment Selective application of Sleep control User determines length and frequency of sleep periods Low latency Low standby power, 3 mA at 13.8 Vdc Greatest potential for power savings Low-Power Mode Automatic radio-controlled timing Automatic sleep during absence of di-
rected traffic Network-wide implementation through Master station Less complicated implementation Simple configuration 6.9 Mobile Operation Support Introduction Reliable mobile operation of Remotes is practical in areas covered by multiple Master Stations within the same networkMaster stations with the same Network Address (ADDR). To make this type of service practical, the Remote must have several reliable Master stations with which to communi-
cate. A reliable Master is defined as one, which consistently matches, or exceeds, the Remotes standard for Minimum RSSI (MRSSI). Initially, the Remote will favor Masters with signal strengths 10 dB greater than the MRSSI threshold. This will allows for some signal degradation of the new Master as the Remote travels. When the average signal level from the currently-associated Master falls below the user-defined MRSSI level, the Remote will become out-of-sync and seek an alternate Master with a reliable signal. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 29 Operational InfluencesHoptime and SAF The synchronization period is influenced by two parameters valuesHOPTIME and SAF (Store-and-Forward). Table 12 shows several configurations and the associated synchronization period value. Table 12. Synchronization Period versus Hoptime and SAF Settings Sync Period Hoptime Value 441 ms 1.8 sec 3.5 sec 7 28 28 SAF OFF OFF ON 6.10 MIRRORED BITS Protocol Support TransNET radios are compatible with Schweitzers Mirrored Bits MB8 protocol, provided complementary firmware (06-4045A01) is installed in all network radios. A detailed application guide (AG2003-07) is available from Schweitzer Engineering Labs Web site, www.SELinc.com/aglist.htm, or from GE MDS Web site at www.GEmds.com. 6.11 Seamless Mode Emulation The RXD command assumes the payload message will be ready for transmis-
sion after the delay period has expired. If there is a chance the payload data may be delayed, it is recommended to use the BUFF(er) command to make sure the entire message is received before delivery is started. The BUFF command provides a highly-reliable seamless operating mode, but can be slow to start, especially if it waits for the reception of long messages before passing on the message. 6.12 Full-Duplex Emulation If your system design needs to support PTP or Point-to-Multipoint applica-
tions and your communications must appear to be full-duplex to the connected devices, set the Master to CSADDR xxxxx (where xxxxx is the Network Address (ADDR). This will place the system in a time-division duplex mode (TDD). The radio system will appear to be full-duplex to the connected devices, but actually operates half-duplex over the radio link. Data is buffered by the transmitting side until it is its turn to transmit. Throughput will be approximately 1/2 of the DATA interface rate. 6.13 Co-Located and Close-Proximity Masters If your requirements call for multiple TransNET networks at the same loca-
tion, you need to ensure that interference between the systems is minimized to prevent overload that will diminish the performance of the radios. Tradi-
tionally, vertical separation of the antennas of co-located radios was required 30 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C in order to reduce the interference to the point where overload of one network by the other will not occur. The CSADDR command will provide relief from this antenna separation requirement by operating the networks in a TDD mode and ensuring that one Master cannot transmit while the other (or multiple others) are trying to receive a signal from a distant radio. Master Station Configuration On all Masters for which you wish to synchronize transmissions, establish one Master as the Clock-Sync Master by setting its CSADDR value to it own Network Address (ADDR xxxxx). Then, set all other dependent Masters CSADDR values to the Network Address (ADDR) of the Clock-Sync Master. Make sure that you use a different Network Address (ADDR) for each Master. This value will be used to identify all units associated with this Masters network. Note that all Masters must be set to the same CSADDR setting, but only one where the CSADDR matches its own ADDR; this is the Clock-Sync Master. CSADDR = ADDRUnit serving as a Clock-Sync Master CSADDR ADDRUnit serves as a Dependent Master (Clock Slave) CSADDR = NONECo-located Master feature disabled (default) HOPTIME, FEC and SAF values are provided by the Clock-Sync Master to all dependent units. NOTE: If a Dependent Master station is unable to find the Clock-Sync Master station, it will not be able to operate properly and the associated network will be out-of-service. Antenna System for Co-Located Master Stations Using this TDD (Clock-Sync) mode will prevent any two Masters from trans-
mitting at the same time and greatly reduce the antenna separation require-
ments to near zero. Under this arrangement, the antennas of co-located Masters may be placed a few feet (less than a meter) apart horizontally, or just above or below vertically with no ill effects. There are two common antenna system arrangements:
Sharing a Common Antenna System It is possible to share an antenna between multiple Masters using stan-
dard power dividers, as long as the extra loss associated with these devices is taken into account in your RF budgeting process. Masters in this configuration must be operating with Clock-Sync (CSADDR) enabled. For example, the two Master stations shown in Figure 15 are connected to a common antenna system. They use a power-divider that will result in a signal loss of 3 dB, or one-half power level, on both transmit and receive signals. The power divider, such as a Mini-Circuits ZAPD-1 or similar product, must be capable of handling 1 Watt and have >25 dB isolation between TX ports. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 31 Invisible place holder Omnidirectional Antenna Network A Power Divider
( 3 dB) Network B MasterNetwork A CS Master MasterNetwork B CS Slave RF RF TransNET XCVR Data User I/O Interface TransNET XCVR Data User I/O Interface Figure 15. Co-Located Masters Sharing an Antenna 7.0 DEALING WITH INTERFERENCE The radio shares the frequency spectrum with other services and other Part 15
(unlicensed) devices in the USA, Canada, and certain other countries. As such, near 100% error free communications may not be achieved in a given location, and some level of interference should be expected. However, the radios flexible design and hopping techniques should allow adequate perfor-
mance as long as care is taken in choosing station location, configuration of radio parameters and software/protocol techniques. In general, keep the following points in mind when setting up your commu-
nications network:
1. Systems installed in rural areas are least likely to encounter interference;
those in suburban and urban environments are more likely to be affected by other devices operating in the license-free frequency band and by adjacent licensed services. 2. If possible, use a directional antenna at Remote sites. Although these antennas may be more costly than omnidirectional types, they confine the transmission and reception pattern to a comparatively narrow lobe, which minimizes interference to (and from) stations located outside the pattern. 3. If interference is suspected from a nearby licensed system (such as a paging transmitter), it may be helpful to use horizontal polarization of all antennas in the network. Because most other services use vertical polarization in these bands, an additional 20 dB of attenuation to interference can be achieved by using horizontal polarization. 32 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C 4. Multiple transceiver systems can co-exist in proximity to each other with only very minor interference as long as they are each assigned a unique network address. Each network address has a different hop pattern. Additional RF isolation can be achieved by using separate directional antennas with as much vertical or horizontal separation as is practical. Vertical separation of antennas is more effective per foot/meter than horizontal. 5. If constant interference is present in a particular frequency zone, it may be necessary to lock out that zone from the radios hopping pattern. The radio includes built-in tools to help users remove blocked frequency zones. Refer to the discussion of the SKIP command (Page 53) for more information. In the USA, a maximum of four zones may be skipped, per FCC rules. Check the regulatory requirements for your region. 6. Interference can also come from out-of-band RF sources such as paging systems. Installation of a bandpass filter in the antenna system may bring relief. (Contact the GE MDS Technical Services Department for recommendations and sources of suitable filters.) 7. Proper use of the RETRY and REPEAT commands may be helpful in areas with heavy interference. The RETRY command sets the maximum number of times (0 to 10) that a radio will re-transmit upstream data over the air. Values greater than 0 successively improve the chances of a message getting through when interference is a problem. The REPEAT command sets a fixed number of unconditional retransmissions for downstream data. 8. The RF power output of all radios in a system should be set for the lowest level necessary for reliable communications. This lessens the chance of causing unnecessary interference to nearby systems. 8.0 RADIO PROGRAMMING There are no manual adjustments on the radio. Programming and control is performed through a PC connected to the radios DIAG connector. NOTE: Access to the transceiver and network-wide diagnostics is dependent on the user-de-
signed and provided interface the to the TransNET OEM module. The following discus-
sion and others in this manual assume a suitable user-provided interface is available. 8.1 Radio Programming Methods Terminal Interface A PC may be used by operating it in a basic terminal mode (for example, a HyperTerminal session) and entering the radio commands listed in the tables found in RADIO PROGRAMMING on Page 33. The PC must be connected to the radios DIAG port. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 33 ENTER key, keystrokes (delivered at about half-second Once connected, communication (baud rate) is established through the command interface. To access the command interface, press the ESC followed by one or more intervals), until the > prompt is displayed. NOTE: The DIAG port (RJ-11 connector) uses 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. It can au-
tomatically configure itself to function at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bps. [Default: BAUD = 9600]
If the DLINK setting is ON, the DIAG port will start out in Diagnostic Link mode. This is a special protocol used to support Network-Wide Diagnostics. The process described in the paragraph above causes the radio to exit the diagnostic link mode and enter the command mode. If there is no input in command mode for 5 minutes, the DIAG port will revert back to diagnostic link mode. PC-Based Configuration Tool The MS Windows-based MDS TransNET Configuration Software
(P/N 06-4059A01) is designed for use with a PC connected to the radios diagnostics port. The TransNET Configuration Software provides access to all of the radios capabilities with the benefit of context-sensitive help. The program is shipped as part of the TransNET support CD included with every order (Part No. 03-2708A02) 8.2 User Commands A series of tables begin on the next page that provide reference charts of various user commands for the transceiver. See Detailed Command Descrip-
tions on Page 40 for more details. Entering Commands The proper procedure for entering commands is to type the command, followed by an keystroke. For programming commands, the command is followed by then
, the appropriate information or values, and ENTER ENTER SPACE
. 34 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Table 13. Network ConfigurationMaster Station COMMAND AT [ON, OFF]
Details Page 41 BUFF [ON, OFF]
Details Page 42 FEC [ON, OFF]
Details Page 45 HOPTIME [7, 28]
Details Page 45 LPM [1, 0]
Details Page 47 REPEAT Details Page 50 RETRY [010]
Details Page 50 SAF [ON, OFF]
Details, page 52 SKIP [NONE, 1...8]
Details, page 53 DESCRIPTION Enables Master station to emulate a modem and respond to AT commands ON = Seamless data OFF = Fast byte throughput. Sets/disables FEC
(Forward Error Correction) setting. Displays hop-time or sets it to 7 or 28 ms. Used at Master to set all associated stations in an energy-conservation mode. 1 = Low-power mode enabled network-wide 0 = Disable low-power mode (Default) Sets/displays the fixed downstream re-send count. Sets/displays the maximum upstream re-send count for ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request) opera-
tion Enables/disables the store-and-forward function for the network controlled by this Master unit. Skip one or more frequency zones Table 14. Network-Wide Diagnostics Command DLINK [xxxxx/ON/OFF]
Details, page 44 DTYPE [NODE/ROOT]
Details, page 45 Description Controls operation of diagnostic link function. Set radios operational characteristics for network-wide diagnostics 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 35 Table 15. Operational ConfigurationSet/Program Command ADDR [165000]
Details, page 40 Description Program network address AMASK [0000 0000FFFF FFFF]
Details, page 41 Alarm response Default: FFFF FFFF ASENSE [HI/LO]
Details, page 41 BAND [A, B, C]
Details Page 42 BAUD [xxxxx abc]
Details, page 41 CODE [NONE, 1255]
Details, page 42 Sense of the alarm output on Pin 6 of the INTER-
FACE connector in the EIA-232 mode. Default:
Alarm present = HI Selects one of three operating bands.
(2.4 GHz Model Only) Data communication parameters Select the security/encryption setting in the radio CSADDR [165000, NONE]
Details, page 43 Used on a single Master/Remote network to sup-
port TDD-style simulated full-duplex. CTS [0255]
Details, page 43 CTSHOLD [060000]
Details, page 43 CTS delay in milliseconds
(A value of 0 returns CTS immediately) Hold time that CTS is present following last character from DATA port. DEVICE [DCE, CTS KEY]
Details, page 44 Device behavior:
DCE (normal) or CTS Key MODE [M, R, X]
Details, page 48 MRSSI [NONE, 40...90]
Details, page 48 OT [ON, OFF]
Details, page 49 OWN [xxxxx]
Details, page 49 PORT [RS232, RS485]
Details, page 49 PWR [2030]
Details, page 49 RXD [0255]
Details, page 51 Operating mode:
M = Master, R = Remote, X = Extension Minimum RSSI level required to preserve syn-
chronization with a Master radio for Remotes in mobile service. Enables a 1-second delay on delivery of RXD serial data. Owners name, or alternate message
(30 characters maximum) Data port (DATA connector) interface signaling mode: RS232 or RS485 Power output in dBm
(Figure 35 on Page 84) Set RXD delay time for virtual seamless mode with low latency 36 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Table 15. Operational ConfigurationSet/Program (Continued) Command RXTOT [NONE, 01440]
Details, page 51 RTU [ON, OFF, 0-80]
Details, page 51 SLEEP [ON, OFF]
Details, page 54 UNIT [1000065000]
Details, page 55 XADDR [031]
Details, page 55 Description Maximum duration (in minutes) before time-out alarm. Default is OFF. Enable or Disable units built-in RTU simulator. Default is OFF. Set RTU address between zero and 80. Enable or Disable the radios energy-conservation Sleep mode function. Unit address used for network-wide diagnostics. (Unique within associated network.) This units Extended address Typically, the Master is set to zero (0). XMAP [00000000-FFFFFFFF]
Details, page 55 Included Extended units in MODE X.
(Extensions and Remotes only) XPRI [031]
Details, page 56 XRSSI [NONE, 40...120]
Details, page 56 Address of the primary Extended radio unit
(Extension). Minimum RSSI level required to preserve syn-
chronization with a non-primary radio.
(Only meaningful when XPRI is not NONE) Reset zone data statistics ZONE CLEAR Details, page 56 Command ADDR Details Page 40 AMASK Details Page 41 ASENSE Details Page 41 BAUD Details Page 41 BUFF Details Page 42 CODE Details Page 42 Table 16. Operating StatusDisplay Only Description Network address Alarm mask (response) Current sense of the alarm output. Data communication parameters. Example: BAUD 9600 8N1 Data buffering mode: ON = seamless data, OFF =
fast byte throughput Security/encryption operational status. NONE (Inactive), or ACTIVE 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 37 Table 16. Operating StatusDisplay Only (Continued) Command CTS Details Page 43 CTSHOLD Details Page 43 DEVICE Details Page 44 HOPTIME Details Page 45 LPMHOLD Details Page 48 MODE Details Page 48 MRSSI Details Page 48 OWM Details Page 49 OT Details Page 49 OWN Details Page 49 PORT Details Page 49 PWR Details Page 49 REPEAT Details Page 50 RETRY Details Page 50 RSSI Details Page 50 RTU Details Page 51 Description CTS delay in milliseconds (0255 ms) Hold time that CTS is present following last character from DATA port. Device behavior Alternatives: DCE and CTS KEY Hop-time value in milliseconds (ms). Time (0-1000 ms) provided to give an RTU time to respond before the radio goes to sleep. Current operating mode:
M = Master R = Remote X = Extension (Repeater) Minimum RSSI level required to preserve synchro-
nization with a Master radio for Remotes in mobile service. Owners message or site name Status (ON/OFF) of the 1-second delay on delivery of RXD serial data. Owners name or system name Current data port (DATA connector) interface sig-
naling mode: RS232 or RS485 Forward power-output setting in dBm The fixed downstream re-send count. The maximum upstream re-send count for ARQ
(Automatic Repeat Request) operation. Received signal strength indicator (in dBm). Unavailable at Master unless SETUP is enabled. RTU simulators operational status (ON/OFF) 38 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Table 16. Operating StatusDisplay Only (Continued) Command RXTOT Details Page 51 SAF Details Page 52 SER Details Page 52 SHOW CON Details Page 52 SHOW PWR Details Page 53 SHOW SYNC Details Page 53 SKIP Details Page 53 SLEEP Details Page 54 SREV Details Page 54 STAT Details Page 54 TEMP Details Page 55 UNIT Details Page 55 XADDR Details Page 55 XPRI Details Page 56 XMAP Details Page 55 XRSSI Details Page 56 Description The amount of time (in seconds) to wait before issuing a time-out alarm. Store-and-forward mode status in this unit.
(ON/OFF) Serial number of radio Display virtual modem connection status RF output power. Measured RF power in dBm. Information on synchronization source Frequency zones that are skipped Radios Sleep Mode setting.
(At Remotes Only) Transceiver firmware revision level Current alarm status Transceivers internal temperature (C) Programmed unit address for network-wide diagnostics This units Extended address Address of the primary Extended radio unit (Exten-
sion). Included Extended units in MODE X.
(Extensions and Remotes only). Minimum RSSI level required to preserve synchronization with a non-primary radio. (Only meaningful when XPRI is not NONE) 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 39 Command KEY Details Page 47 DKEY Details Page 44 TX [xxxx]
Details Page 55 RX [xxxx]
Details Page 51 SETUP Details Page 52 ZONE DATA Details Page 56 ZONE CLEAR Details Page 56 Table 17. Diagnostic and Test Functions Description Enables the transmitter test.
(Must be in Setup mode. Details on page 52.) Turns off the transmitter test.
(Must be in Setup mode. Details on page 52.) Set/display transmit test frequency.
(Must be in Setup mode. Details on page 52.) Set/display receive test frequency.
(Must be in Setup mode. Details on page 52.) Enables Setup mode. Times out after 10 minutes. Press Q to quit. Zone data statistics Clears the Zone Data log 8.3 Detailed Command Descriptions The essential commands for most applications are Network Address (ADDR), Mode (MODE), and Baud Rate (BAUD). However, proper use of the additional commands allows you to tailor the transceiver for a specific use, or to conduct basic diagnostics on the radio. This section gives more detailed information for the commands listed above in Section 8.2. Most of the commands below can be used in two ways. First, you can type only the command name (for example, ADDR) to view the currently programmed data. Second, you can set or change the existing data by typing the command, followed by a space, and then the desired entry (for example, ADDR 1234). In the descriptions which follow, allowable programming vari-
ables, if any, are shown in brackets [ ] following the command name. ADDR [165000]
Network Address This command sets or displays the radios network address. The network address can range from 1 to 65000. A network address must be programmed at the time of installation and must be common across each radio in a given network. Radios are typically shipped with the network address unprogrammed, causing the address to display as NONE. If the address is not set (or is set to a wrong value) it leaves the system in an invalid state, preventing operation and generating an alarm. NOTE: It is recommended that the last four digits of the Master radios serial number be used for the network address. This helps avoid conflicts with other users. 40 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C AMASK [0000 0000FFFF FFFF]
Alarm Mask This command sets the alarm bits that cause the alarm output signal to be trig-
gered. The PWR LED still flashes for all alarms, but the alarm output signal is only activated for those alarms having the corresponding mask bit set. The hex value for the mask aligns directly with the hex value for the ALARM command. The default is FFFF FFFF. Through proper use of the AMASK command, it is possible to tailor the alarm response of the radio. Contact the factory for more information on configuring the alarm mask. AT [ON, OFF]
Hayes-Compatible AT Command Support AT-style modem commands, also know as Hayes-Compatible Commands, can be processed through the payload port. By setting AT ON at the Master
(MODE M), individual Remotes can be accessed by using ATDT
[Unit Address]. In this mode, RTUs designed only for dial-up access can be accessed through the Master station. For more details, see See Using AT Commands on Page 22 and OT [ON, OFF] on Page 49. ASENSE [HI/LO]
Alarm Output Sense This command is used to set the sense of the alarm output at Pin 3 of the OEM modules INTERFACE connector, J3, and Pin 6 of the Evaluation PCBs DATA connector. The default is HI which means an alarm is present when an RS-232 high is on Pin 6. BAUD [xxxxx abc]
Data Interface Port Baud Rate This command sets or displays the communication attributes for the normal payload communications through the DATA port. The command has no effect on the RJ-11 DIAG(NOSTICS) port. The first parameter (xxxxx) is baud rate. Baud rate is specified in bits-per-second and must be one of the following speeds: 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200. At baud rates of 19200 bps or less, the radio supports unlimited continuous data transmission at any hop rate. The second parameter of the BAUD command (abc) is a 3-character block indicating how the data is encoded. The following is a breakdown of each characters meaning:
a = Data bits (7 or 8) b = Parity (N for None, O for Odd, E for Even) c = Stop bits (1 or 2) The factory default setting is 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
(Example: 9600 8N1). NOTE: 7N1, 8O2, and 8E2 are invalid communication settings and are not supported by the transceiver. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 41 BAND [A, B, C]
Select Sub-Band (Normally used for 2.4 GHz model) This command sets or displays the receiving and transmit operating band for the radio. A = 2.40162.4270 GHz B = 2.42722.4526 GHz C = 2.45282.478.2 GHz NOTE: The same BAND setting must be common across each radio in a given network and it must be programmed at the time of installation. BUFF [ON, OFF]
Data Buffer Mode This command sets or displays the received data handling mode of the radio. The command parameter is either ON or OFF. (The default is OFF.) The setting of this parameter affects the timing of received data sent out the DATA connector. Data transmitted over the air is unaffected by the BUFF setting. If data buffering is set to OFF, the radio will operate with the lowest possible average latency. Data bytes are sent out the DATA port as soon as an incoming RF data frame is processed. Average and typical latency will both be below 10 ms, but idle character gaps may be introduced into the outgoing data flow. If data buffering is ON, the radio will operate in a seamless mode. That is, data bytes will be sent over the air as quickly as possible, but the receiver will buffer the data until the entire packet has been collected. The delay introduced by data buffering is variable and depends on message size and the number of retransmissions required, but the radio will not create any gaps in the output data stream. This mode of operation is required for protocols such as MODBUS that do not allow gaps in their data transmission. Seamless mode (BUFF ON) is intended only for applications where the message size is 256 characters or less. Enforcement of this rule is left up to the user. If more than 256 characters are transmitted data delivery will not be seamless and data may be lost. Changes to the BUFF setting may only be made at the Master radio, as the Master radio broadcasts the buffer setting for the entire network. At Remote radios, the buffer setting may be read when the radio is in synchronization with the Master, but it cannot be changed. CODE [NONE, 1255]
Security Code The CODE command is used to select or display the security/encryption setting in the radio. The default is CODE NONE. Setting CODE to a value other than NONE provides an extra level of security beyond that provided by the Network Address (ADDR). The disadvantage is increased complexity in managing the network. 42 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C The CODE command takes an argument of 1255, or NONE. Entering CODE without an argument will display either NONE or ACTIVE. ACTIVE means that security/encryption has been enabled, but the radio will not display the security argument. When a CODE value is active, all radios in the system must use the same code value. If the code value is not properly programmed, a Remote radio will not synchronize with the Master. CAUTION: Record the CODE value and store it in a safe place. If the code is later forgotten, and a unit is to be added to the system, all radios in the network must be set to NONE and then reprogrammed to a new value. CSADDR [165000, NONE]
Clock-Synchronizing Master Address Used to specify the network address of a Clock-Sync Master station to which this station will be synchronized. Also see ADDR [165000] on Page 40 and Co-Located and Close-Proximity Masters on Page 30 for further details. CTS [0255]
Clear-to-Send Delay The CTS (clear-to-send) command sets or displays the timer value associated with the CTS line response. The command parameter ranges from 0 to 255 milliseconds. For DCE operation, the timer specifies how long to wait after the RTS line goes high before asserting the CTS line. A timer value of zero means that the CTS line will be asserted immediately following the assertion of RTS. For CTS Key operation (see the DEVICE command), the timer specifies how long to wait after asserting the CTS line before sending data out the DATA port. A timer value of zero means that data will be sent out the data port without imposing a key-up delay. (Other delays may be in effect from other radio operating parameters.) CTSHOLD [060000]
Clear-to-Send Hold Time Used in DEVICE CTS KEY mode, this command sets the amount of time in milliseconds that CTS remains present following transmission of the last character out the RXD pin of the DATA port. This hold time can be used to prevent squelch tail data corruption when communicating with other radios. The CTSHOLD setting can range from 0 to 60000 (i.e., 60 seconds). The default value is 0, which means that CTS will drop immediately after the last character is transmitted. If the command is entered when the radio is in DEVICE DCE mode, the response CTSHOLD N/A will be displayed. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 43 DEVICE [DCE, CTS KEY]
Radio-MODEM Behavior The DEVICE command sets or displays the device behavior of the radio. The command parameter is either DCE or CTS KEY. The default selection is DCE. In this mode, CTS will go high following RTS, subject to the CTS programmable delay time. Keying is stimulated by the input of characters at the data port. Hardware flow control is implemented by dropping the CTS line if data arrives faster than it can be transmitted. If CTS KEY is selected, the radio is assumed to be controlling another radio, such as in a repeater or tail-end link system. The RTS line is ignored and the CTS line is used as a keyline control for the other radio. CTS is asserted immediately after the receipt of RF data, but data will not be sent out the DATA port until after the CTS programmable delay time has expired. (This gives the other radio time to key.) Following transmission of the last byte of data, CTS will remain asserted for the duration specified by the CTSHOLD command. CTSHOLD should be set sufficiently high. DLINK [xxxxx/ON/OFF]
InSite Diagnostics Link Support DLINK ON enables use of Diagnostic Link mode and establishes it as the default protocol on the DIAG port. Diagnostic Link mode is a special protocol used to support Network-Wide Diagnostics. DLINK must be set to ON to support connection to InSite or to support chained diagnostics between radio networks even while the radio is in sleep mode. DLINK OFF disables this feature. The default setting is ON. The following DLINK baud rates selections are supported:
1200 38400 4800 57600 9600 115200 19200 (default) Example: DLINK 4800 sets the DIAG port to operate at 4800 bps when diag-
nostics is closed. This setting will not affect the ports autobaud operation. Use only of DLINK ON, will enable the use 19200 or the most recently programmed value. The default is DLINK 19200 and DLINK ON. NOTE 1: The same baud rate must be entered into the InSite Equipment Lists BAUD field. NOTE 2: The DLINK rate must match the rate of any connected device to the diagnostic port. This may be either another MDS radios diagnostic port, InSite computer, or another data link device that eventually connects to the InSite computer. DKEY Turn Off Radio Transmitter s Test Signal Disables the transmitter when it is keyed. See also KEY command. 44 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C DTYPE [NODE/ROOT]
Network Diagnostics Mode The DTYPE command specifies the radios operational characteristics for network-wide diagnostics. The transceiver uses the following types:
NODEThe most common setting, and the default. This is the basic system radio device-type. Typically, the radio network is comprised of nodes and one root. Intrusive diagnostics can originate from any node. However, non-intrusive diagnostics can only be conducted from the root node. ROOTAlways one, and only one, per network (including units associated through Extension units.) The root is the focal point of network-wide diagnostics information. Intrusive diagnostics can originate from any radio, including the root. However, the root is the only radio through which non-intrusive diagnostics can be conducted. FEC [ON, OFF]
Forward Error Correction This command is used to view the FEC setting, or turn it on or off. The default setting is FEC ON. (It needs to be turned off when throughputs exceed 57,600 bps.) FEC is set at the Master and is automatically passed on to all Remotes in a network. Setting FEC to ON improves sensitivity at the cost of reduced throughput. Typical SCADA/telemetry applications use low data rates and, as such, the FEC setting is normally transparent to them. HOPTIME [7, 28]
Radio Transmitter Hop Timing The HOPTIME command is used to set or display the hop-time setting. The command is a digit corresponding to the hop-time setting in milliseconds. The default HOPTIME setting is 7. A setting of 28 must be used when throughputs exceed 57,600 bps and is recommended when data transmission sizes exceed 256 bytes. Changes to the HOPTIME setting may only be made at the Master radio. (This is because the Master radio establishes the hop-time setting for the entire network.) At Remote radios, the hop-time setting may be read when the radio is in synchronization with the Master, but it cannot be changed. INIT Initialize; Restore to Factory Defaults The INIT command is used to reset the radios operating parameters to the factory defaults listed in Table 18 on Page 46. This may be helpful when trying to resolve configuration problems that resulted from the entry of one or more improper command settings. If you are unsure of which command setting caused the problem, this command allows you to get back to a known working state. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 45 NOTE: Caution should be exercised when using the INIT command on radios in a system em-
ploying the Store-and-Forward feature. Settings relating to the use of Extension services will be lost and will need to be re-entered. Record the settings for XADDR, XPRI and XMAP before using the INIT command. SPECIAL NOTE: Installing firmware of Revision 3.0 or later into a radio with Revisions 1.x firmware will preserve the radios compatibility with other radios running Revision 1.x firmware. If updating the radios firmware is part of a system-wide upgrade, the last step should be to use the INIT command at the Master station. Use of the INIT command causes the changes shown in Table 18 to be applied. Table 18. INIT Command Generated Defaults Parameter Default Setting For ALL radios Alarm Mask Alarm Output Sense Device Operation DATA Interface Port Data Port Setting CTS Delay CTS Hold-Time LED Operation Low-Power Mode Hold RX Time-Out-Timer RF Output Power Transmitter Test Frequency Receiver Test Frequency Sleep Mode Primary Extension Ra-
dio Address Synchronization Source Map Extended Address For MASTER radios AT Command Support FFFF FFFF RS-232 High (+5.0 Vdc) DCE 9600 baud 8 data bits none (no parity) 1 stop bit RS/EIA-232 0 (CTS is continuously asserted) 0 OFF 0 None/Disable 30 dBm (1 watt) 915.000 MHz or 2436.0 MHz
(Model dependent) 915.000 MHz 2436.0 MHz
(Model-dependent) OFF 0 (Master) None 0 OFF Corresponding Command AMASK ASENSE DEVICE DCE BAUD 9600 8N1 PORT RS232 CTS 0 CTSHOLD 0 LED LPMHOLD RXTOT PWR 30 TX xxx RX xxx SLEEP OFF XPRI 0 XMAP 0 XADDR 0 AT 46 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Table 18. INIT Command Generated Defaults (Continued) Corresponding Command BUFF OFF FEC ON Default Setting OFF ON 7 ms 0 (Off) None (radio will hop across all fre-
quencies) 10 (max. of 10 repeats for ARQ) 3 (downstream repeats) HOPTIME 7 LPM SKIP NONE RETRY 10 REPEAT 3 Parameter Buffer Mode Forward Error Correction Hop-Time Low-Power Mode Skipped Frequencies Retry Count Repeat Count HREV Hardware Revision Shows the hardware revision of the radio. KEY Turn On Radio Transmitter Test Signal Enables the transmitter. (Radio must be in Setup mode.) See also DKEY command (DKEYDetails, page 44). LED [ON, OFF]
Enable/Disable PCB LEDs LED ON enables/disables the PCB board mounted LEDs seen only with the transceivers covers removed. LED is normally OFF, it may be useful to have them on for testing the radio with the covers removed. Note: the external LEDs will be dimmer if the LED function is left ON. The LED command also affects the operation of the LEDs in the Low-Power Mode (LPM). When LED is OFF, the radio keeps the PWR and SYNC LEDs extinguished. LPM [1, 0]
Low-Power ModeMasters Only This feature trades increased latency to gain power savings. Low-power mode (LPM) automatically saves power at a Remote by instructing the Remote to shutdown for large periods of time in between SYNC messages. Master transmissions are automatically blocked while the Remotes are asleep. Note, both Masters and Remotes are adaptive and will suppress a normal sleep interval if data transmission or reception is in progress. LPM 1 at the Master enables low-power mode network-wide; all Remotes pick it up and start saving power by automatically sleeping. LPM 1 can work in conjunction with the AT dialing feature. The dialed unit will be forced awake; all others will sleep. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 47 LPM 0 at the Master to disable low-power mode (Default setting). The SLEEP command must be enabled for LPM to function. Further, when you enable LPM, the LEDs on the Remote radio dim even though the LPM function is not properly enabled by turning on SLEEP. For more information, see Low-Power Mode (LPM)Master Enabled on Page 27, and Low-Power Mode versus Remotes Sleep Mode on Page 29. LPMHOLD [01000]
Low-Power Mode Sleep Time Used to give an RTU time (0-1000 ms) to respond before the radio goes to sleep. Value determines how long to suppress auto-sleep following reception of the last character sent out of the RXD serial data port. NOTE: Any values entered will be rounded to the nearest multiple of 4 ms. To verify the exact hold time, enter LPMHOLD, the response will give you the value currently being used. MODE [M, R, X]
Radio Operating Mode The MODE command sets or displays the operating mode of the radio. A Master radio is set by MODE M; a Remote set by MODE R, and an Extension is set by MODE X. All units default to Remotes; other modes must be specifically programmed with the MODE command. If MODE X is used, the MODE X radio should be programmed with an Extended Address (XADDR). Units that need to hear this MODE X radio must be programmed with an appropriate XPRI and/or XMAP value. MRSSI [NONE, 40...90]
Minimum RSSI for Mobile Operation The MRSSI command sets or displays the minimum RSSI level (dBm) of a Master stations signal to maintain synchronization. When the Masters signal falls below this level, the Remote will attempt to resynchronize with the next Master it can hear within the same networksame Network Address
(ADDR)and, meets the MRSSI level. See Mobile Operation Support on Page 29 for additional information. OT [ON, OFF]
Output Trigger The output trigger feature sets up a 1-second default delay on delivery of RXD serial data, however, a receipt of RTS causes cancellation of timer followed by immediate data delivery. Hierarchy Rules:
if OT = ON, RTS always cancels data delay and outputs immediately 48 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C if OT = ON, DEVICE = DCE, and RXD = 0, data delay is 1 second or until RTS if DEVICE = DCE, and RXD = N, data delay is N ms if DEVICE = CTS KEY, and CTS = N, data delay is N ms or until RTS if DEVICE = CTS KEY overrides RXD, RXD overrides OT default. OWM [xxxxx]
Owners Message The OWM command sets or displays an optional owners message, such as the system name. The entry can contain up to 30 characters. OWN [xxxxx]
Owners Name The OWN command sets or displays an optional owners name, such as the site name. The entry can contain up to 30 characters. PORT [RS232, RS485]
Data Interface Signaling Standard Select or identify the current data INTERFACE connectors, J3, signaling mode:
RS232 or RS485. This is the port though which the payload data will pass. Pin descriptions for EIA-232 and EIA-485 variations begin on Transceiver Modules Interface Connector, J3, Detailed Pin Descriptions on Page 66. This command will not function on transceivers with a TTL signalling inter-
face. PWR [2030]
Radio Transmitter Power Level This command displays or sets the desired RF power output of the radio. The PWR command parameter is specified in dBm and can be adjusted in 1 dBm steps. The default setting is 30 dBm (1 watt) for the 900 MHz model and 27 dBm (0.5 watt) for the 2400 MHz model. To read the actual (measured) power output of the radio, use the SHOW PWR command. In the USA, maximum allowable power is governed by FCC limits on Effec-
tive Isotropic Radiated Power output (EIRP). The EIRP limit of +36 dBm on the 900 and 2400 MHz band, means that any user with a net antenna gain greater than 6 dBi on the 900 MHz band, or 9 dBi on the 2400 MHz band, must decrease the PWR setting accordingly. How Much Output Power Can be Used? on Page 17 contains a detailed discussion of this topic. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 49 REPEAT [010]
Downstream Repeat Transmission Count The REPEAT command affects downstream data. The command causes a Master or Extension to always repeat transmissions for the specified number of times (range is 0 to 10; default selection is 3). Unlike the RETRY command, there is no acknowledgment that a message has been received. Use the REPEAT command without a value to display the current setting. RETRY [010]
Upstream Repeat Transmission Count The RETRY command affects upstream data. The command selects, or displays, the maximum number of times (0 to 10) that a Remote radio will re-transmit data. The default setting is 10. This command is associated with ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request) opera-
tion of the radio and is intended for use in areas with heavy radio interference. When the RETRY command is issued without parameters, the maximum retransmission count is shown. A value of 0 represents no retries, while values of 1 or greater successively improve the chance of data delivery in spectrally harsh environments (at the expense of possibly increased latency). The RETRY value is only setable at the Master. It is readable by a synchro-
nized Remote. RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator This command displays the radios Received Signal Strength Indication in dBm (decibels relative to 1 mW). The output can range from 40 dBm to 120 dBm. Command availability and results depend on the mode of opera-
tion (Master or Remote). The closer to 0 dBm, the stronger the signal, thus a reading of 70 dBm is stronger than 80 dBm. For a Remote radio, under normal operation, RSSI is based on the average signal strength of the SYNC message received in each of the eight frequency zones. (RSSI is sampled each time a SYNC message is received.) When using the RSSI reading to align a directional antenna, it is important to make changes slowly so that the RSSI reading will provide meaningful results. It will take several seconds to indicate a change in signal level. The radio stays in RSSI mode until For a Master radio, under normal operation, entering the RSSI command causes the response NOT AVAILABLE to be returned. This is because a Master is normally receiving signals from several Remote stations and an RSSI reading would be continually changing. The only exception is when the SETUP command has been asserted. This disables hopping and allows reading a raw RSSI signal level in real time from a Master or Remote radio. NOTE 1: RSSI readings will not accurately indicate signals stronger than 40 dBm. is pressed. ENTER NOTE 2: RSSI works for Dependent Masters. Command displays NOT AVAILABLE if the Dependent Master is not synchronized. 50 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C RTU [ON, OFF, 0-80]
Remote Terminal Unit Simulator This command re-enables or disables the radios internal RTU simulator, which runs with factory-proprietary polling programs (poll.exe and rsim.exe). The internal RTU simulator is available whenever a radio has diag-
nostics enabled. This command also sets the RTU address to which the radio will respond. The internal RTU can be used for testing system payload data or pseudo bit error rate (BER) testing. It can be helpful in isolating a problem to either the external RTU or the radio. The default RTU setting is OFF. RX [xxxx]
Radio Receive Test Frequency This command sets or displays the test receive frequency used in place of hopping when the radio is in SETUP mode. The test receive frequency can be reprogrammed to any value between 902.200 MHz and 927.800 MHz, inclu-
sive. The factory default setting is 915.000 MHz. RXD [0255]
RXD Delay Used to set a delay, in milliseconds, of RXD data to emulate a seamless mode with much lower latency in applications where retries are not required. Use a delay of twice the value of the HOPTIME period (See Page45). RXTOT [NONE, 01440]
Receive Data Timeout-Timer This command sets or displays the amount of time (in minutes) to wait for the next received data packet before issuing a receiver time-out alarm. The default setting is NONE. SAF [ON, OFF]
Store-and-Forward Services Support This command enables/disables the operation of the Store-and-Forward services. It can be set only at the networks Master station, but will effect all radios in the associated network. The default setting is OFF. See related commands: XADDR [031] on Page 55, XPRI [031] on Page 56, and XMAP [00000000-FFFFFFFF] on Page 55. SETUP Setup Radio Test This command sets up the transceiver for checking antenna SWR or trans-
mitter power with external measuring equipment. Do not use this mode during normal operation. When the SETUP command is entered, the prompt changes to SETUP>, and:
Hopping is disabled. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 51 Synthesizer frequencies are reset to the test frequencies specified by the TX and RX commands described earlier. The radio can be keyed using the KEY command. DKEY is used to unkey the radio. (If the radio is left in a keyed state it is automatically unkeyed after 10 minutes.) The RSSI is sampled in a raw, continuous fashion regardless of whether the unit is a Master or a Remote. Entering Q or QUIT returns the system to normal operation. A timer keeps the Setup mode from accidentally leaving the system disabled. After 10 minutes the system behaves as if Q or QUIT had been entered, returning the unit to normal operation. NOTE: TransNET uses a automatic level control in normal operation to keep transmit power constant over time. This facility is disabled in Setup mode. To test 1 Watt power output in Setup mode, the user must enter PWR 30 followed by KEY. The power output will only be valid for the first couple of seconds. SER Radio Serial Number Displays the serial number of the radio. SHOW CON Show Virtual Connection Status Shows virtual connection status established by the latest ATDT command sequence. (Works only with AT ON. SeeAT [ON, OFF] on Page 41) If no connection is established, it displays NONE. If a connection is active, it will display:
<Master unit address> TO <Remote (dialed) unit address>. SHOW PWR Show Measured RF Transmit Power The SHOW PWR command displays the actual (measured) RF power output in dBm. Unlike the PWR command, this command shows the actual level being measured, not the programmed RF power setting. SHOW SYNC Show Clock-Synchronization Master Network Address When used at a Remote station, this command will display Extended Address and Unit Address of the Master or Extension radio to which the Remote is synchronized. The network depth at the Remote, defined as the number of downstream links from the Master, is displayed in parentheses. SHOW SYNC works for Dependent Masters. A value of zero (0) means the station is a Master synchronized to a Clock-Sync Master. The SHOW SYNC command will display an asterisk (*) after depth value if the radio is operating with co-located Masters. 52 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C SKIP [NONE, 1...8]
Skip Radio Operating Zones This command sets or displays which, if any, of the eight zones will be skipped from the radios hopping sequence. Skipping zones is one way of dealing with constant interference on one or more frequencies in the radios operating band. See DEALING WITH INTERFERENCE on Page 32 for more information on dealing with interference. Tables 19, 20, 21 and 22 show the frequency range covered by each zone. The command parameter is either the keyword NONE or an undelimited string of up to four digits where each digit 1...8 represents a corresponding zone to skip. (For zone parameter input, the digits can appear in any order and can be optionally separated by a blank space.) The SKIP command is display-only at Remote radios. (Remotes must be synchronized with the Master radio to display the skip status.) In the USA, a maximum of four zones may be skipped for TransNET 900 and a maximum of three zones may skipped for TransNET 2400. Check the regu-
latory requirements for your region. The SKIP function may not be permitted in your country and the radio will not respond to the SKIP command. Table 19. 900 MHz Frequency Skip Zones ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 902.2 to 905.2 905.4 to 908.4 908.6 to 911.6 911.8 to 914.8 915.0 to 918.0 918.2 to 921.2 921.4 to 924.4 924.6 to 927.6 Table 20. 2400 MHz, Band A, Frequency Skip Zones ZONE 1 2401.6 to 2404.6 ZONE 2 2404.8 to 2407.8 ZONE 3 2408.0 to 2411.0 ZONE 4 2411.2 to 2414.2 ZONE 5 2414.4 to 2417. ZONE 6 2417.6 to 2420.6 ZONE 7 2420.8 to 2423.8 ZONE 8 2424.0 to 2427.0 Table 21. 2400 MHz, Band B, Frequency Skip Zones ZONE 1 2427.2 to 2430.2 ZONE 2 2430.4 to 2433.4 ZONE 3 2433.6 to 2436.6 ZONE 4 2436.80 to 2439.8 ZONE 5 2440.0 to 2443.0 ZONE 6 2443.2 to 2446.2 ZONE 7 2446.4 to 2449.4 ZONE 8 2449.6 to 2452.6 Table 22. 2400 MHz, Band C, Frequency Skip Zones ZONE 1 2452.8 to 2455.8 ZONE 2 2456.0 to 2459.0 ZONE 3 2459.2 to 2462.2 ZONE 4 2462.4 to 2465.4 ZONE 5 2465.6 to 2468.6 ZONE 6 2468.8 to 2471.8 ZONE 7 2472.0 to 2475.0 ZONE 8 2475.2 to 2478.2 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 53 SLEEP [ON, OFF]
Transceiver SleepRemotes Only This command is used to set or display the radios Sleep Mode setting. The default setting is SLEEP OFF. When this setting is ON (enabled) the Low-Power, or RTU-forced Sleep Mode, can be used. This function cannot be turned on for a Master or Extension radio unless the unit is in the Low-Power Mode. See Using the Radios Sleep Mode (Remote Units Only) on Page 26 and Low-Power Mode versus Remotes Sleep Mode on Page 29 for more information. SREV Firmware Revision Level This command displays the version of the firmware currently loaded into the transceiver. A display of 06-4040A01, 3.6.1 is an example of the firmware version identi-
fierpart number followed by release/version number. STAT Alarm Status This command is used to check the alarm status of the radio. If no alarms exist, the message NO ALARMS PRESENT is returned. If an alarm does exist, a two-digit alarm code (0031) is displayed and the event is identified as a Major or Minor alarm. A brief description of the event is also given. If more than one alarm exists, the word MORE appears, and additional alarms may be viewed by pressing the alarm codes are provided in Table 23 on Page 58. key. Detailed descriptions of the ENTER TEMP Radios Internal Temperature This command displays the internal temperature of the transceiver in degrees Celsius. (Note that the radio is specified to operate in an environment between 30 C and +60 C). This internal reading may be higher than the outside temperature by several degrees. TX [xxxx]
Radio Transmit Test Frequency This command sets or displays the test transmit frequency used in place of hopping whenever the radio is in Setup mode. The test transmit frequency for the 900 MHz radios can be reprogrammed to any value between 902.200 MHz and 927.800 MHz, inclusive. The factory default setting is 915.000 MHz. For the 2400 MHz radios, the test frequency can be programmed to any frequency between 2400.6 MHz and 2482.0 MHz. The default value is 2436.0 MHz. 54 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C UNIT [1000065000]
Unit Address This command sets the unit addressing for network-wide diagnostics and AT-Command address. The unit address is factory programmed to the last four digits of the radios serial number. If re-programmed in the field, the entry must consist of five digits between 10000 and 65000. XADDR [031]
Extended Address Used to display or program the Extended Address of this radio that will serve as a common address for the sub-network synchronized to this Master or Extension. This value can be listed in the XPRI parameter of associated Extension or Remote radios to allow them to synchronize to this radio. We recommend setting the Master to zero (0). It is easy to remember, and is the default address when the INIT command is used. (Programmed only in Master and Extension radios.) XMAP [00000000-FFFFFFFF]
Map of Extension Addresses XMAP is a 32-bit hex entry where the least significant bit represents XADDR 0 and the most significant bit represents XADDR 31. The full 32-bit hex value represents the entire list of extensions with which the radio will be allowed to communicate. (Pertains to Remotes and Extensions only.) This parameter is easily programmed through the MDS TransNET Configu-
ration Softwares Store-and-Forward Settings panel. XPRI [031]
Primary Extended Address Will display or program the extended address of the primary radio with which this radio will attempt to synchronize and communicate. A setting of NONE allows the unit to synchronize with any Master or Extension in the XMAP list.
(Parameter only meaningful for Remote or Extension units.) XRSSI [NONE, 40...120]
Extension RSSI Level The XRSSI command is used to set the RSSI minimum signal level required to preserve synchronization with a non-primary Extension radio. This param-
eter will be ignored if XPRI is set to NONE. ZONE CLEAR Clear Zone Statistics Log The ZONE CLEAR command clears the zone data for all zones in the Zone Data Log, resetting the count to 0. (Zone data is also cleared automatically upon reboot.) 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 55 ZONE DATA Read Zone Statistics Log The transceiver divides its frequency operating spectrum into eight 3.0 MHz-wide zones or sub-bands. (These are the same zones referenced by the SKIP command described earlier.) Data frame statistics are maintained for each zone to indicate the transmission quality of data through the network. This information is useful for identifying zones where significant interference exists. Historical information on the quality of each zone can be accessed using the ZONE DATA command. The report shows you the number of data frames sent, the number received, and the number received with errors. If an excessive number of errors are seen in one or more frequency zones, it may indicate interference, and you should consider skipping those zones using the SKIP command (See SKIP [NONE, 1...8] on Page 53). Note: If a frequency zone has been skipped, all counts for that zone will be zeros. The ZONE DATA format is displayed as follows:
1:TX TOTAL 00000000 1:RX TOTAL 00000000 1:RX ERROR 00000000 x:
x:
x:
8:TX TOTAL 00000000 8:RX TOTAL 00000000 8:RX ERROR 00000000 All data is based on payload packets. Incoming network data may be divided into multiple packets for over-the-air transfers. The number before the colon represents the zone. TX TOTAL is the transmit packet total. RX TOTAL is the receive packet total. RX ERROR is the total number of received packets with CRC errors. All zone data is reset with the ZONE CLEAR command. 9.0 TROUBLESHOOTING Successful troubleshooting of a TransNET system is not difficult, but requires a logical approach. It is best to begin troubleshooting at the Master station, as the rest of the system depends on the Master for polling instruc-
tions and synchronization data. If the Master station has problems, the oper-
ation of the entire network will be affected. When communication problems are found, it is good practice to begin by checking the basics. All radios in the network must meet these basic require-
ments:
Adequate and stable primary power An efficient and properly aligned antenna system Secure connections (RF, data & power) 56 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Proper programming of the radios operating parameters, especially Operating Mode (MODE), Network Address (ADDR), and interface Baud Rate (BAUD). For TransNET 2400 check the sub-band (BAND). The correct interface between the radio and the connected data equipment (proper cable wiring, data format and timing). In store-and-forward systems there are several areas that should be checked or evaluated:
Look for duplicate XADDR values on MODE M and MODE X radios. Duplicates will cause failures unless the radios are too far apart to hear each other. Check for errors in the synchronization qualifiers, XPRI and XMAP, on corresponding Remote radios. Verify SAF is enabled at the Master radio. 9.1 Alarm Codes When an alarm condition exists, the transceiver creates an alarm code. These codes can be very helpful in resolving many system difficulties. Checking for AlarmsSTAT command To check for the presence of alarms, enter STAT. If no alarms exist, the message NO ALARMS PRESENT appears at the top of the display. If an alarm does exist, a two-digit alarm code (0031) is displayed, and it is identified as a major or minor alarm. A brief description of the alarm is also given. Alarm codes and their meanings are listed in Table 23. If more than one alarm exists, the word MORE appears at the bottom of the screen; additional alarms can be viewed by pressing ENTER
. Major Alarms versus Minor Alarms Major alarms report serious conditions that generally indicate a hardware failure, or other abnormal condition that will prevent (or seriously hamper) further operation of the transceiver. With the exception of alarm code 00 (network address not programmed), major alarms generally indicate the need for factory repair. Minor alarms report conditions which, under most circumstances, will not prevent transceiver operation. This includes out-of-tolerance conditions, baud rate mismatches, etc. The cause of these alarms should be investigated and corrected to prevent system failure. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 57 Alarm Codes Definitions Table 23 contains a listing of all alarm codes that may be reported by the transceiver. Additional alarm codes may be used in future firmware releases or are used by the factory. Table 23. Alarm Codes Descriptions Alarm Code 00 01 04 Alarm Type Major Major Major 08 10 12 16 17 18 29 30 31 Major Major Major Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Description The network address is not programmed. Improper firmware detected for this radio model. One or more of the programmable synthesizer loops is reporting an out-of-lock condition. The system is reporting that it has not been calibrated. Factory calibra-
tion is required for proper radio operation. The DSP was unable to properly program the system to the appropriate defaults. A hardware problem may exist. Receiver time-out alarm. The unit address is not programmed. A data parity fault has been detected on the DATA connector. This usually indicates a parity setting mismatch between the radio and the RTU. A data framing error has been detected on the DATA connector. This may indicate a baud rate mismatch between the radio and the RTU. RF output power fault detected. (Power differs by more than 2 dB from set level.) Often caused by high antenna system SWR. Check antenna, feedline and connectors. The system is reporting an RSSI reading below 105 dBm. The transceivers internal temperature is approaching an out-of-toler-
ance condition. If the temperature drifts outside of the recommended operating range and the transceiver may fail. 58 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C 9.2 LED Indicators The LED indicators on the transceiver board (CR3, CR-4, CR-5 and CR-6) are an important troubleshooting tool and should be checked whenever a problem is suspected. Table 24 describes the function of each status LED. Table 24. LED indicator descriptions RXD TXD DCD GP LED Name RXD (CR3) Receive Data TXD (CR4) Transmit Data DCD (CR5) Data Carrier Detect GP (CR6) General Purpose Description Serial receive data activity. Payload data from con-
nected device. Serial transmit data activity. Payload data to con-
nected device. ContinuousRadio is receiving/sending synchroni-
zation frames On within 10 seconds of power-up under normal conditions ContinuousPower is applied to the radio; no problems detected Flashing (5 times-per-second)Fault indication. See TROUBLESHOOTING on Page 57 OffRadio is unpowered or in Sleep mode 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 59 9.3 Troubleshooting Chart Table 25 provides suggestions for resolving system difficulties that may be experienced in the radio system. If problems persist, contact the factory for further assistance. Refer to the inside back cover of this guide for contact information. Difficulty Unit is inoperative. Table 25. Troubleshooting Guide Recommended System Checks a. Check for the proper supply voltage at the power connector. b. The transceivers internal fuse may have opened. Interference is sus-
pected. a. Verify that the system has a unique network address. Nearby sys-
tems with the same address will cause interference. No synchroniza-
tion with Master, or poor overall performance. b. Check for interference by locking out affected zone(s) using the SKIP command (Page 53). c. If omnidirectional antennas are used on Remote stations, consider changing to directional antennas. This will often limit interference to and from other stations. a. Check for secure interface connections at the radio and the connect-
ed device. b. Check the antenna, feedline and connectors. Reflected power should be less than 10% of the forward power reading (SWR 2:1 or lower). c. If the Remote radio is in synchronization, but performance is poor, check the received signal strength using the RSSI command
(Page 50). If RSSI is low, it may indicate antenna problems, or mis-
alignment of directional antenna headings. d. Verify proper programming of system parameters: mode, network address, data interface baud rate, transmitter power, CTS delay, etc. For store-and-forward applications, also verify the following: SAF is ON; extended address is properly programmed at each extension;
Remotes are using the proper values for XPRI and XMAP. e. Check for alarms using the STAT command (Page 54) BER is too high. Data throughput is spotty. a. The RETRY and REPEAT commands may be increased to deal with interference, or decreased to increase throughput and reduce latency. Latency is too high. b. Try turning on FEC. FEC on gives some coding gain, but comes at the cost of reduced throughput. a. Reduce the REPEAT count. b. Turn BUFF OFF. BUFF ON ensures that no gaps occur in the data, but this comes at the cost of increased latency. c. Make sure HOPTIME is set to 7. 60 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Performing Network-Wide Remote Diagnostics 9.4 Diagnostics data from a Remote radio can be obtained by connecting a laptop or personal computer running MDS InSite diagnostics software (Version 6.6 or later) to any radio in the network. NOTE: The diagnostics feature may not be available in all radios. The ability to query and con-
figure a radio via Network-wide Diagnostics is based on the feature options purchased in the radio being polled. If a PC is connected to any radio in the network, intrusive polling (polling which briefly interrupts payload data transmission) can be performed. To perform diagnostics without interrupting payload data transmission, connect the PC to a radio defined as the root radio. A radio is defined as a root radio using the DTYPE ROOT command locally, at the radio. A complete explanation of Remote diagnostics can be found in the Network-Wide Diagnostics System Handbook (Part No. 05-3467A01). Table 26. Network-Wide Diagnostics Commands Command Description DLINK [xxxxx/ON/OFF]
Details, page 44 Set baud rate of diagnostics link DTYPE [NODE/ROOT]
Details, page 45 Set radios operational characteristics for net-
work-wide diagnostics 1. Program one radio in the network as the root radio by entering the DTYPE ROOT command at the radio. 2. At the root radio, use the DLINK ON and DLINK [baud rate] commands to configure the diagnostic link protocol on the DIAG port. 3. Program all other radios in the network as nodes by entering the DTYPE NODE command at each radio. 4. Use the DLINK ON and DLINK [baud rate] commands to configure the diagnostic link protocol on the RJ-11 port of each node radio. 5. Connect a PC on which InSite software is installed to the root radio, or to one of the nodes, at the radios diagnostics port. 6. Launch the InSite application at the PC. (Refer to the InSite users manual for details.) 10.0 RADIO FIRMWARE UPGRADES From time to time, GE MDS releases new firmware for its radio products. This file can be installed in existing radios to take advantage of engineering improvements or additional features. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 61 10.1 Obtaining New Firmware The latest firmware for each radio type may be obtained free from our Web site at:
www.GEmds.com Registration may be required to access some downloadable files. Firmware is also available on disks from the factory that are bundled with an installation utility (MDS Radio Software Upgrade (upgrade.exe) for transfer-
ring the firmware file on the disk to the radio. Saving a Web-Site Firmware File Onto Your PC Firmware upgrades are distributed as a plain-text (ASCII) file with a .S28 extension. Browse the GE MDS Web site to find the desired .S28 file for your radio. When you have found your selection, use the right mouse button to select a path on your computer on which to save the file. (If this isnt done, your browser may display the firmware file contents as text on the screen instead of downloading it to your local hard drive.) After the .S28 file has been saved to your computer, you may use either MDS TransNET Configuration Software or MDS Radio Software Upgrade programs to install this firmware in your radios. 10.2 Installing Firmware Into Your Radio 1. Connect the PC to the radios diagnostics port. 2. Start the MDS TransNET Configuration Software. Open diagnostics port to the radio. The program will automatically read the radios profile. 3. From the File menu, select Radio Firmware Upgrade and follow the prompts to install the new firmware into the radio. Do not press the Cancel button once the installation has started or it will leave the radio without any code. When the installation is complete, another radio may be connected to your PC and programmed. NOTE: If a firmware installation fails, the radio is left unprogrammed and inoperative. This is indicated by the PWR LED flashing slowly (1 second on/1 second off). This condition is only likely to occur if there is a power failure to the computer or radio during the in-
stallation process. The installation should be attempted again. 11.0 SECURITY Today, the operation and management of an enterprise is becoming increasing dependent on electronic information flow. An accompanying concern becomes the security of the communication infrastructure and the security of the data itself. We take this matter seriously, and provide several means for protecting the data carried over our wireless products. Our radios address this issue primarily through the use of the following items:
1) A proprietary modem/data link layerData signals are processed using code and hardware specifically designed by the manufacturer. 62 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C 2) A unique Network AddressThis provides a unique identifier for each radio in a network. A radio is not addressable unless this unique code is included in the data string. 3) An optional encryption value (code)Setting an encryption code requires the use of the CODE command. This command scrambles the radios hop pattern and encrypts payload data content. A radio requires the correct Network Address (ADDR) and CODE value in order to synchronize. When the CODE command is used, the same value must be programmed into all radios in the network. See CODE [NONE, 1255] on Page 42 for more details. The effective combination of CODE and ADDR discourage the use of an exhaustive search to gain access to a system. The items described above provide sufficient security for most systems. For highly-sensitive applications, system designers should consider employing application level encryption into their polling protocols to further protect their systems. Third party software tools are available for adding encryption, and these should be considered as part of any advanced encryption scheme. 12.0 TECHNICAL REFERENCE 12.1 Product Specifications900 MHz GENERAL Frequency Hopping Range:
Hop Pattern:
Frequency Stability:
Half-Duplex Operation:
Network Addresses:
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
Primary Power:
Current Draw (typical):
Transmit:
Receive:
Sleep Mode:
Physical Dimensions:
Agency Approvals:
902928 MHz, Subdivided into eight 3.2 MHz zones Based on network address 1.5 ppm 1.6 MHz TX/RX split 65,000 40 C to +70 C
<95% at +40 C; non-condensing 13.8 Vdc (630 Vdc range) 510 mA @ 13.8 Vdc
<115 mA @ 13.8 Vdc 3 mA @ 13.8 Vdc 1.81 W x 3.45 L x 0.63 H
(46 x 87.5 x 16 mm) FCC Part 15.247
(E5MDS-EL806) FCC Limited Modular Approval Industry Canada RSS-210 and RSS-139
(CAN 3738A-MDSEL806) 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 63 DATA CHARACTERISTICS Data Interface:
Interface Connector:
Data Rate:
Data Latency:
Byte Length:
Maximum Data Transmission:
RF CHARACTERISTICS TRANSMITTER:
Power Output
(at antenna connector):
Duty Cycle:
Modulation Type:
Output Impedance:
Spurious:
RECEIVER:
Type:
Sensitivity:
Intermodulation:
Desensitization:
Spurious:
Bandwidth:
Interference Ratio
(SINAD degraded by 3dB):
Time Required to Synchronize with Master Radio:
RS-232/422/485 16-pin header, female 300, 600,1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps asynchro-
nous 7 ms (typical) 10 or 11 bits Continuous up to 115200 bps 1.0 Watt (+30 dBm) Max. Continuous Binary CPFSK 50 Ohms 49 dBm, 216 MHz960 MHz 41 dBm above 960 MHz Double conversion superheterodyne 105 dBm @ 1 x 106 BER 59 dB minimum (EIA) 60 dB 60 dB minimum 200 kHz Co-channel: 20 dB Adjacent channel: 0 dB Two channels away: +20 dB Three channels away: +30 dB 0.5 seconds (typical) 12.2 Product Specifications2400 MHz GENERAL Frequency Hopping Range:
Hop Pattern:
Frequency Stability:
Half-Duplex Operation:
Network Addresses:
2401.62477.8 MHz ISM band A: 2401.6 MHz2427.0 MHz B: 2427.2 MHz2452.6 MHz C: 2452.8 MHz2478.2 MHz Subdivided into eight 3.2 MHz zones Based on network address 1.5 ppm 1.6 MHz TX/RX split 65,000 64 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Temperature Range:
Humidity:
Primary Power:
40 C to +70 C
<95% at +40 C; non-condensing 13.8 Vdc (630 Vdc range) Current Draw (typical):
Transmit:
Receive:
Sleep Mode:
Physical Dimensions:
Agency Approvals:
DATA CHARACTERISTICS Data Interface:
Interface Connector:
Data Rate:
Data Latency:
Byte Length:
Maximum Data Transmission:
RF CHARACTERISTICS TRANSMITTER:
Power Output
(at antenna connector):
Duty Cycle:
Modulation Type:
Output Impedance:
Spurious:
RECEIVER:
Type:
Sensitivity:
Intermodulation:
Desensitization:
Spurious:
Bandwidth:
Interference Ratio
(SINAD degraded by 3dB):
510 mA @ 13.8 Vdc
<115 mA @ 13.8 Vdc 3 mA @ 13.8 Vdc 1.81 W x 3.45 L x 0.63 H
(46 x 87.5 x 16 mm) FCC Part 15.247
(E5MDS-EL806-24) FCC Limited Modular Approval Industry Canada RSS-210 and RSS-139
(CAN 3738A-MDSEL80624) RS-232/422/485 16-pin header, female 300, 600,1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps asynchro-
nous 7 ms (typical) 10 or 11 bits Continuous up to 115200 bps 0.5 Watt (+27 dBm) Max. Continuous Binary CPFSK 50 Ohms 49 dBm, 216 MHz960 MHz 41 dBm above 960 MHz Double conversion superheterodyne 104 dBm @ 1 x 106 BER 45 dB minimum (EIA) 60 dB 60 dB minimum 200 kHz Co-channel: 40 dB Adjacent channel: 0 dB Two channels away: +20 dB Three channels away: +45 dB 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 65 Time Required to Synchronize with Master Radio:
0.5 seconds (typical) 12.3 Transceiver Modules Interface Connector, J3, Detailed Pin Descriptions The tables in this section give detailed pin functions for the transceivers 16-pin header connector, J3 (see Figure 16). The tables are organized according to the available signaling configurations of the OEM transceiver. Signaling configuration is hardware fixed at the time of manufacture and will be one of the following:
TTL signaling for both Payload and Diagnostic data Payload data TTL; Diagnostic data RS-232 Payload data RS-232/RS-485 selectable; Diagnostic data RS-232 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Figure 16. 16-pin Header Connector (J3) on OEM Transceiver Board
(See parts list (Page80) for information on match-
ing connector) Table 27. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts Payload data TTL; Diagnostic data TTL Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 Input/
Output IN Signal Type OUT TTL, 3 Vdc OUT TTL, 3 Vdc IN IN TTL, 3 Vdc Name/Description GroundConnects to ground (negative supply poten-
tial). Diagnostic TXDSupplies received diagnostic/ad-
ministrative data to the connected device. Alarm conditionA low indicates normal operation. A high indicates an alarm. (See ASENSE [HI/LO]
command for more information.) Diagnostic RXDAccepts diagnostic/administrative data from the connected device. DC Input (630 Vdc) Supply Source must be capa-
ble of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. 66 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Table 27. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts Payload data TTL; Diagnostic data TTL (Continued) IN TTL, 3 Vdc OUT TTL, 3 Vdc IN IN IN IN OUT IN TTL, 3 Vdc TTL, 3 Vdc TTL, 3 Vdc TTL, 3 Vdc OUT TTL, 3 Vdc Sleep Mode InputA ground on this pin turns off most circuits in a remote radio. This allows for greatly reduced power consumption, yet preserves the radios ability to be brought quickly back on line. See Using the Radios Sleep Mode (Remote Units Only) on Page 26 for details. Data Carrier Detect (DCD)A low indicates hop-
ping synchronization has been achieved. Power Supply Shutdown ControlA ground on this pin causes the OEM modules power supply to shut down. DC Input (Regulated 3.3 Vdc)Supply Source must be capable of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. Transmitted Data (TXD)Accepts payload data from the connected device. DC Input (618 Vdc) Supply Source must be capa-
ble of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. Request to Send (RTS)A high causes CTS to fol-
low after the programmed CTS delay time has elapsed
(DCE). ReservedDo not connect. Received Data (RXD)Supplies received payload data to the connected device. GroundConnects to ground (negative supply poten-
tial). Clear to Send (CTS)Goes high after the pro-
grammed CTS delay time has elapsed (DCE), or keys an attached radio when RF data arrives (CTS KEY). 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Table 28. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts
(Payload data TTL; Diagnostic data RS-232) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 Input/
Output IN Signal Type OUT RS-232 OUT TTL, 3 Vdc IN RS-232 Name/Description GroundConnects to ground (negative supply poten-
tial). Diagnostic TXDSupplies received diagnostic/ad-
ministrative data to the connected device. Alarm conditionA low indicates normal operation. A high indicates an alarm. (See ASENSE [HI/LO]
command for more information.) Diagnostic RXDAccepts diagnostic/administrative data from the connected device. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 67 Table 28. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts
(Payload data TTL; Diagnostic data RS-232) (Continued) IN IN TTL, 3 Vdc OUT TTL, 3 Vdc IN IN IN IN OUT IN TTL, 3 Vdc TTL, 3 Vdc TTL, 3 Vdc TTL, 3 Vdc OUT TTL, 3 Vdc DC Input (630 Vdc) Supply Source must be capa-
ble of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. Sleep Mode InputA ground on this pin turns off most circuits in a remote radio. This allows for greatly reduced power consumption, yet preserves the radios ability to be brought quickly back on line. See Using the Radios Sleep Mode (Remote Units Only) on Page 26 for details. Data Carrier Detect (DCD)A low indicates hop-
ping synchronization has been achieved. Power Supply Shutdown ControlA ground on this pin causes the OEM modules power supply to shut down. ReservedDo not connect. Transmitted Data (TXD)Accepts payload data from the connected device. DC Input (630 Vdc) Supply Source must be capa-
ble of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. Request to Send (RTS)A high causes CTS to fol-
low after the programmed CTS delay time has elapsed
(DCE). ReservedDo not connect. Received Data (RXD)Supplies received payload data to the connected device. GroundConnects to ground (negative supply poten-
tial). Clear to Send (CTS)Goes high after the pro-
grammed CTS delay time has elapsed (DCE), or keys an attached radio when RF data arrives (CTS KEY). 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Table 29. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts Payload data RS-232; Diagnostic data RS-232 Pin No. 1 2 3 Input/
Output IN Signal Type OUT RS-232 OUT TTL, 3 Vdc Name/Description GroundConnects to ground (negative supply poten-
tial). Diagnostic TXDSupplies received diagnostic/ad-
ministrative data to the connected device. Alarm conditionA low indicates normal operation. A high indicates an alarm. (See ASENSE [HI/LO]
command for more information.) 68 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Table 29. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts Payload data RS-232; Diagnostic data RS-232 (Continued) IN IN IN RS-232 TTL, 3 Vdc OUT TTL, 3 Vdc IN IN IN IN OUT IN OUT TTL, 3 Vdc RS-232, 5 Vdc RS-232, 5 Vdc RS-232, 5 Vdc RS-232, 5 Vdc Diagnostic RXDAccepts diagnostic/administrative data from the connected device. DC Input (630 Vdc) Supply Source must be capa-
ble of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. Sleep Mode InputA ground on this pin turns off most circuits in a remote radio. This allows for greatly reduced power consumption, yet preserves the radios ability to be brought quickly back on line. See Using the Radios Sleep Mode (Remote Units Only) on Page 26 for details. Data Carrier Detect (DCD)A low indicates hop-
ping synchronization has been achieved. Power Supply Shutdown ControlA ground on this pin causes the OEM modules power supply to shut down. ReservedDo not connect. Transmitted Data (TXD)Accepts payload data from the connected device. DC Input 630 Vdc) Supply Source must be capa-
ble of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. Request to Send (RTS)A high causes CTS to fol-
low after the programmed CTS delay time has elapsed
(DCE). ReservedDo not connect. Received Data (RXD)Supplies received payload data to the connected device. GroundConnects to ground (negative supply poten-
tial). Clear to Send (CTS)Goes high after the pro-
grammed CTS delay time has elapsed (DCE), or keys an attached radio when RF data arrives (CTS KEY). 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 69 Table 30. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts Payload data RS-485; Diagnostic data RS-232 Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Input/
Output IN Signal Type OUT RS-232 OUT TTL, 3 Vdc IN IN IN RS-232 TTL, 3 Vdc OUT TTL, 3 Vdc IN IN IN IN OUT TTL, 3 Vdc Differential Differential Differential IN OUT Differential Name/Description GroundConnects to ground (negative supply poten-
tial). Diagnostic TXDSupplies received diagnostic/ad-
ministrative data to the connected device. Alarm conditionA low indicates normal operation. A high indicates an alarm. (See ASENSE [HI/LO]
command for more information.) Diagnostic RXDAccepts diagnostic/administrative data from the connected device. DC Input (630 Vdc) Supply Source must be capa-
ble of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. Sleep Mode InputA ground on this pin turns off most circuits in a remote radio. This allows for greatly reduced power consumption, yet preserves the radios ability to be brought quickly back on line. See Using the Radios Sleep Mode (Remote Units Only) on Page 26 for details. Data Carrier Detect (DCD)A low indicates hop-
ping synchronization has been achieved. Power Supply Shutdown ControlA ground on this pin causes the OEM modules power supply to shut down. ReservedDo not connect. RXD+/RXA (Transmitted Data+)Non-inverting receiver input. Accepts payload data from the connect-
ed device. DC Input (630 Vdc) Supply Source must be capa-
ble of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. RXD/RXA (Transmitted Data-)Inverting receiv-
er input. ReservedDo not connect. TXD+/TXA (Received Data+)Non-inverting driver output. Supplies received payload data to the connect-
ed device. GroundConnects to ground (negative supply poten-
tial). TXD/TXA (Received Data-)Inverting driver out-
put. 70 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C 12.4 User Configurable I/O Connections Several connection points (eyelets) are provided within the transceiver near the INTERFACE connector (J3) that allow the user to facilitate unique integra-
tion requirements. By jumpering eyelets, external functions (unconditioned I/O) may be communicated within the TransNET network using a Network Management System (NMS) such as InSite or a users custom application that uses the Network-Wide Diagnostics Protocol. Specifications for this protocol are open and are contained within the InSite distribution material on CD and on the GE MDS Web site. CAUTION POTENTIAL EQUIPMENT DAMAGE Care should be taken when soldering to the PCB eyelets due to their small size. For this reason, only qualified personnel should install the jumpers and external connections. Installation of internal jumpers and connection to non-standard inter-
face pins may void the products warranty. If you are uncertain of your interface design, please consult with the GE MDS Technical Services Department for a review of your design to assure maintenance of your warranty. Invisible place holder H1 H4 H3 H5 H6 H2 Figure 17. User Interface I/O Jumper Eyelets PCBs 03-4050A01, Rev. B and later NOTE: If your PCB does not look like the one in the Figure 17, consult with the GE MDS Tech-
nical Services for assistance. Each pin connected to user-designed equipment must be connected through a special cable constructed to breakout the User I/O pins. Your interface can complement your unique requirements. The input signals and output interface must be within the radios interface parameters as summarized in Table 31. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 71 Table 31. TransNET User I/O Connection Resources Function or Service Range Filtered Receive Audio
(For test purposes) General Purpose I/O 1 (GPIO 1)a General Purpose I/O 2 (GPIO 2)b Analog 1c Do not connect. Factory use only. Data Interface Pin DB-9, Pin 9 RJ-11, Pin 1 RJ-11, Pin 2 RJ-11, Pin 3 Available at eyelet:
H2 0 5 Vac, 305 kHz TTL; External 10K to 3.3 V Vcc Recommended TTL; External 10K to 3.3 V Vcc Recommended 0 5 Vac, 60 HZ H3 H4 H6 H5 Available at eyelet:
H1 H7 H8 H9 a. Configuration and data retrievable via MDS InSite software as I/O 1 b. Configuration and data retrievable via MDS InSite software as I/O 2 c. Parameter retrievable via MDS InSite software Using the I/O Points with InSite NMS Software InSite software has the ability to read the user analog input (Analog 1) and two user-configurable and independent I/O signals (I/O 1 & I/O 2). Each I/O connection can independently configured as input or output. If configured as an output, a saved default output value can be stored in the radio to ensure the radio boots to the desired state for this pin. The values of I/O 1 & I/O 2 can be read and displayed by an InSite user to determine the current state. The values of I/O 1 & I/O 2 at the TransNETs DATA Interface connector will remain in a constant state until manually changed though the InSite Configuration screen. Application ExampleDigital Input/Output at Remote A typical application of the user I/O connections may require one digital input and one digital output to be controlled by network diagnostics. In this example, H3 could be jumpered to H7 (I/O 1 to RJ-11, Pin 1) and H4 jumpered to H8 (I/O 2 to RJ-11, Pin 2). Using InSite, I/O 1 could be configured as an output and I/O 2 as an input. 72 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C 13.0 EVALUATION DEVELOPMENT KIT
(P/N 03-4053A01) The Evaluation Development Kit is designed to assist integrators who will be working with the transceiver in a benchtop setting. The kit contains the following:
Two OEM Transceiver modules (configured for TTL, or RS-232/485 operation, as requested) Two Evaluation Development boards (P/N 03-4051A01) Interface Cables Two whip antennas Two 12 Vdc power supplies TransNET Support CD containing software for programming &
diagnostics Evaluation PC Board A key part of the Evaluation Development Kit is the Evaluation Board shown in Figure 18. It contains a 16-pin header connector (J2) that mates with female connector J3 the OEM transceiver board. It carries all signals (except RF) between the Evaluation Board and the transceiver module. The Evalua-
tion PCB is compatible with TTL and RS-232/485 configured radios mounted on it.Table 34 lists the basic pin functions of J2. The Evaluation Board provides convenient connection points for diagnostics, payload data, and DC power. Each of these connectors are discussed in this section. The board also includes a series of test probe points to the left of J2. These may be used for monitoring logic signal activity with a multimeter, DVM, oscilloscope or other test instruments. The probe points are identified by printed markings on the board. The transceiver boards RF/Antenna connection is not connected to the Eval-
uation Boards 16-pin header. The transceiver modules antenna connection is always made at J200 or J201using a complementary connector. For more detailed pinout information on the transceiver modules Interface, J3, including the differences between TTL and RS-232/485 configured radios, refer to Section 12.3 on Page 66. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 73 STANDOFF SPACERS (4) TRANSCEIVER INTERFACE
(16-PIN HEADER) JUMPER BLOCK J1 TEST PROBE POINTS DC POWER
(525 VDC) DIAGNOSTIC COMMUNICATIONS
(RJ-11) DATA CONNECTOR
(DB-9) Figure 18. OEM Evaluation Board (P/N 03-4051A01) For detailed information on the transceiver modules Interface connector, J3, review the series of tables beginning on Page 66. Connecting the Transceiver & Evaluation Board To connect the Evaluation Board to the radio as shown in Figure 19, carefully align the pins of the 16-pin header with J3 on the transceiver module and press down firmly. The radio PC board should seat solidly on the four standoff spacers. Use nuts to secure the board to the standoffs. Invisible place holder Figure 19. Connecting the Transceiver (upper PCB) and Evaluation Board (lower PCB) Together CAUTION: Take care to avoid short-circuiting the underside of the Evaluation PC board. The bottom of the board is not insulated, and contact with metallic objects on the work sur-
face could cause damage to the board or connected equipment. 74 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C 13.1 Cable Connections for Benchtop Testing There are four basic requirements for operating the transceiver and evaluation board in a benchtop test environment. They are:
Adequate and stable primary power A proper antenna system or RF load (50 Ohms) The correct interface wiring between the transceiver and the connected DTE device (RTU, PLC, etc.) A connected PC terminal to read/set transceiver parameters. Figure 20 shows a typical setup for bench testing an OEM Transceiver. Two such setups will be required if you intend to establish over-the-air communi-
cations with another OEM transceiver. Invisible place holder ANTENNA
(OR 50-OHM RF LOAD) OEM Transceiver and Evaluation Board Power Supply 13.8 VDC
@ 750 mA
(min.) DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT PC TERMINAL Figure 20. Typical Test Setup Antenna ConnectionTransceiver Module, J200/201 Antenna connector is located at the edge of the transceiver module on the side opposite the Interface connector, J3. The connector can be one of several sub-miniature RF coaxial connectors as listed in Table 3 on Page 6. Connect an antenna or other suitable RF load to this connector. Only approved antenna/cable assemblies may be used with the radio. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 75 Do not apply DC power to the transceiver without first attach-
ing a proper RF load, or the transceiver may be damaged. CAUTION POSSIBLE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE DC Power Connector, J3 This connector accepts operating power for the transceiver. A wall-style AC adapter (Part No. 01-3862A02) is recommended for this service. DC connection is made with a 2-pin polarized plug, GE MDS Part No. 73-1194A39. Be sure to observe proper polarity. The left terminal is posi-
tive (+) and the right is negative (). (See Figure 21). CAUTION POSSIBLE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE The radio transceiver and OEM Evaluation PCB must be used only with negative-ground systems operating between 6 and 30 Vdc. Make certain that the polarity of the power source is correct. Invisible place holder Lead Binding Screws (2) Wire Ports (2)
(Polarity: Left +, Right ) Retaining Screws (2) Figure 21. DC Power Connector (P/N 73-1194A39) NOTE: Although the power connector used on the OEM Evaluation Board resem-
bles those used by some earlier MDS transceivers, such as the MDS 9810 and x710 family, the connectors are not equal and the use of the wrong plug will provide unre-
liable connections. Only the power connector shown in Figure 21 with screw termi-
nals and two retainer screws should be used with the OEM Evaluation Board. Diagnostic Connection, J4 J4 is an RJ-11-6 modular connector used to connect the evaluation board/transceiver to a PC terminal for programming and interrogation. An RJ-11 to DB-9 Adapter Cable (Part No. 03-3246A01) is required for this connection. If desired, an cable may be constructed for this purpose as shown in Figure 22. Only Pins 4, 5, and 6 of the RJ-11 connector should be used. Pins 1, 2, and 3 are reserved for factory test purposes.) The data parameters of the diagnostics port are as follows: 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. It automatically configures itself to function at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bps, as required. 76 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Invisible place holder RJ-11 PLUG
(TO TRANSCEIVER) DB-9 FEMALE
(TO COMPUTER) 4 5 6 TXD RXD GND 1 6 RJ-11 PIN LAYOUT RXD TXD GND 2 3 5 Figure 22. RJ-11 to DB-9 Diagnostic CableWiring Details
(A pre-constructed cable is also available, Part No. 03-3246A01) Diagnostic Communication Modes Two methods may be used to communicate with the radios diagnostic port:
Terminal InterfaceThe PC is used in its basic terminal emulation mode, (i.e., HyperTerminal session) and commands are issued as simple text strings. Radio Configuration SoftwareProprietary software from the factory that runs under the Windows operating system. It provides a graphical user interface with point and click functionality. The program is included on the TransNET Support Package CD shipped with every radio order. Both of these control methods are described in more detail in the section titled RADIO PROGRAMMING on Page 33. This section also includes a chart listing all commands for the OEM transceiver. DATA Connector, J5 J5 on the Evaluation Board (Figure 23) is the data interface for the trans-
ceiver. J5 is used to connect the transceiver to an external DTE terminal that supports only EIA/RS-232 signalling at speeds which are dependent on the radio data rate of either 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps (asynchronous only). The connector mates with a standard DB-9 plug available from many electronics parts suppliers. DATA Wiring Connections The connections made to J5 will depend on the requirements of the DTE device being used with the transceiver, and the operating functions that you require. Only the required pins for the application should be used. Do not use a straight through computer type cable that is wired pin-for-pin. Typical RS/EIA-232 applications require the use of Pin 2 (receive dataRXD) and Pin 3 (transmit dataTXD). Additionally, some systems may require the use of Pin 7 (Request-to-sendRTS). If hardware flow control is desired, Pin 7 (RTS) and Pin 8 (CTS) may also need connection. Table 32 gives pin details for radios configured for RS/EIA-232 service. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 77 NOTE: Radio modules equipped with a payload TTL interface are presented as RS-232 mode from the Evaluation Board. 5 1 Figure 23. DATA Connector (DB-9F), J5 As viewed from outside the device 9 6 Table 32 lists the DATA connector pin functions for an RS/EIA-232 signaling interface. NOTE: The radio is hard-wired as a DCE in the EIA-232 mode. Table 32. DATA Connector, J5, Pin DescriptionsRS/EIA-232 Pin Number Input/
Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OUT IN IN IN OUT Pin Description Eyelet H11, Evaluation PCB RXD (Received Data) Supplies received data to the connected device. TXD (Transmitted Data) Accepts TX data from the connected device. Eyelet H13, Evaluation PCB Signal GroundConnects to ground (negative supply potential) on the radios PC board and chassis. Eyelet H12, Evaluation PCB RTS (Request-to-Send) CTS (Clear-to-Send)Goes high after the programmed CTS delay time has elapsed (DCE), or keys an attached radio when RF data arrives (CTS KEY). Eyelet H14, Evaluation PCB Unterminated Pins Four pins of the DB-9 DATA Interface connector, J5, on the Evaluation PCB are available for custom connections. Figure 17 shows the location of eyelets connected to the Evaluation PCBs DATA interface connector, J5. These pins are provided for low-current and low-voltage connections. 78 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C H14 / J5-9 H13 / J5-4 H11 / J5-1 Invisible place holder H12 / J5-6 J5 Figure 24. Evaluation PCBs DATA Interface, J5, Unterminated Pins Eyelets PCBs 03-4051A01, Rev. B and later Transceiver Power Interface, J1 Terminal block, J1, on the Evaluation PCB, provides direct access to the two power lines feeding the transceiver moduleunregulated primary power
(630 Vdc) and regulated 3.3 Vdc. These jumpers and nearby eyelets can be used for two functions: 1. Measure the module current consumption under various operating conditions by inserting an inline ammeter, and 2. To bypass the Evaluation PCBs 3.3 Vdc regulator to connect your own power source. With the jumpers removed, the pins of J1 can be used as convenient points to measure the regulated and unregulated power supplied to the OEM module. Invisible place holder 630 V DC POWER IN H15 / J1-2 3.3 V DC POWER IN H17 / J1-2 630 V DC POWER LOAD H21 / J1-3 3.3 V DC POWER LOAD H22 / J1-1 J5 Figure 25. J1, Transceiver Power Eyelets NOTE: Jumper J1 does not normally require any change by the user for basic operation of the transceiver module on the Evaluation PCB.Both jumper plugs are normally installed on J1. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 79 13.2 Evaluation PCB Documentation This section contains an assembly drawing and parts list for the OEM Evalu-
ation Board. In addition, a separate foldout schematic of the Board is included at the back of this manual. Board documentation is provided to assist integra-
tors who need to create compatible interface circuitry between the OEM transceiver and host equipment. Assembly Drawing Invisible place holder C15 C12
L1 U2 C8
C30 o 1 C13 C14 R10 CR2 C16 R13 R11 C R14 NA A CR1 CR3 FH1 1 J3 16 15 J2 C21 J1 2 1 C19 o U3 C17 C18 C20 C31 C6 C7 1 6 J4 2 1 M R A L A GND P E E L S DIAG_TXD DIAG_RXD R W P _ G E R N U R W P _ G E R SHUTDN DCD LED RXD CTS GND RTS TXD K3 K2 K1 CR6
C R15 C24 EQ2 B R9 CR5 8 R
C23 C CR4 R12 R6 1U5 5 C26 R5 E Q1 B R7 R3
1 5 U4 R4 C22 C25 C2 C4 C1 o 28 U1 C3 C5 1 1 C29C C10 5 9 J5 C9 1 6 Figure 26. Evaluation Board Assembly Diagram Parts List Table 33 lists the electronic components used on the Evaluation Board. Table 33. OEM Evaluation Board Parts List Ref. Desig. CR1 CR4 CR5 CR6 CR2 CR3 Q1 Q2 U4 U5 U1 Part Description DIODE, SOT23 SMALL SIG 914 5D RECTIFIER, 30V B13 DIODE, SCHOTTKY POWER, SMT, SNGL, UPS840 TRANSISTOR, SOT23 NPN 6429 M1LR IC, LINEAR SC70-5 COMPARATOR SNGLE LMV33 IC, IN'FACE SSOP28 RS-232 TXVR SP3238E 80 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Table 33. OEM Evaluation Board Parts List (Continued) U3 U2 K1 K2 K3 R10 R4 R5 R13 R14 R12 R7 R9 R11 R3 R15 R8 R6 C12 C6 C7 C9 C10 C11 C29 C31 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C8 C13 C14 C15 C16 L1 J1 P/O J1 1-2, P/O J1 3-4 FH1 J2 J3 J4 J5 IC, IN'FCE 20PIN TSSOP DRIVER SP3222 IC, SWITCHING REG'R ADJ.4.5A LT1374HVIR RELAY, DPDT RESISTOR, CHIP 0603 1/16W 5% 2.2K RESISTOR, CHIP 0603 1/10W 1% 10K RESISTOR, CHIP O603 1/10W 1% 100K RESISTOR, CHIP 0603 1/10W 1% 1.5K RESISTOR, CHIP O603 1/10W 1% 1.82K RESISTOR, CHIP 0603 1/10W 1% 22.6K RESISTOR, CHIP O603 1/10W 1% 31.6K RESISTOR, CHIP 0603 1/10W 1% 470 OHM RESISTOR, CHIP O603 1/10W 1% 6.81K CAP, TANT 7343 20% 10V 100uf CAP, CHIP 0603 50V NPO 5% 100pf CAP, CHIP 0603 X7R 10% 0.1uF CAP, CHIP 0603 X7R 10% 470 pF CAP, CHIP 0603 X7R 10% 4700pF Capacitor, Low ESR Chip Ceramic, 1210 22uF Capacitor, Low ESR Chip Ceramic, 1210 4.7 INDUCTOR, SWITCHING, 20%, 10uH CONN, HEADER, 0.100 DUAL STR 4-PIN CONN, JUMPER FUSE HOLDER, PCB SMT W/2A SLO-BLO FUSE CONN, HEADER, PC MOUNT 0.078, DUAL, 16 PIN Samtec TW Series, Part No: ASP 103812-01
(Mates with J3 on the OEM radio transceiver) CONN, TERM STRIP, 5MM PCB CONN, TELE JACK 6POS 6CON RT A SMT W/F CONN, D-SUB, PCB RCPT 90 DEGREE, 9 PIN 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 81 Evaluation PCB Interface to Transceiver PCB, J2 Table 34, lists the signal and power lines passed between the Evaluation PCB and the transceiver module. Only a few functions are passed through to the Evaluation PCBs DATA interface connector, J5. However, many of the pins of J2 are available through eyelets near the connector as seen in Figure 26 on Page 80. Table 34. Transceiver Interface, J2
(16-Pin Header Connector on Evaluation PCB) Pin No. Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Ground Diagnostic TXD Alarm Condition Diagnostic RXD DC Input Sleep Mode Input Data-Carrier Detect (DCD) Power Supply Shutdown Control ReservedDo not connect. Transmitted Payload Data (TXD) DC Input Request-to-Send (RTS) ReservedDo not connect. Received Payload Data (RXD) Ground Clear-to-Send (CTS) For detailed descriptions of the functions of the interface connector from the transceivers point-of-view, see Transceiver Modules Interface Connector, J3, Detailed Pin Descriptions on Page 66. PCB Schematic The foldout schematic found in the rear of this manual can also be found in the TransNET Support Package CD-ROM, and from our Web site at:
www.GEmds.com. 13.3 Evaluation Board Fuse Replacement The Evaluation Board is protected by a 2-Ampere fuse. The fuse can be blown by an over-current condition caused by an internal failure or over-voltage. Follow the procedure below to remove and replace the fuse:
82 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C 1. Disconnect the primary power cable and all other connections to the Evaluation Board. J3. 2. Locate the fuse holder assembly, FH1, behind the green power connector, 3. Loosen the fuse from the holder using a very small screwdriver, then use a small pair of needle-nose pliers to pull the fuse straight up and out of the holder. 4. Use an ohmmeter or other continuity tester to verify that the fuse is open. 5. Install a new fuse in the holder. Replacement fuse information: Littelfuse
#0454002; 452 Series, 2 Amp SMF Slo-Blo fuse (GE MDS Part No. 29-1784A03). 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 83 14.0 dBm-Watts-Volts CONVERSION CHART Table 35 is provided as a convenience for determining the equivalent voltage or wattage of an RF power expressed in dBm with 50 Ohms load. Table 35. dBm-Watts-Volts Conversion Chart dBm V
+53
+50
+49
+48
+47
+46
+45
+44
+43
+42
+41
+40
+39
+38
+37
+36
+35
+34
+33
+32
+31
+30
+29
+28
+27
+26
+25
+24
+23
+22
+21
+20
+19
+18
+17
+16
+15
+14
+13
+12
+11
+10
+9
+8
+7
+6
+5
+4
+3
+2
+1 100.0 70.7 64.0 58.0 50.0 44.5 40.0 32.5 32.0 28.0 26.2 22.5 20.0 18.0 16.0 14.1 12.5 11.5 10.0 9.0 8.0 7.10 6.40 5.80 5.00 4.45 4.00 3.55 3.20 2.80 2.52 2.25 2.00 1.80 1.60 1.41 1.25 1.15 1.00
.90
.80
.71
.64
.58
.500
.445
.400
.355
.320
.280
.252 Po 200W 100W 80W 64W 50W 40W 32W 25W 20W 16W 12.5W 10W 8W 6.4W 5W 4W 3.2W 2.5W 2W 1.6W 1.25W 1.0W 800mW 640mW 500mW 400mW 320mW 250mW 200mW 160mW 125mW 100mW 80mW 64mW 50mW 40mW 32mW 25mW 20mW 16mW 12.5mW 10mW 8mW 6.4mW 5mW 4mW 3.2mW 2.5mW 2.0mW 1.6mW 1.25mW Po 1.0mW
.80mW
.64mW
.50mW
.40mW
.32mW
.25mW
.20mW
.16mW
.125mW
.10mW dBm V
.225 0
.200
-1
-2
.180
.160
-3
.141
-4
.125
-5
.115
-6
.100
-7
-8
.090
.080
-9
.071
-10
.064
-11
.058
-12
.050
-13
-14
.045
.040
-15
-16
.0355
.001mW
.01mW dBm mV Po
-17
-18
-19
-20
-21
-22
-23
-24
-25
-26
-27
-28
-29
-30
-31
-32
-33
-34
-35
-36
-37
-38
-39
-40
-41
-42
-43
-44
-45
-46
-47
-48 31.5 28.5 25.1 22.5 20.0 17.9 15.9 14.1 12.8 11.5 10.0 8.9 8.0 7.1 6.25 5.8 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.2 2.85 2.5 2.25 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.25 1.18 1.00 0.90
.1W dBm V 2.9
-98 2.51
-99
-100 2.25 2.0
-101 1.8
-102 1.6
-103 1.41
-104 1.27
-105
-106 1.18 dBm nV 1000
-107 900
-108 800
-109
-110 710 640
-111 580
-112 500
-113 450
-114 400
-115
-116 355 325
-117 285
-118 251
-119
-120 225
.001pW
-121
-122
-123
-124
-125
-126
-127
-128
-129
-130
-131
-132
-133
-134
-135
-136
-137
-138
-139
-140 200 180 160 141 128 117 100 90 80 71 61 58 50 45 40 35 33 29 25 23 Po
.1pW Po
.01pW
.1W
.01W
.01W dBm mV Po
-49
-50
-51
-52
-53
-54
-55
-56
-57
-58
-59
-60
-61
-62
-63
-64 0.80 0.71 0.64 0.57 0.50 0.45 0.40 0.351 0.32 0.286 0.251 0.225 0.200 0.180 0.160 0.141
.001W Po
.1nW
.01nW
.001nW dBm V 128
-65 115
-66
-67 100 90
-68 80
-69 71
-70 65
-71 58
-72 50
-73
-74 45 40
-75 35
-76 32
-77 29
-78 25
-79
-80 22.5 20.0
-81 18.0
-82 16.0
-83 11.1
-84 12.9
-85
-86 11.5 10.0
-87 9.0
-88 8.0
-89 7.1
-90 6.1
-91
-92 5.75 5.0
-93 4.5
-94 4.0
-95 3.51
-96
-97 3.2 84 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide 85 86 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C GLOSSARY Antenna System GainA figure, normally expressed in dB, representing the power increase resulting from the use of a gain-type antenna. System losses (from the feedline and coaxial connectors, for example) are subtracted from this figure to calculate the total antenna system gain. ARQAutomatic Repeat Request. An error-correction technique whereby flawed data packets are detected and a request for re-transmission is issued. BitThe smallest unit of digital data, often represented by a one or a zero. Eight bits (plus start, stop, and parity bits) usually comprise a byte. Bits-per-secondSee BPS. BPSBits-per-second. A measure of the information transfer rate of digital data across a communication channel. ByteA string of digital data usually made up of eight data bits and start, stop, and parity bits. Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)A method to detect and correct errors by adding bits derived from a data packet, or string of bits, to the packet. The CRC value is used at the receiving end to evaluate the data packet integrity, and if it is not, the receiver will request a retransmission. Decibel (dB)A measure of the ratio between two signal levels. Frequently used to express the gain (or loss) of a system. Data Circuit-terminating EquipmentSee DCE. Data Communications EquipmentSee DCE. Data PacketA group of data bytes of various lengths to be sent over-the air. Each packet contains a header (preamble) followed by the data bytes. Packet size will depend on network protocol and/or Data Terminal EquipmentSee DTE. dBiDecibels referenced to an ideal isotropic radiator in free space. Frequently used to express antenna gain. dBmDecibels referenced to one milliwatt. An absolute unit used to measure signal power, as in transmitter power output, or received signal strength. DCEData Circuit-terminating Equipment (or Data Communications Equipment). In data communications terminology, this is the modem side of a computer-to-modem connection. By default, GE MDS transceivers are set as DCE devices. Digital Signal ProcessingSee DSP. DSPDigital Signal Processing. DSP circuitry is responsible for the most critical real-time tasks; primarily modulation, demodulation, and servicing of the data port. 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide G-1 DTEData Terminal Equipment. A device that provides data in the form of digital signals at its output. Connects to the DCE device. EqualizationThe process of reducing the effects of amplitude, frequency or phase distortion with compensating networks. Extended AddressA user-selectable number between 0 and 31 that identifies a group of transceivers that are part of a common sub-network. It is recommended the Master be assigned XADDR 0 and the values of 1-31 assigned to Extension radios. Extension RadioA radio in a TransNET spread-spectrum network that serves as a gateway between vertically adjacent sub-networks. See Store-and-Forward. Fade MarginThe greatest tolerable reduction in average received signal strength that will be anticipated under most conditions. Provides an allowance for reduced signal strength due to multipath, slight antenna movement or changing atmospheric losses. A fade margin of 20 to 30 dB is usually sufficient in most systems. Flow ControlA technique to manage incoming serial data to prevent buffer overflow and provide maximum over-the-air data transfers. This service can be provided through a collaboration of hardware and/or data protocol. FrameA segment of data that adheres to a specific data protocol and contains definite start and end points. It provides a method of synchronizing transmissions. Frequency HoppingThe spread spectrum technique used by the transceiver, wherein two or more associated radios change their operating frequencies several times per second using a set pattern. Since the pattern appears to jump around, it is said to hop from one frequency to another. Frequency ZoneThe transceivers use up to 128 discrete channels in the 902 to 928 MHz spectrums. A group of 16 channels is referred to as a zone. The transceivers use five to eight frequency zones. Hardware Flow ControlA transceiver feature used to prevent data buffer overruns when handling high-speed data from the RTU or PLC. When the buffer approaches overflow, the radio drops the clear-to-send (CTS) line, which instructs the RTU or PLC to delay further transmission until CTS again returns to the high state. Host ComputerThe computer installed at the master station site, which controls the collection of data from one or more remote sites. LatencyThe delay (usually expressed in milliseconds) between when data is applied to TXD (Pin 2) at one radio, until it appears at RXD (Pin 3) at the other radio. MASMultiple Address System. A radio system where a central master station communicates with several remote stations for the purpose of gathering telemetry data. G-2 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C Master (Station)The one radio transceiver in a spread spectrum network that automatically provides synchronization information to one or more associated remote transceivers. A radio may be programmed for either master or remote mode using software commands. Multiple Address System (MAS)See Point-Multipoint System. Network AddressUser-selectable number between 1 and 65000 that is used to identify a group of transceivers that form a communications network. The master and all remotes within a given system must have the same network address. Point-Multipoint SystemA radio communications network or system designed with a central control station that exchanges data with a number of remote locations equipped with terminal equipment. PollA request for data issued from the host computer (or master PLC) to a remote radio. PLCProgrammable Logic Controller. A dedicated microprocessor configured for a specific application with discrete inputs and outputs. It can serve as a host or as an RTU. Remote RadioA radio in a spread spectrum network that communicates with an associated master station. A radio may be programmed for either master or remote mode using software commands. Remote Terminal UnitSee RTU. RepeaterA radio that receives RF data and retransmits it. See Store-and-Forward. RTURemote Terminal Unit. A data collection device installed at a remote radio site. SCADASupervisory Control And Data Acquisition. An overall term for the functions commonly provided through an MAS radio system. Standing Wave RatioSee SWR. Sub-NetworkA group of transceivers and the corresponding radio that they are directly synchronized to. A sub-network can be identified by Extended Address. See Store-and-Forward. Store-and-ForwardA radio that receives RF data and retransmits it. In the TransNET product line, store and forward is defined as a network that consists of vertically adjacent sub-networks that alternate communicating upstream and downstream. The transceiver performs store and forward at the internal data frame level (not the user data level) which allows the equipment to stream data with minimal latency through each Extension/Repeater radio station. SWRStanding Wave Ratio. A parameter related to the ratio between forward transmitter power and the reflected power from the antenna system. As a general guideline, reflected power should not exceed 10% of the forward power ( 2:1 SWR). 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide G-3 TTLTransistor-Transistor Logic. A form of digital switching that utilizes bipolar transistors to sense high and low logic levels (1 and 0, respectively). Transmission LatencyTime required to send a single packet of data to the receiving end of the circuit. This value will depend on the baud rate and number of bytes in the sequence. ZoneSee Frequency Zone. G-4 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C INDEX A Accessories (table) 6 ADDR command (set/display radio network address) 41 Alarm checking for 58 code denitions 59 codes 58 codes, table 59 major vs. minor 59 receiver timeout (RXTOT command) 52 reset output signal 42 set/display output sense (ASENSE command) 42 status (STAT command) 55 ALARM command (superseded; see STAT command) 55 Alarm Mask (AMASK) Command 42 Alarm Sense (ASENSE) Command 42 Alarm Status Command (STAT) 55 AMASK command (congure alarm output signal) 42 Antenna performance optimization 15 selection 13 SWR check 16 system gain vs. power output setting, table 18 Yagi, illustrated 14 ASENSE command (set/display alarm output sense) 42 B BAUD command (set/display data interface port attributes) 42 Baud rate setting 17 setting for RJ-11 DIAG port (DLINK command) 62 Benchtop Setup & Evaluation 711 BUFF command (set/display received data handling mode) 43 C Cable data equipment to DATA INTERFACE connector 34 data interface wiring for tail-end links 10, 20 feedlines 14 Clear Zone Statisics Log, ZONE CLEAR 57 Clear-to-Send Delay (CTS) Command 44 Clear-to-Send Hold Time (CTSHOLD) Command 44 Clock-Synchronizing Master Address
(CSADDR) Command 44 CODE command (display/set encryption value) 43 Command 48 TEMP (radios internal temperature reading) 56 Commands ADDR (set/display radio network address) 41 AMASK (congure alarm output signal) 42 ASENSE (set/display alarm output sense) 42 BAUD (set/display data interface port attributes) 42 BUFF (set/display received data handling mode) 43 CODE (set/display encryption value), See also Encryption 43 CTS (set/display CTS line response timer) 44 CTSHOLD (set/display CTS hold timer) 44 detailed descriptions 4157 DEVICE (set/display DCE or CTS Key behavior) 45 display operating status 37 DKEY Command, Turn off radio transmitter test signal 45 DTYPE (set radios diagnostics type) 46 FEC (Forward Error Correction) 46 FEC (Forward Error Correction) Command 46 HOPTIME (set/display hoptime setting) 46 how used 41 INIT (restore factory default settings) 46 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide I-1 LPM (low-power mode) 48 LPMHOLD (low-power mode sleep time) 49 MODE (display/set radio mode as master, remote, or extension) 49 MODE (radio operating mode) 49 most often used commands 41 network conguration 36 OWM (set/display optional owners message) 50 OWN (set/display optional owners name) 50 PORT (display/set current data port) 50 PWR (set/display RF forward output power) 50 Radio transmitter test frequency
(TX) 56 RSSI (display received signal strength) 51 RTU (enable/disable internal RTU) 52 RX (set/display receiver test frequency) 52 RXD 52 RXTOT (set/display received data timeout value) 52 SAF (store-and-forward) 53 SER (radio serial number) 53 SETUP (enter testing and setup mode) 53 SHOW (display measured power output) 54 SHOW PWR (show power) 54 SHOW SYNC 54 SHOW SYNC (show Clock-Synchronization Master) 54 SKIP (set/display frequency zone to skip) 54 SLEEP (display/set radios sleep mode setting) 55 SLEEP (transceiver sleep mode) 55 SREV (rmware/software revision level) 55 STAT (list alarms) 55 TEMP (display internal temperature) 56 UNIT (unit address) 56 XADDR (extended address) 56 XMAP (Map of Extension Addresses) 56 XPRI (display/program primary radios extended address) 57 XRSSI (sets minimum signal level for sync. with non-primary extension unit) 57 D Data Baud Rate (BAUD) Command 42 Data Baud Rate (BUFF) Command 43 Data buffer setting 16, 43 DATA INTERFACE cable wiring for tail-end links, illustrated 10 connector pin descriptions, table 79 Data interface cable wiring for tail-end links, illustrated 20 Data Port Signalling Standard (PORT) Command 50 Default settings data interface baud rate 17 factory settings reset by INIT command (table) 47 restoring (INIT command) 46 See also individual command descriptions DEVICE Command 44 DEVICE command (set/display DCE or CTS Key behavior) 45 Diagnostics network-wide, performing 62 setup mode (SETUP command) 53 using InSite software for network-wide 62 Diagnostics Link (DLINK) 45 Display alarm output sense (ASENSE command) 42 alarms (STAT command) 55 CTS hold timer value (CTSHOLD command) 44 CTS line response timer value (CTS command) 44 data interface baud rate (BAUD command) 42 device behavior (DEVICE command) 45 hoptime setting (HOPTIME I-2 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C command) 46 network address (ADDR command) 41 operating status commands 37 owners message (OWM command) 50 owners name (OWN command) 50 receive test frequency (RX command) 52 received data handling mode (BUFF command) 43 received data timeout value (RXTOT command) 52 received signal strength (RSSI command) 51 RF forward output power (PWR command) 50 RF power output, actual measured
(SHOW command) 54 skipped frequency zones (SKIP command) 54 temperature, internal (TEMP command) 56 display/set radio mode as master, remote, or extension (see MODE command) 49 DKEY command (disable transmitter) 16, 53 DKEY, Disable Transmitter, Command 45 DLINK command (set/display baud rate of diagnostics link) 62 Downstream Repeat Transmission Count (REPEAT) Command 51 DSP (digital signal processing) 59 DTYPE command (set radios diagnostics type) 46, 62 E Enable internal RTU (RTU command) 52 network-wide diagnostics, procedures 62 Setup mode (SETUP command) 53 skipped zone (SKIP command) 54 Sleep Mode Enable/Disable LEDs (LED) Command 48 Encryption. See CODE command Equipment List 45 Evaluation Board Description & connections to 7480 PC Board Documentation 8184 Extended Address Command
(XADDR) 56 Extension radio. See Store-and-Forward (SAF) F Feedline selection 13, 14 Firmware Revision Level Command
(SREV) 55 Forward-Error Correction (FEC) Command 46 Full-Duplex Operation 31 G Gate (radio diagnostics type) 46 H Hardware Revision (HREV) Command 48 Hayes-Compatible AT Command
(AT) 42 Hoptime setting 16, 17 HOPTIME Command (radio transmitter hop timing) 46 HOPTIME command (set/display hoptime setting) 46 I Illustrations antenna, Yagi 14 data interface cable wiring for tail-end links 10, 20 model conguration code 72, 80 point-to-point link 5 remote station arrangement 76 tail-end link 5 typical MAS network 4 INIT command (restore factory default settings) 46 Initialize 46 InSite software 62 Installation 1115 connecting transceiver to data equipment 34 feedline selection 14 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide I-3 performance optimization 15 tail-end links 9, 20 Interference about 33 checks 17 troubleshooting 61 interference 33 K Key set to CTS keying (DEVICE command) 45 transmitter, for antenna SWR check 16 KEY command (key transmitter) 16, 53 L LED status indicators table 11, 60 Low-Power Mode (LPM) Command 48 Low-Power Mode Sleep Time
(LPMHOLD) Command 49 LPM Command (low-power mode) 48 LPMHOLD Command 49 M Map 56 Map of Extension Addressses
(XMAP) 56 Master Station default settings 47 MIRRORED BITS Protocol Support 30, 31 MODE Command 49 MODE command (display/set radio mode as master, remote, or extension) 49 MODE command (display/set radios operating mode as master, remote, or extension) 49 Model conguration code, illustrated 72, 80 Modes Low-Power Mode versus Remotes Sleep 30 Mounting instructions/dimensions 1112 Multiple Address System (MAS) network, illustrated 4 N Network Address (ADDR) Command 41 Network conguration commands 36 Network Diangnsotics Mode (DTYPE) Command 46 Network-wide diagnostics procedures 62 Node (radio diagnostics type) 46 O LED 48 Modbus, BUFF 43 OWM command (set/display optional owners message) 50 OWN command (set/display optional owners name) 50 Owners Message (OWM) Command 50 Owners Name Command (OWN) 50 P PC connecting to radios diagnostic port 62 launching InSite application at 62 performing diagnostics using connected 62 Peer (radio diagnostics type) 46 Performance optimization 15 Pins, DATA INTERFACE connector descriptions (table) 79 Point-to-point system link, illustrated 5 PORT command (set/display current data port) 50 Power Low-Power Mode versus Remotes Sleep 30 Power (RF) how much can be used 15 Measurement 54 set/display RF forward output (PWR command) 50 Power saving mode (see Sleep Mode) Primary Extension Address (XPRI) 57 Procedures antenna aiming 16 I-4 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C antenna and feedline selection 13 antenna SWR check 16 connecting data equipment to DATA INTERFACE connector 34 connecting PC and radios for network-wide diagnostics 62 enabling sleep mode installation 1115 interference check 17 mounting the transceiver 1112 network-wide diagnostics 62 performance optimization 15 performing network-wide diagnostics 62 programming radio for network-wide diagnostics 62 troubleshooting 5861 Programming radio 4157 as root or node 62 PWR command (set/display RF forward output power) 50 R Radio inoperative (troubleshooting chart) 61 no synchronization with master
(troubleshooting chart) 61 poor performance (troubleshooting chart) 61 Radio Operating Mode (MODE) Command 49, 50 Radio Receive Test Frequency Command (RX) 52 Radio Serial Number Command
(SER) 53 Radio Transmit Test Frequency
(TX) 56 Radio Transmitter Hop Timing
(HOPTIME) 46 Radio Transmitter Power Level (PWR) Command 50 Radios Internal Temperature Command (TEMP) 56 Radio-MODEM Behavior (DEVICE) Command 45 Receive Data Timeout-Timer Command
(RXTOT) 52 Received Signal Strength Indicator Command (RSSI) 51 Remote radio default settings 47 Remote station typical arrangement, illustrated 76 Remote Terminal Unit Simulator Command (RTU) 52 Repeater Operation. See Store-and-Forward (SAF) Restore to Factory Defaults (INIT) 46 Root (radio diagnostics type) 46 RSSI command (display received signal strength) 51 RTU command (enable/disable internal RTU) 52 RX command (set/display test receive frequency) 52 RXD Command 52 RXD Delay Command (RXD) 52 RXTOT command (set/display received data timeout value) 52 S SAF command (store-and-forward) 53 Seamless Mode Emulation 31 Security Code (CODE) Command 43 SER Command 53 Set alarm output sense (ASENSE command) 42 alarm output signal (AMASK command) 42 CTS hold timer (CTSHOLD command) 44 CTS line response timer (CTS command) 44 data interface baud rate (BAUD command) 42 DCE or CTS Key device behavior
(DEVICE command) 45 frequency zone to skip (SKIP command) 54 hoptime (HOPTIME command) 46 network address (ADDR command) 41 owners message (OWM command) 50 owners name (OWN command) 50 radio mode (see MODE command) 49 received data handling mode (BUFF 05-3946A01, Rev. C TransNET OEM Integration Guide I-5 command) 43 received data timeout value (RXTOT command) 52 receiver test frequency (RX command) 52 testing mode (SETUP command) 53 SETUP command (enter testing and setup mode) 53 Setup Radio Test (SETUP) 53 Show Clock-Synchronization Master Network Address (SHOW SYNC) 54 SHOW command (display power output) 54 SHOW CON Command (show virtual connection status) 53 Show Measured RF Transmit Power
(SHOW PWR) 54 SHOW SYNC Command 54 Show Virtual Connection Status Command (SHOW CON) 53 SKIP command (set/display frequency zone to skip) 54 Skip Radio Operating Zones (SKIP) 54 SLEEP command (display/set radios sleep setting) 55 SLEEP command (transceiver sleep ON/OFF) 55 Sleep Mode 27 Spread spectrum, basic principles of 4 SREV Command 55 STAT command (list alarms) 55 Store-and-Forward (SAF) 6, 21, 25, 36, 40, 47, 53, 58 Store-and-Forward Services (SAF) Support Command 53 SWR (Standing Wave Ratio) performance optimization 16 Synchronization qualiers 19, 58 T Tables accessories 6 alarm codes 59 antenna system gain vs. power output setting 18 DATA INTERFACE connector pin descriptions 79 LED status indicators 11, 60 troubleshooting 61 Tail-end link cable wiring for, illustrated 10, 20 illustrated 5 installation 9, 20 Technical specications 6465 TEMP command (display internal temperature) 56 Temperature, display internal (TEMP command) 56 Transceiver connecting to data equipment 34 default settings 47 mounting instructions/dimensions 1112 performance optimization 15 sleep mode 27 Transceiver Sleep (SLEEP) 55 Troubleshooting 5861 performing network-wide diagnostics 62 table 61 Turn Off Radio Transmitter Test Signal
(DKEY) Command 45 Turn On Radio Transmitter Test Signal
(KEY) Command 48 U UNIT Command (unit address) 56 Upstream Repeat Transmission Count Command (RETRY) 51 X XADDR (extended address command) 8, 19, 20, 26, 40, 47, 58 XADDR (extended address) Command 49 XPRI command (display/set extended address) 57 XRSSI command (sets minimum RSSI level to maintain sync. w/non-primary extension radio) 57 Z ZONE CLEAR (clear zone statistics log) 57 ZONE DATA Command (read zone statistics log) 57 Zone, Clear Statistics Log (ZONE CLEAR) 57 Zone, Read Statistics Log (ZONE DATA) 57 I-6 TransNET OEM Integration Guide 05-3946A01, Rev. C IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY... GE MDS products are designed for long life and trouble-free operation. However, this equipment, as with all electronic equipment, may have an occasional component failure. The following information will assist you in the event that servicing becomes necessary. CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Assistance for GE MDS products is available from our Customer Support Team during business hours (8:00 A.M.5:30 P.M. Eastern Time). When calling, please give the complete model number of the equipment, along with a description of the trouble/
symptom(s) that you are experiencing. In many cases, problems can be resolved over the telephone, without the need for returning the unit to the factory. Please use one of the following means for product assistance:
Phone: 585 241-5510 FAX: 585 242-8369 FACTORY SERVICE E-Mail: techsupport@microwavedata.com Web: www.GEmds.com Component level repair of this equipment is not recommended in the field. Many components are installed using surface mount technology, which requires specialized training and equipment for proper servicing. For this reason, the equipment should be returned to the factory for any PC board repairs. The factory is best equipped to diag-
nose, repair and align your radio to its proper operating specifications. If return of the equipment is necessary, you must obtain a Service Request Order (SRO) number. This number helps expedite the repair so that the equipment can be repaired and returned to you as quickly as possible. Please be sure to include the SRO number on the outside of the shipping box, and on any correspondence relating to the repair. No equip-
ment will be accepted for repair without an SRO number. SRO numbers are issued online at www.GEmds.com/support/product/sro/. Your number will be issued immediately after the required information is entered. Please be sure to have the model number(s), serial number(s), detailed reason for return, ship to address, bill to address, and contact name, phone number, and fax number available when requesting an SRO number. A purchase order number or pre-payment will be required for any units that are out of warranty, or for product conversion. If you prefer, you may contact our Product Services department to obtain an SRO number:
Phone Number: 585-241-5540 Fax Number: 585-242-8400 E-mail Address: ProductServicesRochester@ge.com The radio must be properly packed for return to the factory. The original shipping container and packaging materials should be used whenever possible. All factory returns should be addressed to:
GE MDS, LLC Product Services Department
(SRO No. XXXX) 175 Science Parkway Rochester, NY 14620 USA When repairs have been completed, the equipment will be returned to you by the same shipping method used to send it to the factory. Please specify if you wish to make different shipping arrangements. To inquire about an in-process repair, you may contact our Product Services Group using the telephone, Fax, or E-mail information given above. GE MDS, LLC 175 Science Parkway Rochester, NY 14620 General Business: +1 585 242-9600 FAX: +1 585 242-9620 Web: www.GEmds.com
1 2 3 4 | users manual | Users Manual | 1.52 MiB |
Microwave Data Systems Inc. MDS TransNET OEM Transceiver Model EL806 i i e e d d u u G G n n o o i i t t a a r r g e e p t O n I
M n E o O i t a Spread Spectrum Data Transceiver Including Instructions for 03-4053A01 Evaluation Development Kit l l a t s n I MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A APRIL 2003 QUICK START GUIDE The steps below contain the essential information needed to place the OEM trans-
ceiver in service. Because the transceiver is designed for use in other pieces of equipment, these steps assume that prior testing and evaluation have been conducted with the host device. If not, please refer to Section 3.0, Benchtop Setup and Evaluation for proper interface wiring and configuration. 1. Mount the transceiver module using the four holes provided. If possible, select a mounting location that allows viewing the status LEDs and provides ready access to the antenna connector. Use standoff hardware to secure the board to the host device. When mounting the board, use care to align the transceivers 16-pin header connector with the mating pins in the host device. 2. Connect the antenna system to the transceiver Use only with antenna/feedline assemblies that have been expressly tested and approved for such service by Microwave Data Systems Inc. Use an MMCX-type male connector to attach the antenna to the transceiver. For best performance, antennas should be mounted in the clear, with an unobstructed path in the direction of desired transmission/reception. 3. Apply power and observe the LEDs for proper operation. The LED command must be set to ON (LEDS ON). After 16 seconds... The GP lamp should be lit continuously The DCD lamp should be lit continuouslyif synchronization with another unit has been achieved The Remote radio(s) should be transmitting data (TXD) and receiving data
(RXD) with its associated station LED Indicator Descriptions LED Name Description RXD (CR3) Receive Data TXD (CR4) Transmit Data DCD (CR5) Data Carrier Detect GP (CR6) General Purpose Serial receive data activity. Payload data from con-
nected device. Serial transmit data activity. Payload data to con-
nected device. ContinuousRadio is receiving/sending synchro-
nization frames On within 10 seconds of power-up under normal conditions ContinuousPower is applied to the radio; no problems detected Flashing (5 times-per-second)Fault indication. See TROUBLESHOOTING on Page 52 OffRadio is unpowered or in Sleep mode RXD TXD DCD GP CONTENTS 1.0 ABOUT THIS MANUAL..........................................................1 2.0 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION....................................................1 2.1 Transceiver Features .......................................................2 2.2 Model Conguration Codes ............................................2 2.3 Spread Spectrum Transmission ......................................3 2.4 Typical Applications .........................................................3 Multiple Address Systems (MAS) ....................................3 Point-to-Point System ......................................................4 Tail-End Link to an Existing Network ...............................5 Store-and-Forward Repeater ...........................................5 2.5 Transceiver Accessories .................................................6 3.0 BENCHTOP SETUP & EVALUATION....................................7 3.1 Evaluation Development Kit (P/N 03-4053A01) ..............7 Evaluation Board .............................................................8 Connecting the Eval. Board & Transceiver (Figure 8) ......9 3.2 Cable Connections for Benchtop Testing ........................10 Antenna Connection (J200 on the transceiver module)...10 Diagnostic Connection (J4)..............................................11 Data Connector (J5) ........................................................12 DC Power Connector (J3)................................................14 Jumper Block J1 (DC Power Conguration) ....................15 3.3 Initial Power-Up & Conguration .....................................15 Conguration Settings .....................................................16 LED Indicators .................................................................17 4.0 EVALUATION BOARD DOCUMENTATION ...........................18 4.1 Assembly Drawing ..........................................................18 4.2 Parts List .........................................................................18 4.3 Evaluation Board Fuse Replacement .............................20 5.0 TRANSCEIVER MOUNTING .................................................21 MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide i 5.1 Mounting Dimensions ..................................................... 21 5.2 Antennas & Feedlines .................................................... 21 Feedlines......................................................................... 22 6.0 OPTIMIZING PERFORMANCE............................................. 23 6.1 Antenna Aiming .............................................................. 23 6.2 Antenna SWR Check ..................................................... 23 6.3 Data Buffer Setting ......................................................... 23 6.4 Hoptime Setting .............................................................. 23 6.5 Operation at 115200 bps ................................................ 24 6.6 Baud Rate Setting .......................................................... 24 6.7 Radio Interference Checks ............................................. 24 6.8 RF Output Setting ........................................................... 24 7.0 OPERATING PRINCIPLES & SPECIAL CONFIGURATIONS ...................................................................... 25 7.1 How Remotes Acquire Synchronization ......................... 25 7.2 Establishing a Tail-End Link ............................................ 25 7.3 Store & Forward (SAF) Operation with Extension Radios 26 Simple Extended SAF Network....................................... 26 Extended SAF Network................................................... 27 Retransmission and ARQ operation................................ 28 Synchronization in SAF Networks................................... 28 Conguration Parameters for Store-and Forward Services29 7.4 Sleep Mode Operation (Remote units only) ................... 31 Sleep Mode Example ...................................................... 32 8.0 DEALING WITH INTERFERENCE........................................ 32 9.0 PROGRAMMING REFERENCE ........................................... 34 9.1 Programming Methods ................................................... 34 Terminal Interface Mode.................................................. 34 PC-Based Conguration Software .................................. 34 9.2 User Commands ............................................................ 34 Entering Commands ....................................................... 35 9.3 Detailed Command Descriptions .................................... 40 ADDR [165000] ............................................................. 40 AMASK [0000 0000FFFF FFFF] ................................... 41 ii TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A ASENSE [HI/LO]..............................................................41 BAUD [xxxxx abc] ............................................................41 BUFF [ON, OFF]..............................................................41 CODE [NONE, 1255] ...................................................42 CTS [0255].....................................................................42 CTSHOLD [060000].......................................................43 DEVICE [DCE, CTS KEY] ..............................................43 DLINK [xxxxx/ON/OFF]....................................................43 DKEY ...............................................................................44 DTYPE [NODE/ROOT] ....................................................44 FEC [ON, OFF] ................................................................44 HOPTIME [7, 28] .............................................................44 INIT ..................................................................................44 HREV...............................................................................45 KEY..................................................................................45 LEDS [ON, OFF]..............................................................45 MODE [M, R, X] ...............................................................45 OWM [xxxxx]....................................................................45 OWN [xxxxx] ....................................................................45 PORT [RS232, RS485]....................................................45 PWR [2030] ...................................................................46 REPEAT [010]................................................................47 RETRY [010]..................................................................47 RSSI ................................................................................47 RTU [ON, OFF, 0-80] .......................................................48 RX [xxxx]..........................................................................48 RXTOT [NONE, 01440] .................................................48 SAF [ON, OFF] ................................................................48 SETUP.............................................................................48 SER .................................................................................49 SHOW PWR ....................................................................49 SHOW SYNC...................................................................49 SKIP [NONE, 1...8] ..........................................................49 SLEEP [ON, OFF]............................................................50 SREV ...............................................................................50 STAT ................................................................................50 TEMP...............................................................................50 TX [xxxx] ..........................................................................50 UNIT [1000065000] .......................................................50 MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide iii XADDR [031]................................................................. 51 XMAP [00000000-FFFFFFFF] ........................................ 51 XPRI [031]..................................................................... 51 XRSSI [NONE, 40...120] ............................................. 51 ZONE CLEAR ................................................................. 51 ZONE DATA..................................................................... 51 10.0 TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................... 52 10.1 Alarm Codes ................................................................. 53 Checking for AlarmsSTAT command ........................... 53 Major Alarms vs. Minor Alarms ....................................... 53 Alarm Code Denitions ................................................... 53 10.2 LED Indicators .............................................................. 54 10.3 Troubleshooting Chart .................................................. 54 10.4 Network-Wide Remote Diagnostics .............................. 55 11.0 FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 57 11.1 Obtaining new rmware ................................................ 57 Saving a Web-site rmware le to your PC ..................... 57 11.2 Installing rmware in your radio .................................... 57 12.0 Security ............................................................................... 57 13.0 Product Specications ......................................................... 58 13.1 Detailed Pin Descriptions ............................................. 59 14.0 dBm-Watts-Volts Conversion Chart ..................................... 66 To Our Customers We appreciate your patronage. You are our business. We promise to serve and anticipate your needs. We strive to give you solutions that are cost effective, innovative, reliable and of the highest quality possible. We promise to build a relationship that is forthright and ethical, one that builds confidence and trust. Copyright Notice This Installation and Operation Guide and all software described herein are Copyright 2003 by Microwave Data Systems Inc. All rights reserved. Microwave Data Systems Inc. reserves its right to correct any errors and omissions in this manual. iv TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A RF Exposure Notice RF EXPOSURE The radio equipment described in this guide emits radio frequency energy. Although the power level is low, the concentrated energy from a directional antenna may pose All antenna(s) used with this transmitter, whether indoor or a health hazard. outdoor mounted, must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 23 cm (9 inches) from all persons, and must not be co-located or oper-
ating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. In mobile applications (vehicle mounted) the above separation distance must be maintained at all times. More information on RF exposure is available on the Internet at www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins. FCC Part 15 Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. FCC Modular Approval Notice This device is offered as an FCC Part 15 Unlicensed Modular Transmitter. This Modular Trans-
mitter is approved for use only with specific antenna, cable and output power configurations that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer (Microwave Data Systems Inc.). Modifica-
tions to the radio, the antenna system, or power output, that have not been explicitly specified by the manufacturer are not permitted, and may render the radio non-compliant with applicable reg-
ulatory authorities. Refer to Table 7 on Page 24 for more detailed information. This device employs a unique connector at all connections between the module and the antenna, including the cable. Consult MDS for approved antenna/cable assemblies in our product offering. When this device is placed inside an enclosure, a durable label must be affixed to the outside of that enclosure which includes this modules FCC ID Number. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. ISO 9001 Registration Microwave Data Systems adheres to the internationally-accepted ISO 9001 quality system stan-
dard. Manual Revision and Accuracy While every reasonable effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this manual, product improvements may result in minor differences between the manual and the product shipped to you. If you have additional questions or need an exact specification for a product, please contact our Customer Service Team using the information at the back of this guide. In addition, manual updates can often be found on the MDS Web site at www.microwavedata.com. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide v vi TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A 1.0 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual is intended to guide technical personnel in the integration of MDS TransNET OEM transceivers into existing electronic equipment. The OEM transceiver is designed for use inside Remote Terminal Units (RTUs), Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) and other equipment associated with remote data collection, telemetry and control. The manual provides instructions for interface connections, hardware mounting, and programming commands. Following integration of the transceiver, it is recommended that a copy of this manual be retained for future reference by technical personnel. 2.0 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The OEM transceiver, (Figure 1), is a compact, spread spectrum wireless module designed for license-free operation in the 902-928 MHz frequency range. It is contained on one double-sided circuit board with all necessary components and RF shielding included. It need only be protected from direct exposure to the weather and is designed for rugged service in extreme temperature environments. The transceiver has full over-the-air compatibility with standard (non-OEM) TransNET 900 MDS. All transceiver programming is performed via a connected PC terminal. No jumper settings or manual adjustments are used to configure the transceiver for operation. transceivers manufactured by TM Invisible place holder Figure 1. TransNET OEM Transceiver The transceiver employs Digital Signal Processing (DSP) technology for highly reliable data communications, even in the presence of weak or interfering signals. DSP techniques also make it possible to obtain information about the radios operation and troubleshoot problems, often eliminating the need for site visits. Using appropriate software at the master station, diagnostic data can be retrieved for any radio in the system, even while payload data is being transmitted. (See Network-Wide Remote Diagnostics on Page 55.) MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 1 2.1 Transceiver Features The OEM transceiver is designed for easy installation and flexibility in a wide range of wireless applications. Listed below are several key features of the transceiver which are described in more detail later in this guide. 128 frequencies over 902928 MHz, subdivided into eight frequency zones Configurable operating zones to omit frequencies with constant interference 65,000 available network addresses to enhance communications security Network-wide configuration from the master station; eliminates most trips to remote sites Data transparencyensures compatibility with virtually all asynchronous data terminals Peak-hold RSSI, averaged over eight hop cycles Operation at up to 115,200 bps continuous data flow Store-and-Forward repeater operation Data latency typically less than 10 ms Same hardware for master or remote configuration Supports RS/EIA-232 or RS/EIA-485 interfaces (factory configured) Low current consumptionnominal 8 mA in sleep mode. Ideal for solar/battery powered applications. NOTE:
Some features may not be available on all units, based on the options pur-
chased and the regulatory constraints for the region in which the radio will op-
erate. 2.2 Model Configuration Codes The model number code is printed on the radio module, and provides key information about how it was configured when it left the factory. See Figure 2 for an explanation of the model number codes. (Note: This information is subject to change and should not be used for ordering additional products. Your factory representative can assist you with product ordering.) 2 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A OPERATION
(X) Remote/Master RESERVED
(N) None BAND
(9) 900 MHz AGENCY
(N) None
(F) FCC/IC EL806 9 X 0 ENCLOSURE
(0) Modular-no enclosure INTERFACE MODE
(0) EIA/RS-232
(1) EIA/RS-485
(2) TTL W N 00 SPARE
(N) None DIAGNOSTICS
(N) None
(W) Network-wide SAFETY CERT.
(N) N/A RESERVED
(N) None INTERFACE SIGNALING & INPUT POWER OPTIONS
(0) Payload RS-232/485; Diagnostics RS-232; DC Input +3.3 Vdc
(1) Payload TTL; Diagnostic RS-232; DC Input +3.3 Vdc
(2) Payload TTL; Diagnostic TTL; DC Input 3.3 Vdc
(3) Payload RS-232/485; Diagnostic RS-232; DC Input +5-25 Vdc
(4) Payload TTL; Diagnostic RS-232; Input +5-25 Vdc
(5) Payload TTL, Diagnostic TTL; DC Input +5-25 Vdc Figure 2. Model Number Configuration Codes 2.3 Spread Spectrum Transmission The transceiver hops from channel to channel many times per second using a specific hop pattern applied to all radios in the network. A distinct hopping pattern is provided for each of the 65,000 available network addresses, thereby minimizing the chance of interference with other spread spectrum systems. In the USA, and certain other countries, no license is required to install and operate this type of radio device, provided RF power and antenna gain restrictions are observed. In the USA and Canada, a maximum of 36 dBm Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) is allowed. The factory offers a set of approved antennas with special connectors for this radio. Substitutions that would void the compliance of the device are not permitted. 2.4 Typical Applications Multiple Address Systems (MAS) This is the most common application of the transceiver. It consists of a central control station (master) and two or more associated remote units, as shown in Figure 3. This type of network provides communications between a central host computer and remote terminal units (RTUs) or other data collection devices. The operation of the radio system is transparent to the computer equipment. This application provides a practical alternative to traditional
(licensed) MAS radio systems. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 3 RTU/PLC WITH TRANSCEIVER INSTALLED Invisible place holder RTU/PLC WITH TRANSCEIVER INSTALLED RTU/PLC WITH TRANSCEIVER INSTALLED RTU/PLC WITH TRANSCEIVER INSTALLED MASTER SITE DATA TRANSCEIVER Figure 3. Typical MAS Network Point-to-Point System A point-to-point configuration (Figure 4) is a simple arrangement consisting of just two radiosa master and a remote. This provides a half-duplex communications link for the transfer of data between two locations. Invisible place holder Master Site DATA TRANSCEIVER Remote Site DATA TRANSCEIVER Host System Figure 4. Typical Point-to-Point Link 4 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Tail-End Link to an Existing Network A tail-end link is often used to extend the range of a traditional (licensed) MAS system without adding another licensed radio. This might be required if an outlying site is blocked from the MAS master station by a natural or man-made obstruction. In this arrangement, a spread spectrum transceiver links the outlying remote site into the rest of the system by sending data from that site to an associated transceiver installed at one of the licensed remote sitesusually the one closest to the outlying facility. (See Figure 5). As the data from the outlying site is received at the associated transceiver, it is transferred to the co-located licensed radio (via a data crossover cable) and is transmitted to the MAS master station over the licensed channel. Additional details for tail-end links are given in Section 7.2 (Page 25). Invisible place holder Master Station ACTIVE ACTIVE STBY STBY ALARM ALARM RX ALR TX ALR RX ALR TX ALR LINE LINE ENTER ESCAPE REPEATER STATION Remote Radio DATA TRANSCEIVER Null-Modem Cable S P R E A T O O D S P U TLYIN E C T R U G SITE M LIN K Remote Radio Remote Radio RTU RTU RTU DATA TRANSCEIVER OUTLYING REMOTE SITE MAS SYSTEM (LICENSED OR UNLICENSED) LICENSE-FREE SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEM Figure 5. Typical Tail-End Link Arrangement Store-and-Forward Repeater Similar to a Tail-End Link, Store-and-Forward (SAF) offers a way to physically extend the range of a network, but in a simplified and economical manner. SAF operates by storing up the data received from one site, and then retransmitting it a short time later. Figure 6 shows a typical SAF repeater arrangement. SAF operates by dividing a network into a vertical hierarchy of two or more sub-networks. Extension radios (designated as
) serve as single-radio repeaters that link adjacent sub-networks, and move data from one sub-network to the next. Additional information on SAF mode is provided in Store & Forward (SAF) Operation with Extension Radios on Page 26. MODE X MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 5 Invisible place holder STORE & FORWARD REPEATER STATION Programmed as MODE M DATA TRANSCEIVER RTU DATA TRANSCEIVER Programmed as MODE X S P R E A T O O D S P U TLYIN E C T R U G SITE M LIN K Programmed as Programmed as MODE R DATA TRANSCEIVER MODE R DATA TRANSCEIVER RTU RTU Programmed as MODE R DATA TRANSCEIVER OUTLYING REMOTE SITE RTU Figure 6. Store-and-Forward Repeater Network 2.5 Transceiver Accessories One or more of the accessories listed in Table 1 may be used with the OEM transceiver. Contact your factory representative for availability and ordering details. Table 1. OEM Transceiver Accessories Accessory Description AC Power Adapt-
er Small power supply designed for continuous op-
eration of the transceiver. UL approved. Input:
120/220; Output: 12 Vdc. TransNET Sup-
port Package CD Programming, diagnostic and support files on a CD ROM. Includes electronic copy of this guide
(PDF format). Part No. 01-3862A02 03-2708A01 TNC Male-to-N Male Coax Cable Assy. TNC Male-to-N Male Coax Cable Assy. TNC male-to-N Female Adapter 3 ft/1 meter shielded antenna cable 97-1677A159 6 ft/1.8 meter shielded antenna cable 97-1677A160 One-piece RF adaptor plug 97-1677A161 RJ-11-to-DB9 Adapter Cable Short cable assembly that converts RJ-11 to DB9 connector type Fuse (for Evalua-
tion Board) 2A SMF Slo-Blo (plugs into FH1 on Evaluation Board) InSite Diagnostic Software PC-based diagnostic software for MDS radios. Supplied on CD. Omnidirectional Antennas Rugged antennas suitable for use at Master stations. 03-3246A01 29-1784A03 03-3533A01 Various 6 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Table 1. OEM Transceiver Accessories
(Continued) Yagi Antenna Whip Antennas Bandpass Filter Evaluation Devel-
opment Kit Rugged directional antennas suitable for use at Remote stations. Short, flexible antennas suitable for short-range applications. Available with and without coaxial feedlines. Antenna system filter to aid in eliminating inter-
ference from high power transmitters, such as those used in paging systems. Kit containing two OEM Transceiver modules, whip antennas, two Evaluation Boards, support software on CD, cables, power supplies and oth-
er accessories needed to operate the transceiv-
er in a benchtop setting. Various Various 20-2822A01 32-4051A01 3.0 BENCHTOP SETUP & EVALUATION As an Integrator, your first task is to verify that the OEM module will function as intended with the host equipment. This section describes how to test the unit for operation with host devices such as RTUs, PLCs and similar gear. It covers the steps for making interface connections, powering up the transceiver, and setting configuration parameters using a connected PC. Evaluation of the module is best performed in a controlled environment, such as a shop or lab facility where you can readily test various hardware and programming configurations and observe the effects of these changes before final installation. Once you are satisfied that the transceiver module operates properly on the bench, you can plan the installation of the module inside the host device and be assured of proper operation in the field. 3.1 Evaluation Development Kit (P/N 03-4053A01) The Evaluation Development Kit is designed to assist integrators who will be working with the transceiver in a benchtop setting. The kit contains the following:
Two OEM Transceiver modules (configured for TTL, or RS-232/485 operation, as requested) Two Evaluation Development boards (P/N 03-4051A01) Interface Cables Two whip antennas Two 12 Vdc power supplies TransNET Support CD containing software for programming &
diagnostics MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 7 Evaluation Board A key part of the Evaluation Development Kit is the Evaluation Board shown in Figure 7. It contains a 16-pin header connector (J2) that mates with female connector J3 the OEM transceiver board. It carries all signals (except RF) onto the Evaluation Board. Table 2 lists the basic pin functions of J2. For more detailed pinout information, including the differences between TTL and RS-232/485 configured radios, refer to Section 13.1 on Page 59. The Evaluation Board provides convenient connection points for diagnostics, payload data, and DC power. Each of these connectors are discussed in this section. The board also includes a series of test probe points to the left of J2. These may be used for monitoring logic signal activity with a multimeter or oscilloscope. The probe points are identified by printed markings on the board. The transceiver boards RF/Antenna connection is Evaluation Board by the 16-pin header. The antenna connection is always made at J200 on the transceiver module using a male MMCX-type connector. brought onto the not STANDOFF SPACERS (4) 16-PIN HEADER TEST PROBE POINTS DC POWER
(5-25 VDC) DIAGNOSTIC COMMUNICATIONS
(RJ-11) JUMPER BLOCK J1 DATA CONNECTOR
(DB-9) Figure 7. OEM Evaluation Board (P/N 03-4051A01) Table 2. Basic Pin Functions of J2 (16-Pin Header Connector) Pin No. Pin Function 1 2 3 4 Ground Diagnostic TXD Alarm Condition Diagnostic RXD 8 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Table 2. Basic Pin Functions of J2 (16-Pin Header Connector) 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DC Input Sleep Mode Input Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Power Supply Shutdown Control ReservedDo not connect. Transmitted Payload Data (TXD) DC Input Request to Send (RTS) ReservedDo not connect. Received Payload Data (RXD) Ground Clear to Send (CTS) Connecting the Evaluation Board & Transceiver (Figure 8) To connect the Evaluation Board to the radio, carefully align the pins of the 16-pin header with J3 on the transceiver module and press down firmly. The radio PC board should seat solidly on the four standoff spacers. Use nuts to secure the board to the standoffs. Invisible place holder Figure 8. Connecting the Evaluation Board and Transceiver Together CAUTION:
Take care to avoid short-circuiting the underside of the Evaluation PC board. The bottom of the board is insulated, and contact with metallic objects on the work surface could cause damage to the board or connect-
ed equipment. not MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 9 3.2 Cable Connections for Benchtop Testing There are four basic requirements for operating the transceiver and evaluation board in a benchtop test environment. They are:
Adequate and stable primary power A proper antenna system or RF load (50 Ohms) The correct interface wiring between the transceiver and the connected DTE device (RTU, PLC, etc.) A connected PC terminal to read/set transceiver parameters. Figure 9 shows a typical setup for bench testing an OEM Transceiver. Two such setups will be required if you intend to establish over-the-air communications with another OEM transceiver. Invisible place holder ANTENNA
(OR 50-OHM RF LOAD) OEM Transceiver and Evaluation Board Power Supply 13.6 VDC @
500 mA (min.) DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT PC TERMINAL Figure 9. Typical Test Setup Antenna Connection (J200 on the transceiver module) The Antenna connector is located at the upper left corner of the transceiver module and is a female MMCX-type coaxial connector. Connect an antenna or other suitable RF load to this connector. Only approved antenna/cable assemblies may be used with the radio 10 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Do not apply DC power to the transceiver without rst attaching a proper RF load, or the transceiver may be damaged. CAUTION POSSIBLE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE Diagnostic Connection (J4) J4 is an RJ-11-6 modular connector used to connect the evaluation board/transceiver to a PC terminal for programming and interrogation. An RJ-11 to DB-9 Adapter Cable (Part No. 03-3246A01) is required for this connection. If desired, an cable may be constructed for this purpose as shown in Figure 10. Only Pins 4, 5, and 6 of the RJ-11 connector should be used. Pins 1, 2, and 3 are reserved for factory test purposes.) The data parameters of the diagnostics port are as follows: 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. It automatically configures itself to function at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bps, as required. Invisible place holder RJ-11 PLUG
(TO TRANSCEIVER) DB-9 FEMALE
(TO COMPUTER) 4 5 6 TXD RXD GND 1 6 RJ-11 PIN LAYOUT RXD TXD GND 2 3 5 Figure 10. RJ-11 to DB-9 Diagnostic CableWiring Details
(A pre-constructed cable is also available, Part No. 03-3246A01) Diagnostic Communication Modes Two methods may be used to communicate with the radios diagnostic port:
The PC is used in its basic terminal emulation Terminal Interface mode, (i.e., HyperTerminal session) and commands are issued as simple text strings. Radio Configuration Software Proprietary software from MDS that runs under the Windows operating system. It provides a graphical user interface with point and click functionality. The program is included on the CD shipped with every radio order. Both of these control methods are described in more detail in the section titled PROGRAMMING REFERENCE on Page 34. This section also includes a chart listing all commands for the OEM transceiver. TransNET Support Package MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 11 Data Connector (J5) J5 on the Evaluation Board (Figure 11) is the data interface for the transceiver. It is used to connect the transceiver to an external DTE terminal that supports the EIA/RS-232 or EIA/RS-485 format, depending on how the radio hardware was configured at the factory. The data connector supports interface data rates of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bps (asynchronous only). The connector mates with a standard DB-9 plug available from many electronics parts suppliers. Data Wiring Connections The connections made to J5 will depend on the requirements of the DTE device being used with the transceiver, and the operating functions that you require. Only the required pins for the application should be used. Do not use a straight through computer type cable that is wired pin-for-pin. Typical RS/EIA-232 applications require the use of Pin 2 (receive dataRXD) and Pin 3 (transmit dataTXD). Additionally, some systems may require the use of Pin 7 (Request-to-sendRTS). If hardware flow control is desired, Pin 7 (RTS) and Pin 8 (CTS) may also need connection. Table 3 gives pin details for radios configured for RS/EIA-232 service. Table 4 gives details for radios configured for RS/EIA-485 service. NOTE:
from the Evaluation Board. Radios equipped with a payload TTL interface are presented as RS-232 mode 5 1 9 6 Figure 11
. DATA Connector (DB-9F) As viewed from outside the device 12 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Pin DescriptionsRS/EIA-232 Mode Table 3 lists the operate in RS/EIA-232 mode. DATA connector pin functions for radios configured to Table 3. J5 DATA Connector PinoutsRS/EIA-232 Pin Number Input/
Output Pin Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT IN OUT Data Carrier Detect (DCD) chronization has been achieved. A low indicates hopping syn-
Received Data (RXD) the connected device. Supplies received payload data to Transmitted Data (TXD) connected device. Accepts payload data from the Sleep Mode Input A ground on this pin turns off most cir-
cuits in a remote radio. This allows for greatly reduced pow-
er consumption, yet preserves the radios ability to be brought quickly back on line. See Sleep Mode Operation
(Remote units only) on Page 31 for details. Ground Connects to ground (negative supply potential). Alarm condition indicates an alarm. (See ASENSE [HI/LO] command for more information.) A low indicates normal operation. A high Request to Send (RTS) the programmed CTS delay time has elapsed (DCE). A high causes CTS to follow after Clear to Send (CTS) CTS delay time has elapsed (DCE), or keys an attached ra-
dio when RF data arrives (CTS KEY). Goes high after the programmed
ReservedDo not connect. Pin DescriptionsRS/EIA-422/485 Mode Table 4 on the following page lists the connector pin functions for radios configured to operate in RS/EIA-422/485 mode. See Figure 12 for wiring schemes. DATA NOTE:
for RS/EIA-485 mode. Radios equipped with a payload RS-232/485 interface can select PORT RS485 MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 13 Table 4. DATA connector pin descriptionsRS/EIA-485 Mode Pin Number Input/
Output Pin Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OUT IN IN IN
IN OUT
ReservedDo not connect. TXD+/TXA (Received Data +) Non-inverting driver output. RXD+/RXA (Transmitted Data +) input. Non-inverting receiver Sleep Mode Input A ground on this pin turns off most cir-
cuits in a remote radio. This allows for greatly reduced power consumption, yet preserves the radios ability to be brought quickly back on line. See Sleep Mode Operation (Remote units only) on Page 31 for details. Ground Connects to ground (negative supply potential). ReservedDo not connect. RXD/RXB (Transmitted Data ) Inverting receiver input. TXD/TXB (Received Data ) Inverting driver output. ReservedDo not connect. Table 4 Notes:
RXD+/RXA and RXD/RXB are data sent into the radio to be transmitted out RXD+/RXA is positive with respect to RXD/RXB when the line input is a 0 TXD+/TXA and TXD/TXB are data received by the radio and sent to the connected device TXD+/TXA is positive with respect to TXD/TXB when the line output is a 0 Invisible place holder 4-WIRE CONNECTIONS 2-WIRE CONNECTIONS R O T C E N N O C A T A D 2 3 7 8 RXD +
RXD TXD +
TXD R O T C E N N O C A T A D 2 3 7 8 RXD+/TXD+
RXD/TXD
. Figure 12 EIA-422/485 Wiring Schemes
(Left: EIA-422, Right: EIA-485) DC Power Connector (J3) This connector accepts 12 Vdc operating power for the transceiver. A wall-style AC adapter (Part No. 01-3862A02) is recommended for this service. DC connection is made with a 2-pin polarized plug, MDS Part No. 73-1194A39. Be sure to observe proper polarity. positive (+) and the right is negative (-) The left terminal is
. (See Figure 13). 14 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A CAUTION POSSIBLE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE The transceiver must be used only with negative-ground systems. Make certain that the polarity of the power source is correct. Invisible place holder Lead Binding Screws (2) Wire Ports (2)
(Polarity: Left +, Right ) Retaining Screws (2) Figure 13. DC Power Connector (P/N 73-1194A39) NOTE:
Although the power connector used on the OEM Evaluation Board resembles those used by some earlier MDS transceivers, such as the MDS 9810 and x710 family, the connectors are equal and the use of the wrong plug will provide unreliable connections. Only the power connector shown in Figure 13 with screw terminals and two retainer screws should be used with the OEM Evaluation Board. not Jumper Block J1 (DC Power Configuration) Jumper J1 does not normally require any change by the user. used to configure the board for the proper voltage level applied to the transceiver module. jumper plugs are normally installed on J1. The plug connecting Pins 3 Both and 4 may be temporarily removed to insert an ammeter in series with the DC power line going to the transceiver. This provides a convenient way to measure the transceivers current draw during bench testing. The jumper is Initial Power-Up & Configuration 3.3 When all of the cable connections described in Section 3.2 have been made, the transceiver is ready for initial power-up. Operation begins as soon as power is applied, and there are no manual adjustments or settings required. To place the transceiver into operation:
1. Ensure that all cable connections are properly wired and secure. Verify that no metallic objects are touching the underside of the evaluation board which might cause a short-circuit. 2. Apply DC power. The GP should light continuously. indicator (CR6) on the transceiver board MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 15 3. Using a connected PC terminal, congure the unit with the proper mode
(master or remote), network address and data parameters. See Configuration Settings below for programming details. 4. Observe the transceivers LED indicators for proper operation. Table 5 on Page 17 shows the functions and normal indications of the LEDs. 5. Verify that the transceiver is transmitting and receiving data (TXD, RXD) in response to the master station and/or connected terminal device. Configuration Settings This section explains how to set the essential operating parameters of the transceiver. For more information on connecting a PC terminal and preparing it for use, refer to Section see PROGRAMMING REFERENCE on Page 34. The three essential settings for the transceiver are as follows:
Master, Remote, or Extension Mode Network Address Data Interface Parameters a unique number from 165000 bps, data bits, parity, stop bits Follow these steps to program the transceiver:
1. Set the Mode using the MODE M
(Master), MODE R (Remote), or MODE X
(Extension) command. (Note: There can be only one master radio in a system.) For Extension (SAF) radios only: If any MODE X radios are used in the network, SAF must be turned on at the Master station. The MODE X radio must be programmed with an Extended Address (XADDR). Units that need to hear the MODE X radio must be programmed with an appropriate XPRI and/or XMAP value. (See Simple Extended SAF Network on Page 26 for more information.) 2. Set a unique Network Address (165000) using ADDR command. Each radio in the system must have the same network address. Tip: Use the last four digits of the master stations serial number to help avoid conicts with other users. 3. Set the baud rate/data interface parameters. Default setting is 9600 bps, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit. If changes are required, use the BAUD xxxxx abc command where xxxxx equals the data speed (1200115200 bps) and abc equals the communication parameters as follows:
a = Data bits (7 or 8) b = Parity (N for None, O for Odd, E for Even) c = Stop bits (1 or 2) NOTE: 7N1, 8E2 and 8O2 are invalid interface parameters. 16 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Configuring Multiple Remote Units In most installations, the Remote radios will be programmed with virtually the same set of parameters. This process can be streamlined by testing key pieces of equipmentsuch as the Master, Remote, and any Extensionson a benchtop setup prior to installation. This allows you to test various configurations in a controlled environment. Once the evaluation network is working satisfactorily, you can save the configuration of each unit in a data file on your PCs hard drive through the use of TransNET Configuration Software. You can then open the Remote configuration file and install it in the next Remote radio. The software prevents you from overwriting unit or other mode-specific parameters. LED Indicators The LED indicators are located to the right of the transceivers shield cover
(near J3) and show important information about status of the module. The functions of LEDs are explained in Table 5 below. NOTE: For the LEDs to function, they must be enabled using the LEDS ON command. Within 16 seconds of power-up, the following indications will be seen if the unit has been properly configured and is communicating with another transceiver:
GP lamp lit continuously DCD lamp lit continuously (if unit is synchronized with another station) Remote radio(s) transmitting data (TXD) and receiving data (RXD) with another station. Table 5. LED indicator descriptions LED Name Description RXD (CR3) Receive Data TXD (CR4) Transmit Data DCD (CR5) Data Carrier Detect GP (CR6) General Purpose Serial receive data activity. Payload data from con-
nected device. Serial transmit data activity. Payload data to con-
nected device. ContinuousRadio is receiving/sending synchro-
nization frames On within 10 seconds of power-up under normal conditions ContinuousPower is applied to the radio; no problems detected Flashing (5 times-per-second)Fault indication. See TROUBLESHOOTING on Page 52 OffRadio is unpowered or in Sleep mode RXD TXD DCD GP MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 17 4.0 EVALUATION BOARD DOCUMENTATION This section contains an assembly drawing and parts list for the OEM Evaluation Board. Also, a foldout schematic diagram of the Board is included at the back of this manual. This documentation is provided to assist integrators who need to create compatible interface circuitry between the OEM transceiver and host equipment. NOTE: The foldout schematic may also be accessed from the TransNET Support Package CD, or from our website at: www.microwavedata.com. 4.1 Assembly Drawing Invisible place holder C15 C12
L1 U2 C8
C30 o 1 C13 C14 R10 CR2 C16 R13 R14 R11 C NA A CR1 CR3 FH1 1 J3 16 15 J2 C21 J1 2 1 C19 o U3 C17 C18 C20 C31 C6 C7 1 6 J4 2 1 M R A L A GND P E E L S DIAG_TXD DIAG_RXD R W P _ G E R N U R W P _ G E R SHUTDN DCD LED RXD K3 CTS GND RTS TXD K2 K1 CR6
C R15 CR5 8 R C24 EQ2 B R9 5 C26
C23 C R12 R6 1U5 R5 Q1 E B R7 R3 CR4 1 5 U4 R4
C22 C25 C2 C1 o 28 C4 U1 C3 C5 1 1 C29C C10 5 9 J5 C9 1 6 Figure 14. Evaluation Board Assembly Diagram 4.2 Parts List Table 6 lists the electronic components used on the Evaluation Board. Table 6. OEM Evaluation Board Parts List Ref. Desig. Part Description CR1 DIODE, SOT23 SMALL SIG 914 5D CR4 CR5 CR6 RECTIFIER, 30V B13 CR2 CR3 Q1 Q2 DIODE, SCHOTTKY POWER, SMT, SNGL, UPS840 TRANSISTOR, SOT23 NPN 6429 M1LR 18 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Table 6. OEM Evaluation Board Parts List (Continued) U4 U5 IC, LINEAR SC70-5 COMPARATOR SNGLE LMV33 U1 U3 U2 IC, IN'FACE SSOP28 RS-232 TXVR SP3238E IC, IN'FCE 20PIN TSSOP DRIVER SP3222 IC, SWITCHING REG'R ADJ.4.5A LT1374HVIR K1 K2 K3 RELAY, DPDT R10 RESISTOR, CHIP 0603 1/16W 5% 2.2K R4 R5 R13 R14 RESISTOR, CHIP 0603 1/10W 1% 10K R12 R7 R9 R11 R3 R15 R8 R6 C12 C6 C7 C9 C10 C11 C29 C31 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C8 C13 C14 C15 C16 L1 J1 RESISTOR, CHIP O603 1/10W 1% 100K RESISTOR, CHIP 0603 1/10W 1% 1.5K RESISTOR, CHIP O603 1/10W 1% 1.82K RESISTOR, CHIP 0603 1/10W 1% 22.6K RESISTOR, CHIP O603 1/10W 1% 31.6K RESISTOR, CHIP 0603 1/10W 1% 470 OHM RESISTOR, CHIP O603 1/10W 1% 6.81K CAP, TANT 7343 20% 10V 100uf CAP, CHIP 0603 50V NPO 5% 100pf CAP, CHIP 0603 X7R 10% 0.1uF CAP, CHIP 0603 X7R 10% 470 pf CAP, CHIP 0603 X7R 10% 4700pF Capacitor, Low ESR Chip Ceramic, 1210 22uF Capacitor, Low ESR Chip Ceramic, 1210 4.7 INDUCTOR, SWITCHING, 20%, 10uH CONN, HEADER, .100 DUAL STR 4-PIN P/O J1 1-2, P/O J1 3-4 CONN, JUMPER FH1 FUSE HOLDER, PCB SMT W/2A SLO-BLO FUSE MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 19 Table 6. OEM Evaluation Board Parts List (Continued) J2 J3 J4 J5 CONN, HEADER, PC MOUNT .078, DUAL, 16 PIN Samtec TW Series, Part No: ASP 103812-01
(Mates with J3 on the OEM radio transceiver) CONN, TERM STRIP, 5MM PCB CONN, TELE JACK 6POS 6CON RT A SMT W/F CONN, D-SUB, PCB RCPT 90 DEGREE, 9 PIN 4.3 Evaluation Board Fuse Replacement The Evaluation Board is protected by a 2 ampere fuse. The fuse can be blown by an over-current condition caused by an internal failure or over-voltage. Follow the procedure below to remove and replace the fuse:
1. Disconnect the primary power cable and all other connections to the Evaluation Board. 2. Locate the fuse holder assembly, FH1, behind the green power connector, J3. 3. Loosen the fuse from the holder using a very small screwdriver, then use a small pair of needle-nose pliers to pull the fuse straight up and out of the holder. 4. Use an ohmmeter or other continuity tester to verify that the fuse is open. 5. Install a new fuse in the holder. Replacement fuse information: Littelfuse
#0454002; 452 Series, 2 Amp SMF Slo-Blo fuse (MDS Part No. 29-1784A03). 20 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A 5.0 TRANSCEIVER MOUNTING This section provides details for mounting the OEM transceiver in a host device. The module need only be protected from direct exposure to the weather. No additional RF shielding is required. 5.1 Mounting Dimensions Figure 15 shows the dimensions of the transceiver board and its mounting holes. If possible, choose a mounting location that provides an unobstructed view of the radios LED status indicators when viewing the board from outside the host device. Mount the transceiver module to a stable surface using the four mounting holes at the corners of the PC board. Standoff spacers should be used to maintain adequate clearance between the bottom of the circuit board and the mounting surface. (Fasteners/anchors are not normally supplied.) 1.81
(46 mm) 3.45
(87.5 mm) w p V ie o T 3.11
(7.9 cm) Side View 1.49
(3.8 cm) 0.63
(16 mm) Figure 15. Transceiver Mounting Dimensions 5.2 Antennas & Feedlines A number of omnidirectional and directional antennas are available for use with the radio. Contact your factory representative for specific recommendations on antenna types and hardware sources. In general, an omnidirectional antenna (Figure 16) is used at master station sites in order to provide equal coverage to all of the remote units. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 21 At remote sites and in many point-to-point systems, a directional Yagi antenna (Figure 17) is generally recommended to minimize interference to and from other users and to maximize range. For systems operating in a very short range environment, small, flexible whip antennas may also be supplied. Such antennas are available for direct connection to the transceiver module, or for exterior mounting with various lengths of feedline. Figure 16. Omnidirectional Antenna
(shown mounted to mast) Invisible place holder Figure 17. Typical Yagi Antenna (shown mounted to mast) Feedlines The feedline supplied with the antenna was carefully selected to minimize RF loss and ensure regulatory compliance with the antenna being used. Do not make substitutions or change the lengths of the antenna system feedline. If you require a different length of feedline for your installation, contact your factory representative for assistance. NOTE: Strong fields near the antenna can interfere with the operation of the low level RTU circuits and change the reported values of the data being monitored. If in-
terference is experienced, it may be necessary to re-orient the antenna with re-
spect to the radio, RTU, sensors or other components of the system. 22 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A 6.0 OPTIMIZING PERFORMANCE After the basic operation of the radio has been checked, you may wish to optimize its performance using some of the suggestions given here. The effectiveness of these techniques will vary with the design of your system and the format of the data being sent. Complete instructions for using the commands referenced in this manual are provided in PROGRAMMING REFERENCE on Page 34. 6.1 Antenna Aiming For optimum performance of directional antennas (yagis), they must be accurately aimed in the direction of desired transmission. The easiest way to do this is to point the antenna in the approximate direction, then use the remote radios RSSI command (Received Signal Strength Indicator) to further refine the heading for maximum received signal strength. In an MAS system, RSSI readings are only meaningful when initiated from a remote station. This is because the master station typically receives signals from several remote sites, and the RSSI would be continually changing as the master receives from each remote in turn. 6.2 Antenna SWR Check It is necessary to briefly key the transmitter for this check by placing the radio in the SETUP mode (Page 48) and using the KEY command. (To unkey the radio, enter DKEY; to disable the SETUP mode and return the radio to normal operation, enter Q or QUIT.) The SWR of the antenna system should be checked before the radio is put into regular service. For accurate readings, a wattmeter suited for 1000 MHz is required. One unit meeting this criteria is the Bird Model 43 directional wattmeter with a 5J element installed. The reflected power should be less than 10% of the forward power (2:1 SWR). Higher readings usually indicate problems with the antenna, feedline or coaxial connectors. 6.3 Data Buffer Setting The default setting for the data buffer is OFF. This allows the radio to operate with the lowest possible latency and improves channel efficiency. MODBUS and its derivatives are the only protocols that should require the buffer to be turned on. See BUFF [ON, OFF] on Page 41 for details. 6.4 Hoptime Setting The default hop-time setting is 7 (7 ms). An alternate setting of 28 is used to increase throughput, but at the cost of increased latency. A detailed explanation of the HOPTIME command can be found on Page 44. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 23 6.5 Operation at 115200 bps Burst throughput at 115200 bps is supported at all settings. The radio will always buffer at least 500 characters. Sustained throughput at 115200bps is only possible when the data path is nearly error free and the operating settings have been properly selected. For sustained operation at 115200 bps, use the following settings: SAF OFF, FEC OFF, REPEAT 0, RETRY 0, HOPTIME 28. 6.6 Baud Rate Setting The default baud rate setting is 19200 bps to accommodate most systems. If your system will use a different data rate, you should change the radios data interface speed using the BAUD xxxxx abc command (Page 41). It should be set to the highest speed that can be sent by the data equipment in the system.
(The transceiver supports 1200 to 115200 bps.) 6.7 Radio Interference Checks The radio operates in eight frequency zones. If interference is found in one or more of these zones, the SKIP command (Page 49) can be used to omit them from the hop pattern. You should also review 8.0 DEALING WITH INTERFERENCE, when interference problems are encountered. 6.8 RF Output Setting OEM Transceivers are shipped from the factory with a compliant power setting for the antenna system to be used. This setting limits the maximum effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) from the antenna to +36 dBm. For compliance with FCC and Industry Canada rules, the power level must be adjusted in accordance with Table 7 below. NOTE: In some regions, the maximum allowable RF output may differ from those stat-
ed above. Be sure to check for and comply with the requirements for your area before placing the transceiver in service. Table 7. Power Setting vs. Antenna System Gain Required to maintain FCC/IC maximum +36 dBm EIRP Antenna
(Model No.) Gain
(dBi) Power Setting
(dBm) Max. Power
(dBm) Minimum Length of Feedline Cable 1/2 Wave Whip Dipole (Z1527) Omni-directional Base Station
(Z1526) 2.1 7.1 Yagi Directional
(Z1523A, B, or C) 8.1 30 29 28 30 29 28 18-inch/0.46 meter LMR 100A cable assembly 10 feet/3.05 meters of RG-213 cable with 18-inch/0.46 meter LMR 100A cable assembly 10 feet/3.05 meters of LMR 400 cable with 18-inch/0.46 meter LMR 100A cable assembly 24 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A 7.0 OPERATING PRINCIPLES & SPECIAL CONFIGURATIONS 7.1 How Remotes Acquire Synchronization Remotes acquire synchronization and configuration information via SYNC messages sent from the Master (the MODE M unit) or from any valid Extension (MODE X unit). The Master will always transmit SYNC messages. An Extension will only start sending SYNC messages after synchronization is achieved with its Master. The ability to synchronize to a given radio is further qualified by the senders Extended Address (XADDR) and by receivers Synchronization Qualifiers
(XMAP, XPRI, and XRSSI). When a primary is specified (XPRI is 0...31), a radio will always attempt to find the primary first. If 30 seconds elapses and the primary is not found, then the radio will attempt to synchronize with any non-primary radio in the XMAP list. Once every 30 minutes, if a primary is defined, the radio will check its synchronization source. If the radio is synchronized to a unit other than the primary, then the current RSSI value is compared to the XRSSI value. If RSSI is less than XRSSI (or if XRSSI is NONE) the radio will force a loss-of-synchronization, and hunt for the primary again (as described in the previous paragraph). By default, Extensions (and the Master) begin with XADDR 0. Synchronization qualifiers are set to XMAP 0, XPRI 0, and XRSSI NONE, respectively. This default configuration allows any radio to hear the Master. When an Extension is added, the extended address of the Extension must be set to a unique value. All remotes that need to hear that extension can specify this either by designating the extension as the primary (XPRI), or by including it in their list of valid synchronization sources (XMAP). 7.2 Establishing a Tail-End Link A tail-end link can be used to bring an outlying remote site into the rest of an MAS network. Figure 5 on Page 5 shows a diagram of this type of system. A tail-end link is established by connecting an OEM transceiver back-to-back with another unit such as a licensed MDS x710 Series transceiver. The wiring connections between the two radios must be made as shown in Figure 18. In addition, the DEVICE CTS KEY command must be asserted at the OEM radio. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 25 r e v i s e i r e S 0 1 7 x S D M e c s n a r T e t o m e R
) e n i l y e k g n i r i u q e r i e c v e d r o
DCE DB-25 RXD TXD GND RTS 3 2 7 4 DCE 16-pin header (J3) 10 14 5 16 TXD RXD GND CTS If required. M E O T E N s n a r T
) i r e v e c s n a r T e t o m e R Y E K S T C E C V E D I
Figure 18. Data Crossover Cable for Tail-End Links 7.3 Store & Forward (SAF) Operation with Extension Radios The Store-and-Forward (SAF) capability allows individual radios to act as data repeaters. SAF operates by dividing a network into a vertical hierarchy of two or more sub-networks. (See Figure 6 on Page 6.) Adjacent sub-networks are connected via Extension radios operating in MODE X which move data from one sub-network to the next one. The Store-and-Forward implementation adheres to the general polling principles used in most multiple-address systems (MAS). Polls originate from the Master station, broadcast to all radios within the network, and travel hierarchically downward. All Remotes will hear the same message, but only one Remote will respond. Messages within a hierarchy only travel in one direction at a time. Using SAF will cut the overall data throughput in half, however, multiple networks can be inter-connected with no additional loss in network throughput. Simple Extended SAF Network Figure 19 depicts a two-level network utilizing a single Master (M) and an Extension (X) radio. In this network, messages directed to Remotes in the K sub-network, will be relayed through Extension radio Xj,k to the K-Remotes. Any response from a Remote in sub-network K will pass back through Extension radio Xj,k to the Master Mj. Radios in sub-network J operate on the same set of frequencies and sub-network K but with a different radio-frequency hopping pattern. 26 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Invisible place holder M J Sub-Network J R J R J X J,K R J RK RK R K Sub-Network K Figure 19. Simple Extended SAF Network Networks: J and K In the SAF operation, the Extension radios are set to MODE X
(Details page 45) and operate with a dual personality50% of the time they serve as a Remote station and 50% of the time as a Master for sub-network Remotes. Extended SAF Network Below is an example of a multilevel network utilizing two repeatersXJ,K and XK,L. The example demonstrates the extensibility of the network. In this case, messages directed to Remotes in the sub-network L will be relayed through Extension radios XJ,K and XK,L. As in the previous example, the Extension radios will split their operating time equally between their Master and Remote personalities. This multi-layered network can be extended indefinitely without degrading system throughput beyond that initially incurred by placing the network in the SAF mode. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 27 Invisible place holder M J Sub-Network J R J R J X J,K R J Sub-Network K X K,L RK R K R L R L R L Sub-Network L Figure 20. Extended SAF Network Networks: J, K, L Retransmission and ARQ operation Functionally, the sub-network side of an Extension behaves like a corresponding connection between a master and a remote. When an Extension is using its master personality it sends acknowledgments and performs unconditional retransmissions based on its REPEAT count. When an Extension is using its Remote personality, acknowledgments are processed and retransmissions occur as needed, up to the number of times specified by the RETRY count value. If new data arrivesfrom a new sourceprior to completion of retransmissions, then this is considered a violation of the polling model protocol. The new data takes precedence over the old data and the old data is lost. In such a situation, new data is likely to be corrupt as it will have some old data mixed in with it. Synchronization in SAF Networks The Master controls the synchronization for a given network for all modes. Setting the Master to SAF ON broadcasts a command from the Master to all radio units in the associated network either directly or through an Extension radio. This command puts all radios in the entire system in a special time-division duplexing mode that alternates between two timeslots. One time slot for data communications upstream and another for downstream communications. 28 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A The Extensions are single radios which serve as bridges between adjacent sub-network levels. Extensions will undertake a remote personality in one timeslot, and a master personality in the alternate timeslot and provide communications with associated Remotes downstream. Extensions behave like two radios with their data ports tied together, first synchronizing with their upstream Master during their Remote personality period, and then providing synchronization signals to dependent Remotes downstream during its Master personality period. All Remotes synchronize to a corresponding Master. This can be the real master (the MODE M unit), or it can be a repeater Extension that derives synchronization from the real master. Payload polls/packets broadcast from the network Master will be repeated to all levels of the network, either directly to Remotes, or through network repeatersthe Extensions station. The targeted Remote will respond to the poll following the same path back to the Master. Configuration Parameters for Store-and Forward Services The installation and configuration of a network with an Extension using SAF is straight-forward with only a few unique parameters that need to be considered and set at each unit. In every network there can be only one Master station. It will serve as the sole gateway to the outside world. The following three tables detail the parameters that will need to be set on each type of radio in the network. Network Master RadioTable 8 on Page 29 Extension Radio(s)Table 9 on Page 30 Remote Radio(s)Table 10 on Page 31 Table 8. Configuration Parameters for SAF Services Network Master Radio Parameter Command Description Operating Mode Network Address MODE M Details page 45 ADDR Details page 40 Set the radio to serve as a Master A number between 1 and 65,000 that will serve as a common network ad-
dress. All radios in the network use the same number. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 29 Table 8. Configuration Parameters for SAF Services Network Master Radio (Continued) Parameter Command Description Extended Address XADDR Details page 51 Store and Forward Mode SAF ON Details page 48 A number between 0 and 31 that will serve as a common address for radi-
os that synchronize di-
rectly to this master. Typically, the Master is set to zero (0). Enables store and for-
ward capability in the net-
work. Table 9. Configuration Parameters for SAF Services Extension Radio(s) Parameter Command Description Operating Mode Network Address MODE X Details page 45 ADDR Details page 40 Extended Ad-
dress XADDR Details page 51 Primary Extended Address XPRI Details page 51 Extension Map XMAP Details page 51 Extension Received Signal Strength Indicator XRSSI Details page 51 Set the radio to serve as an Extension A number between 1 and 65,000 that will serve as a common network address. All radios in the network use the same number. A number between 0 and 31 that will serve as a common address for radios that syn-
chronize directly to this Ex-
tension radio serving as master for associated sub-network units. We recommend using zero
(0) for the Master station. XADDR number of the pri-
mary or preferred radio with which this radio will synchro-
nize. Functional list of all XADDR values with which this radio can synchronize, excluding the XPRI address The minimum RSSI level re-
quired to preserve synchro-
nization with a non-primary radio. (Ineffective when XPRI is NONE) 30 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Table 10. Configuration Parameters for SAF Services Remote Radio(s) Parameter Command Description Operating Mode Network Address MODE R Details page 45 ADDR Details page 40 Primary Extended Address XPRI Details page 51 Extension Map XMAP Details page 51 Extension Received Signal Strength Indicator XRSSI Details page 51 Set the radio to serve as a Remote station A number between 1 and 65,000 that will serve as a common network address or name. Same number for all units in the same net-
work. XADDR number of the primary or preferred radio with which this radio will synchronize. A list of all XADDR val-
ues with which this ra-
dio can synchronize, excluding the XPRI address The minimum RSSI level required to pre-
serve synchronization with a non-primary ra-
dio. (Ineffective when XPRI is NONE) 7.4 Sleep Mode Operation (Remote units only) In some installations, such as at solar-powered sites, it may be necessary to keep the transceivers power consumption to an absolute minimum. This can be accomplished using the radios Sleep Mode feature. In this mode, power consumption is reduced to about 8 mA. Sleep Mode can be enabled under RTU control by asserting a ground (on Pin 6 of J3, the radios header connector. The radio stays in Sleep Mode until the low is removed, and all normal functions are suspended. The radio can be awakened by your RTU every minute or so to verify synchronization with the master station. When the ground is removed, the radio will be ready to receive data within 75 milliseconds. NOTE: The SLEEP function must be set to ON; otherwise a ground on the Sleep Mode pin will be ignored. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 31 It is important to note that power consumption will increase somewhat as communication from the master station degrades. This is because the radio will spend a greater period of time awake looking for synchronization messages from the master radio. In order for the radio to be controlled by the Sleep Mode pin, the radio must be set to SLEEP ON. See SLEEP [ON, OFF] on Page 50 for more information. Sleep Mode Example The following example describes Sleep Mode implementation in a typical system. Using this information, you should be able to configure a system that meets your own particular needs. Suppose you need communications to each remote site only once per hour. Program the RTU to raise an EIA/RS-232 line once each hour (DTR for example) and wait for a poll and response before lowering it again. Connect this line to Pin 6 of the radios header connector. This will allow each RTU to be polled once per hour, with a significant savings in power consumption. 8.0 DEALING WITH INTERFERENCE The transceiver shares the frequency spectrum with other services and other Part 15 (unlicensed) devices in the USA. As such, near 100% error free communications may not be achieved in a given location, and some level of interference should be expected. However, the radios flexible design and hopping techniques should allow adequate performance as long as care is taken in choosing a suitable location and in configuring the radios operating parameters. In general, keep the following points in mind when setting up your communications network:
1. Systems installed in rural areas are least likely to encounter interference;
those in suburban and urban environments are more likely to be affected by other devices operating in the license-free frequency band and by adjacent licensed services. 2. If possible, use a directional antenna at remote sites. They conne the transmission and reception pattern to a narrow lobe, which minimizes interference to (and from) stations located outside the pattern. 3. If interference is suspected from a nearby licensed system (such as a paging transmitter), it may be helpful to use horizontal polarization of all antennas in the network. Because most other services typically use vertical polarization in this band, an additional 20 dB of attenuation to interference can be achieved by using the horizontal plane. 4. Multiple spread spectrum systems can co-exist in close proximity to each other with only minor interference, provided they are each assigned a unique network address. Each network address has a different hop pattern associated with it. 32 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A 5. If constant interference is present in a particular frequency zone, it may be necessary to lock out that zone from the radios hopping pattern. The radio includes built-in tools to help users do this. Refer to the discussion of the SKIP command (Page 49) for more information. In the USA, a maximum of four zones may be skipped, per FCC rules. Check the regulatory requirements for your region. 6. Interference can also come from out-of-band RF sources such as paging systems. Installation of a bandpass filter, such as Part No. 20-2822A02 in the antenna system may provide relief from this type of interference. 7. Proper use of the RETRY and REPEAT commands may be helpful in areas with heavy interference. The RETRY command sets the maximum number of times (1 to 10) that a radio will re-transmit upstream data over the air. Values greater than 1 successively improve the chances of a message getting through when interference is a problem. The REPEAT command sets a xed number of unconditional retransmissions for downstream data. 8. The RF power output of all radios in a system should be set for the lowest level necessary for reliable communications. This lessens the chance of causing unnecessary interference to nearby systems and keeps power consumption to a minimum. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 33 9.0 PROGRAMMING REFERENCE All programming and control of the transceiver is performed through a PC terminal connected to the radio or the Evaluation Board DIAG connector. There are no manual adjustments or jumper settings used for configuration. This section explains how to establish terminal communication, and provides a complete list of user commands. 9.1 Programming Methods Terminal Interface Mode A PC may be used by operating it in a basic terminal mode (e.g., a HyperTerminal session) and entering the radio commands listed in the tables contained in this section. The PC must be connected to the radio via its 16-pin header connector, or, if using the Evaluation Board, via the modular diagnostics connector. In the latter case, an RJ-11 to DB-9 Adapter Cable
(Part No. 03-3246A01) is required. A cable of this type may be constructed using the information shown in Figure 10 on Page 11. Once a PC terminal is connected, communication (baud rate) is automatically established through the command interface. To access the command interface, press the ESCAPE key, followed by one or more ENTER keystrokes
(delivered at about half-second intervals), until the > prompt is displayed. NOTE: The diagnostic interface uses 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. It automati-
cally configures itself to function at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bps. If the DLINK setting is ON, the interface will start out in Diagnostic Link mode. This is a special protocol used to support Network-Wide Diagnostics. The pro-
cess described in the paragraph above causes the radio to exit diagnostic link mode and enter command mode. If there is no input in command mode for 5 minutes, the interface will revert back to diagnostic link mode. PC-Based Configuration Software The Windows-based TransNET Configuration Software
(P/N 06-4059A01) is designed for use with the OEM Transceiver. This software provides access to all of the radios capabilities with the benefit of context-sensitive help. The program is shipped as part of the TransNET Support Package CD included with every order. 9.2 User Commands A series of tables begin on the next page listing the various user commands for the OEM transceiver. The tables provide abbreviated command descriptions. Complete descriptions follow in Section 9.3. 34 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Entering Commands The proper procedure for entering commands is to type the command, followed by an command is followed by then keystroke. For programming commands, the
, the appropriate information or values, and ENTER ENTER SPACE
. Table 11. Network ConfigurationMaster Station COMMAND BUFF [ON, OFF]
Details, page 41 FEC [ON, OFF]
Details, page 44 HOPTIME [7, 28]
Details, page 44 REPEAT [010]
Details, page 47 RETRY [010]
Details, page 47 SAF [ON, OFF]
Details, page 48 SKIP [NONE, 1...8]
Details, page 49 DESCRIPTION ON = Seamless data OFF = Fast byte throughput. Sets/disables FEC
(Forward Error Correction) setting. Displays hop-time or sets it to 7 or 28 ms. Sets/displays the xed downstream re-send count. Sets/displays the maximum upstream re-send count for ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request) operation Enables/disables the store-and-forward func-
tion for the network controlled by this Master unit. Skip one or more frequency zones Table 12. Network-Wide Diagnostics Command Description DLINK [xxxxx/ON/OFF]
Details, page 43 DTYPE [NODE/ROOT]
Details, page 44 Controls operation of diagnostic link function. Set radios operational characteristics for net-
work-wide diagnostics MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 35 Table 13. Operational ConfigurationSet/Program Command ADDR [165000]
Details, page 40 Description Program network address AMASK [0000 0000FFFF FFFF]
Details, page 41 Sets alarm response. Default: FFFF FFFF ASENSE [HI/LO]
Details, page 41 BAUD [xxxxx abc]
Details, page 41 CODE [NONE, 1255]
Details, page 42 CTS [0255]
Details, page 42 CTSHOLD [060000]
Details, page 43 Sense of the radios alarm output in the EIA-232 mode. Default: Alarm present = HI. Data communication parameters Select the security/encryption setting in the radio. CTS delay in milliseconds.
(A value of 0 returns CTS immediately) Hold time that CTS is present following last character from DATA port. DEVICE [DCE, CTS KEY]
Details, page 43 Device behavior:
DCE (normal) or CTS Key LEDS [ON, OFF]
Details, page 45 MODE [M, R, X]
Details, page 45 OWM [xxxxx]
Details, page 45 OWN [xxxxx]
Details, page 45 Enables/disables transceiver LEDs Operating mode:
where M = Master, R = Remote Owners message, or alternate message (30 characters maximum) Owners name, or alternate message
(30 characters maximum) PORT [RS232, RS485]
Details, page 45 Data port (DATA connector) interface signal-
ing mode: RS232 or RS485 PWR Details page 47 REPEAT [010]
Details, page 47 RXTOT [NONE, 01440]
Details, page 48 RTU [ON, OFF, 0-80]
Details, page 48 Forward power-output setting in dBm Forward power output in dBm. Maximum duration (in minutes) before time-out alarm. Default is OFF. Enable or Disable units built-in RTU simula-
tor. Default is OFF. Set RTU address between zero and 80. 36 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Table 13. Operational ConfigurationSet/Program (Continued) Command SLEEP [ON, OFF]
Details, page 50 UNIT [1000065000]
Details, page 50 XADDR [031]
Details, page 51 XPRI [031]
Details, page 51 XMAP [00000000-FFFFFFFF]
Details, page 51 XRSSI [NONE, 40...120]
Details, page 51 ZONE CLEAR Details, page 51 Description Enable or Disable the radios Sleep mode function. Unit address used for network-wide diagnos-
tics. (Unique within associated network.) This units Extended address Typically, the Master is set to zero (0). Address of the primary Extended radio unit
(Extension). Included Extended units in MODE X. (Exten-
sions and Remotes only). Minimum RSSI level required to preserve syn-
chronization with a non-primary radio.
(Only meaningful when XPRI is not NONE) Reset zone data statistics Table 14. Operating StatusDisplay Only Command ADDR Details page 40 AMASK Details page 41 ASENSE Details page 41 BAUD Details page 41 BUFF Details page 41 CODE Details page 42 CTS Details page 42 CTSHOLD Details page 43 Description Network address Alarm mask (response) Current sense of the alarm output. Data communication parameters. Example:
BAUD 9600 8N1 Data buffering mode: ON = seamless data, OFF = fast byte throughput Security/encryption operational status. NONE (Inactive), or ACTIVE CTS delay in milliseconds (0255 ms) Hold time that CTS is present following last character from DATA port. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 37 Table 14. Operating StatusDisplay Only (Continued) Command DEVICE Details page 43 HOPTIME Details page 44 HREV Details, page 45 LEDS [ON, OFF]
Details, page 45 MODE Details page 45 OWM Details page 45 OWN Details page 45 PORT Details page 45 PWR Details page 47 REPEAT Details page 47 RETRY Details page 47 SAF Details page 48 SKIP Details page 49 RSSI Details page 47 RXTOT Details page 48 RTU Details page 48 Description Device behavior Alternatives: DCE and CTS KEY Hop-time value in milliseconds (ms). Hardware revision level Enables/disables transceiver LEDs Current operating mode:
M = Master R = Remote X = Extension (Repeater) Owners message or site name Owners name or system name Current data port (DATA connector) interface signaling mode: RS232 or RS485 Show forward power-output setting in dBm The xed downstream re-send count. The maximum upstream re-send count for ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request) operation. The store-and-forward function status. Table of frequency zones programmed to be skipped Received signal strength indicator (dBm). Unavailable at Master unless SETUP is enabled. The amount of time (in seconds) to wait before issuing a time-out alarm. RTU simulators operational status (ON/OFF) 38 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Table 14. Operating StatusDisplay Only (Continued) Command SAF Details page 48 SER Details page 49 SHOW PWR Details page 49 SHOW SYNC Details page 49 SKIP Details page 49 SLEEP Details page 50 SREV Details page 50 STAT Details page 50 TEMP Details page 50 UNIT Details page 50 XADDR Details page 51 XPRI Details page 51 XMAP Details page 51 XRSSI Details page 51 Description Store-and-forward mode status in this unit.
(ON/OFF) Serial number of radio Show measured RF output power in dBm Information on synchronization source and depth Frequency zones that are skipped Radios Sleep Mode setting.
(At Remotes Only) Transceiver rmware revision level Current alarm status Transceivers internal temperature (C) Programmed unit address for network-wide diagnostics This units Extended address Address of the primary Extended radio unit
(Extension). Included Extended units in MODE X. (Exten-
sions and Remotes only). Minimum RSSI level required to preserve syn-
chronization with a non-primary radio. (Only meaningful when XPRI is not NONE) Table 15. Diagnostic and Test Functions Command KEY Details, page 45 DKEY Details, page 44 Description Enables the transmitter test.
(Radio must be in Setup mode.) Turns off the transmitter test.
(Radio must be in Setup mode.) MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 39 Table 15. Diagnostic and Test Functions (Continued) Command TX [xxxx]
Details, page 50 RX [xxxx]
Details, page 48 SETUP Details, page 48 ZONE DATA Details, page 51 ZONE CLEAR Details, page 51 Description Set/display transmit test frequency.
(Radio must be in Setup mode.) Set/display receive test frequency.
(Radio must be in Setup mode.) Enables Setup mode. Times out after 10 min-
utes. Press Q to quit. Zone data statistics Clears the Zone Data log 9.3 Detailed Command Descriptions The essential commands for most applications are Network Address (ADDR), Mode (MODE), and Baud Rate (BAUD). However, proper use of the additional commands allows you to tailor the transceiver for a specific use, or to conduct basic diagnostics on the radio. This section gives more detailed information for the commands listed above in section 9.2. Most of the commands below can be used in two ways. First, you can type only the command name (for example, ADDR) to view the currently programmed data. Second, you can set or change the existing data by typing the command, followed by a space, and then the desired entry (for example, ADDR 1234). In the list below, allowable programming variables, if any, are shown in brackets [ ] following the command name. ADDR [165000]
This command sets or displays the radios network address. The network address can range from 1 to 65000. A network address must be programmed at the time of installation and must be common across each radio in a given network. Radios are typically shipped with the network address unprogrammed, causing the address to display as NONE. If the address is not set (or is set to a wrong value) it leaves the system in an invalid state, preventing operation and generating an alarm. NOTE: It is recommended that the last four digits of the master radios serial number be used for the network address. This helps avoid conflicts with other users. 40 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A AMASK [0000 0000FFFF FFFF]
This command sets the alarm bits that cause the alarm output signal to be triggered. The PWR LED will still flash for all alarms, but the alarm output signal will only be activated for those alarms that have the corresponding mask bit set. The hex value for the mask aligns directly with the hex value for the ALARM command. The default is FFFF FFFF. Through proper use of the AMASK command, it is possible to tailor the alarm response of the radio. Contact the factory for more information on configuring the alarm mask. ASENSE [HI/LO]
This command is used to set the sense of the radios alarm output at Pin 3 of the 16-pin header connector. The default setting is HI which means an alarm exists when an RS-232 high is on Pin 3. BAUD [xxxxx abc]
This command sets or displays the communication attributes for the normal payload communications through the DATA port. The command has no effect on the RJ-11 DIAG(NOSTICS) port. The first parameter (xxxxx) is baud rate. Baud rate is specified in bits-per-second and must be one of the following speeds: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200. At baud rates of 19200 bps or less, the radio can support unlimited continuous data transmission at any hop rate. The second parameter of the BAUD command (abc) is a 3-character block indicating how the data is encoded. The following is a breakdown of each characters meaning:
a = Data bits (7 or 8) b = Parity (N for None, O for Odd, E for Even) c = Stop bits (1 or 2) The factory default setting is 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
(Example: 19200 8N1). NOTE: 7N1, 8O2, and 8E2 are invalid communication settings and are not supported by the transceiver. BUFF [ON, OFF]
This command sets or displays the received data handling mode of the radio. The command parameter is either ON or OFF. (The default is OFF.) The setting of this parameter affects the timing of received data sent out the DATA connector. Data transmitted over the air by the radio is unaffected by the BUFF setting. If data buffering is set to OFF, the radio will operate with the lowest possible average latency. Data bytes are sent out the DATA port as soon as an incoming RF data frame is processed. Average and typical latency will both be below 10 ms, but idle character gaps may be introduced into the outgoing data flow. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 41 If data buffering is ON, the radio will operate in a seamless mode. That is, data bytes will be sent over the air as quickly as possible, but the receiver will buffer the data until the entire packet has been collected. The delay introduced by data buffering is variable and depends on message size and the number of retransmissions required, but the radio will not create any gaps in the output data stream. This mode of operation is required for protocols such as MODBUS that do not allow gaps in their data transmission. Seamless mode (BUFF ON) is intended only for applications where the message size is 256 characters or less. Enforcement of this rule is left up to the user. If more than 256 characters are transmitted data delivery will not be seamless and data may be lost. Changes to the BUFF setting may only be made at the master radio. This is because the master radio broadcasts the buffer setting for the entire network. At remote radios, the buffer setting may be read when the radio is in synchronization with the master, but it may not be changed. CODE [NONE, 1255]
The CODE command is used to select or display the security/encryption setting in the radio. The default is CODE NONE. Setting CODE to a value other than NONE provides an extra level security beyond that provided by the Network Address
(ADDR). The disadvantage is increased complexity in managing the network. The CODE command takes an argument 1255, or NONE. Entering CODE without an argument will display either NONE or ACTIVE. ACTIVE means that security/encryption has been enabled, but the radio will not display the security argument. When a CODE value is active, all radios in the system must use the same code value. If the code value is not properly programmed, a remote radio will not synchronize with the master. CAUTION: Record the CODE value and store it in a safe place. If the code is later forgotten, and a unit is to be added to the system, all radios in the network must be set to NONE and then reprogrammed to a new value. CTS [0255]
The CTS (clear-to-send) command sets or displays the timer value associated with the CTS line response. The command parameter ranges from 0 to 255 milliseconds. For DCE operation, the timer specifies how long to wait after the RTS line goes high before asserting the CTS line. A timer value of zero means that the CTS line will be asserted immediately following the assertion of RTS. For CTS Key operation (see the DEVICE command), the timer specifies how long to wait after asserting the CTS line before sending data out the DATA port. A timer value of zero means that data will be sent out the data port without imposing a key-up delay. (Other delays may be in effect from other radio operating parameters.) 42 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A CTSHOLD [060000]
Used in DEVICE CTS KEY mode, this command sets the amount of time in milliseconds that CTS remains present following transmission of the last character out the RXD pin of the DATA port. This hold time can be used to prevent squelch tail data corruption when communicating with other radios. The CTSHOLD setting can range from 0 to 60000 (i.e., 60 seconds). The default value is 0, which means that CTS will drop immediately after the last character is transmitted. If the command is entered when the radio is in DEVICE DCE mode, the response CTSHOLD N/A will be displayed. DEVICE [DCE, CTS KEY]
The DEVICE command sets or displays the device behavior of the radio. The command parameter is either DCE or CTS KEY. The default selection is DCE. In this mode, CTS will go high following RTS, subject to the CTS programmable delay time. Keying is stimulated by the input of characters at the data port. Hardware flow control is implemented by dropping the CTS line if data arrives faster than it can be transmitted. If CTS KEY is selected, the radio is assumed to be controlling another radio, such as in a repeater or tail-end link system. The RTS line is ignored and the CTS line is used as a keyline control for the other radio. CTS is asserted immediately after the receipt of RF data, but data will not be sent out the DATA port until after the CTS programmable delay time has expired. (This gives the other radio time to key.) Following transmission of the last byte of data, CTS will remain asserted for the duration specified by the CTSHOLD command. CTSHOLD should be set sufficiently high. DLINK [xxxxx/ON/OFF]
DLINK ON enables use of Diagnostic Link mode and establishes it as the default protocol on the RJ-11 DIAG port. Diagnostic Link mode is a special protocol used to support Network-Wide Diagnostics. DLINK must be set to ON to support connection to InSite or to support chained diagnostics between radio networks. DLINK OFF disables this feature. The default setting is ON. The following DLINK baud rates selections are allowed:
1200 4800 9600 19200 (default) 38400 57600 115200 Example: DLINK 4800 sets the RJ-11 DIAG port to operate at 4800 bps when diagnostics is closed. This setting will not affect the ports autobaud operation. Use only of DLINK ON, will enable the use 19200 or the most recently programmed value. The default is DLINK 19200 and DLINK ON. NOTE: The same baud rate must be entered into the InSite Equipment Lists BAUD field. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 43 NOTE: The DLINK rate must match the rate of any connected device to the diagnostic port. This may be either another radios diagnostic port, the InSite computer, or another data link device that eventually connects to the InSite computer. DKEY Disables the transmitter when it is keyed. See also KEY command. DTYPE [NODE/ROOT]
The DTYPE command specifies the radios operational characteristics for network-wide diagnostics. The transceiver uses the following types:
NODEThe most common setting, and the default. This is the basic system radio device-type. Typically, the radio network is comprised of nodes and one root. Intrusive diagnostics can originate from any node. However, non-intrusive diagnostics can only be conducted from the root node. ROOTAlways one, and only one, per network (including units associated through Extension units.) The root is the focal point of network-wide diagnostics information. Intrusive diagnostics can originate from any radio, including the root. However, the root is the only radio through which non-intrusive diagnostics can be conducted. FEC [ON, OFF]
This command is used to view the FEC setting, or turn it on or off. The default setting is FEC ON. (It needs to be turned off when throughputs exceed 57,600 bps.) FEC is set at the master and is automatically passed on to all of the remotes in a network. Setting FEC to ON improves sensitivity at the cost of reduced throughput. Typical SCADA/telemetry applications use low data rates and, as such, the FEC setting is normally transparent to them. HOPTIME [7, 28]
The HOPTIME command is used to set or display the hop-time setting. The command is a digit corresponding to the hop-time setting in milliseconds. The default HOPTIME setting is 7. A setting of 28 must be used when throughputs exceed 57,600 bps. Changes to the HOPTIME setting may only be made at the master radio. (This is because the Master radio establishes the hop-time setting for the entire network.) At remote radios, the hop-time setting may be read when the radio is in synchronization with the master, but it may not be changed. INIT The INIT command is used to reset the radios operating parameters to the factory defaults listed in Table 16 on Page 46. This may be helpful when trying to resolve configuration problems that resulted from the entry of one or more improper command settings. If you are unsure of which command setting caused the problem, this command allows you to get back to a known working state. 44 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A NOTE: Caution should be exercised when using the INIT command on radios in a sys-
tem employing the Store-and-Forward feature. Settings relating to the use of Extension services will be lost and will need to be re-entered. Inventory and record the settings for XADDR, XPRI and XMAP before using the INIT com-
mand. SPECIAL NOTE: Installing firmware of Revision 2.0 or later into a radio with Revi-
sions 1.x firmware will preserve the radios compatibility with other radios run-
ning Revision 1.x firmware. If updating the radios firmware is part of a system-wide upgrade, the last step should be to use the INIT command at the Master station. Use of the INIT command causes the changes shown in Table 16 on Page 46 to be applied HREV Shows the Hardware revision of the radio. KEY Enables the transmitter. (Radio must be in Setup mode.) See also DKEY command. LEDS [ON, OFF]
This command is used to view the LED setting, or to enable/disable LED operation. In power-critical applications (battery/solar powered sites, for example), it may be desirable to turn off the LEDs. MODE [M, R, X]
The MODE command sets or displays the operating mode of the radio. A master radio is set by MODE M; a remote set by MODE R, and an Extension is set by MODE X. All units default to remotes; other modes must be specifically programmed with the MODE command. If MODE X is used, the MODE X radio should be programmed with an Extended Address (XADDR). Units that need to hear this MODE X radio must be programmed with an appropriate XPRI and/or XMAP value. OWM [xxxxx]
The OWM command sets or displays an optional owners message, such as the system name. The entry can contain up to 30 characters. OWN [xxxxx]
The OWN command sets or displays an optional owners name, such as the site name. The entry can contain up to 30 characters. PORT [RS232, RS485]
Select or identify the current data interface signaling mode: RS232 or RS485. This is the port though which the payload data will pass. Pin descriptions for EIA-232 are on Page13 and EIA-485 can be found on Page13. Note: This command will always show TTL if the radio is only equipped for TTL servicesee model number configuration code on Page 3. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 45 PWR [2030]
This command displays or sets the desired RF forward output power setting of the radio. The PWR command parameter is specified in dBm and can range from 20 dBm through 30 in 1 dBm steps. The default setting is 30 dBm (1 watt). To read the actual (measured) power output of the radio, use the SHOW PWR command. In the USA, maximum allowable power is governed by FCC limits on Effective Isotropic Radiated Power output (EIRP). The EIRP limit of
+36 dBm means that any user with a net antenna gain greater than 6 dBi must decrease the PWR setting accordingly. Table 16. INIT Command Generated Defaults Parameter Default Setting Corresponding Command DEVICE DCE CTS 0 CTSHOLD 0 BAUD 9600 8N1 AMASK ASENSE RXTOT TX xxx RX xxx SLEEP OFF PORT RS232 XPRI 0 XMAP 0 XADDR 0 DCE 0
(CTS is continuously asserted) 0 9600 baud 8 data bits none (no parity) 1 stop bit FFFF FFFF RS-232 High (+5.0 Vdc) None/Disable 915.000 MHz 915.000 MHz OFF RS/EIA-232 0 (Master) None 0 For all radios Device operation CTS delay CTS hold-time DATA Interface port Alarm Mask Alarm Output Sense RX Time-out-Timer Transmitter test frequency Receiver test frequency Sleep Enable Data Port Setting Primary Extension Radio Address Synchronization Source Map Extended Address For MASTER radios Skipped frequencies Hop-time Buffer mode None (radio will hop across all frequencies) 7 ms OFF SKIP NONE HOPTIME 7 BUFF OFF 46 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Table 16. INIT Command Generated Defaults (Continued) Parameter Retry Count Repeat Count Forward Error Correction Default Setting 10 (max. 10 repeats for ARQ) 3 (downstream repeats) ON Corresponding Command RETRY 10 REPEAT 3 FEC ON REPEAT [010]
The REPEAT command affects downstream data. The command causes a Master or Extension to always repeat transmissions for the specified number of times (range is 0 to 10; default selection is 3). Unlike the RETRY command, there is no acknowledgment that a message has been received. To display the current setting, use the REPEAT command without entering a value. RETRY [010]
The RETRY command affects upstream data. The command selects, or displays, the maximum number of times (0 to 10) that a remote radio will re-transmit data. The default setting is 10. This command is associated with ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request) operation of the radio and is intended for use in areas with heavy radio interference. When the RETRY command is issued without parameters, the maximum retransmission count is shown. A value of 0 represents no retries, while values of 1 or greater successively improve the chance of data delivery in spectrally harsh environments (at the expense of possibly increased latency). The RETRY value is only settable at the Master. It is readable by a synchronized Remote. RSSI This command displays the radios Received Signal Strength Indication in dBm (decibels relative to 1 mW). The output can range from 40 dBm to 120 dBm. Command availability and results depend on the mode of operation (master or remote). The closer to 0 dBm, the stronger the signal, thus a reading of 70 dBm is stronger than 80 dBm. For a remote radio, under normal operation, RSSI is based on the average signal strength of the SYNC message received in each of the eight frequency zones. (RSSI is sampled each time a SYNC message is received.) When using the RSSI reading to align a directional antenna, it is important to make changes slowly so that the RSSI reading will provide meaningful results. It will take several seconds to indicate a change in signal level. The radio stays in RSSI mode until is pressed. ENTER MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 47 For a master radio, under normal operation, entering the RSSI command causes the response NOT AVAILABLE to be returned. This is because a master is normally receiving signals from several remote stations and an RSSI reading would be continually changing. The only exception is when the SETUP command has been asserted. This disables hopping and allows reading a raw RSSI signal level in real time from a master or remote radio. NOTE: RSSI readings will not indicate signals stronger than 40 dBm. RTU [ON, OFF, 0-80]
This command re-enables or disables the radios internal RTU simulator, which runs with proprietary polling programs such as poll.exe and rsim.exe. The internal RTU simulator is available whenever a radio has diagnostics enabled. This command also sets the RTU address that the radio will respond to. The internal RTU can be used for testing system payload data or pseudo bit error rate (BER) testing. It can be helpful in isolating a problem to either the external RTU or the radio. The default RTU setting is OFF. RX [xxxx]
This command sets or displays the test receive frequency used in place of hopping when the radio is in SETUP mode. The test receive frequency can be reprogrammed to any value between 902.200 MHz and 927.800 MHz, inclusive. The factory default setting is 915.000 MHz. RXTOT [NONE, 01440]
This command sets or displays the amount of time (in minutes) to wait for the next received data packet before issuing a receiver time-out alarm. The default setting is NONE. SAF [ON, OFF]
This command enables/disables the operation of the Store-and-Forward services. It can be set only at the networks Master station, but will effect all radios in the associated network. The default setting is OFF. See related commands: XADDR [031] on Page 51, XPRI [031] on Page 51, and XMAP [00000000-FFFFFFFF] on Page 51. SETUP This command sets up the transceiver for checking antenna SWR or trans-
mitter power with external measuring equipment. Do not use this mode during normal operation. When the SETUP command is entered, the prompt changes to SETUP>, and:
Hopping is disabled. Synthesizer frequencies are reset to the test frequencies specified by the TX and RX commands described earlier. 48 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A The radio can be keyed using the KEY command. DKEY is used to unkey the radio. (If the radio is left in a keyed state it is automatically unkeyed after several minutes.) The RSSI is sampled in a raw, continuous fashion regardless of whether the unit is a master or a remote. Entering Q or QUIT returns the system to normal operation. A timer keeps the Setup mode from accidentally leaving the system disabled. After 10 minutes the system behaves as if Q or QUIT had been entered, returning to normal operation. SER Displays the Serial Number of the radio. SHOW PWR The SHOW PWR command displays the actual (measured) RF power output in dBm. Unlike the PWR command, this command shows the actual level being measured, not the programmed RF power setting. SHOW SYNC When used at a Remote station, this command will display Extended Address and Unit Address of the Master or Extension radio to which the Remote is synchronized. The network depth at the remote, defined as the number of downstream links from the Master, is displayed in parentheses. SKIP [NONE, 1...8]
This command sets or displays which, if any, of the eight 3.2 MHz-wide zones will be skipped from the radios hopping sequence. Skipping zones is one way of dealing with constant interference on one or more frequencies. See DEALING WITH INTERFERENCE on Page 32 for more information on dealing with interference. Table 17 shows the frequency range covered by each zone. The command parameter is either the keyword NONE or an undelimited string of up to four digits where each digit 1...8 represents a corresponding zone to skip. (For zone parameter input, the digits can appear in any order and can be optionally separated by a blank space.) The SKIP command is display-only at remote radios. (Remotes must be synchronized with the master radio to display the skip status.) In the USA, a maximum of four zones may be skipped, per FCC rules. Check the regulatory requirements for your region. Table 17. Frequency Zones ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 902.200 905.400 908.600 911.800 915.000 918.200 921.400 924.600 to to to to to to to to 905.200 908.400 911.600 914.800 918.000 921.200 924.400 927.600 MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 49 SLEEP [ON, OFF]
This command is used to set or display the radios Sleep Mode setting. The default setting is SLEEP OFF. When this mode is enabled (ON), a ground or logic low on Pin 6 of the 16-pin header connector (J3) suspends all normal radio functions, and power consumption is reduced to approximately 8 mA. The radio remains in this state until the low is removed. This function cannot be turned on for a Master or Extension radio. SREV This command displays the version of the firmware currently loaded into the transceiver. A display of 06-4040A01, 2.0.0 is an example of the firmware version identifierpart number followed by release/version number. STAT This command is used to check the alarm status of the radio. If no alarms exist, the message NO ALARMS PRESENT is returned. If an alarm does exist, a two-digit alarm code (0031) is displayed and the event is identified as a Major or Minor alarm. A brief description of the event is also given. If more than one alarm exists, the word MORE appears, and additional alarms may be viewed by pressing the alarm codes are provided in Table 18 on Page 53. key. Detailed descriptions of the ENTER TEMP This command displays the internal temperature of the transceiver in degrees Celsius. (Note that the radio is specified to operate in an environment between 30 C and +60 C). This internal reading may be higher than the outside temperature by several degrees. TX [xxxx]
This command sets or displays the test transmit frequency used in place of hopping whenever the radio is in Setup mode. The test transmit frequency can be reprogrammed to any value between 902.200 MHz and 927.800 MHz, inclusive. The factory default setting is 915.000 MHz. UNIT [1000065000]
This command sets the unit addressing for network-wide diagnostics. The unit address is factory programmed to the last four digits of the serial number. If re-programmed in the field, the entry must consist of five digits between 10000 and 65000. 50 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A XADDR [031]
Display or program the Extended Address of this radio that will serve as a common address for the sub-network synchronized to this Master or Extension. This value can be listed in the XPRI parameter of associated Extension or Remote radios to allow them to synchronize to this radio. We recommend setting the Master to zero (0). It is easy to remember, and is the default address when the INIT command is used. (Programmed only in Master and Extension radios.) XMAP [00000000-FFFFFFFF]
XMAP is a 32-bit hex entry where the least significant bit represents XADDR 0 and the most significant bit represents XADDR 31. The full 32-bit hex value represents the entire list of extensions with which the radio will be allowed to communicate. (Remotes and Extensions only.) This parameter is easily programmed through the TransNET Configuration Softwares Store and Forward Settings panel. XPRI [031]
Display or program the extended address of a primary radio with which this radio will attempt to synchronize and communicate. A setting of NONE will allow the unit to synchronize with any Master or Extension in the XMAP list.
(Parameter only meaningful for a Remote or Extension.) XRSSI [NONE, 40...120]
The XRSSI command is used to set the RSSI minimum signal level required to preserve synchronization with a non-primary Extension radio. This parameter will be ignored if XPRI is set to NONE. ZONE CLEAR The ZONE CLEAR command clears the zone data for all zones in the Zone Data Log, resetting the count to 0. (Zone data is also cleared automatically upon reboot.) ZONE DATA The transceiver divides its frequency operating spectrum into eight 3.2 MHz-wide zones. (These are the same zones referenced by the SKIP command described earlier.) Data frame statistics are maintained for each zone to indicate the transmission quality of data through the network. This information is useful for identifying zones where significant interference exists. Zone quality information can be accessed using the ZONE DATA command. For each zone (18), it shows you the number of data frames sent, the number received, and the number received with errors. If an excessive number of errors are seen in one or more frequency zones, it may indicate interference, and you should consider skipping those zones using the SKIP command. Note: If a frequency zone has been skipped, all counts for that zone will be zeros. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 51 The ZONE DATA format is displayed as follows:
1:TX TOTAL 00000000 1:RX TOTAL 00000000 1:RX ERROR 00000000 x:
x:
x:
8:TX TOTAL 00000000 8:RX TOTAL 00000000 8:RX ERROR 00000000 All data is based on payload packets. Incoming network data may be divided up into multiple packets for over-the-air transfers. The number before the colon represents the zone. TX TOTAL is the transmit packet total. RX TOTAL is the receive packet total. RX ERROR is the total number of received packets with CRC errors. All zone data is reset with the ZONE CLEAR command. 10.0 TROUBLESHOOTING Successful troubleshooting of the radio system is not difficult, but requires a logical approach. It is best to begin troubleshooting at the master station, as the rest of the system depends on the master for polling instructions and synchronization data. If the master station has problems, the operation of the entire network will be affected. When communication problems are found, it is good practice to begin by checking the simple things. All radios in the network must meet these basic requirements:
Adequate and stable primary power An efficient and properly aligned antenna system Secure connections (RF, data & power) Proper programming of the radios operating parameters, especially Mode selection (MODE), Network Address (ADDR), and interface Baud Rate (BAUD) The correct interface between the radio and the connected data equipment (proper cable wiring, data format and timing). In store-and-forward systems there are several areas that must be carefully evaluated:
Duplicate XADDR values on MODE M and MODE X radios will cause failures unless the radios are far enough apart to not hear each other. Errors in the synchronization qualiers, XPRI and XMAP, on corresponding Remote radios. SAF must be enabled at the Master 52 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A 10.1 Alarm Codes When an alarm condition exists, the transceiver creates an alarm code. These codes can be very helpful in resolving many system difficulties. Checking for AlarmsSTAT command To check for the presence of alarms, enter STAT. If no alarms exist, the message NO ALARMS PRESENT appears at the top of the display. If an alarm does exist, a two-digit alarm code (0031) is displayed, and it is identified as a major or minor alarm. A brief description of the alarm is also given. Alarm codes and their meanings are listed in Table 18. If more than one alarm exists, the word MORE appears at the bottom of the screen; additional alarms can be viewed by pressing ENTER
. Major Alarms vs. Minor Alarms Major alarms report serious conditions that generally indicate a hardware failure, or other abnormal condition that will prevent (or seriously hamper) further operation of the transceiver. With the exception of alarm code 00 (network address not programmed), major alarms generally indicate the need for factory repair. Contact your factory representative for further assistance. Minor alarms report conditions which, under most circumstances, will not prevent transceiver operation. This includes out-of-tolerance conditions, baud rate mismatches, etc. The cause of these alarms should be investigated and corrected to prevent system failure. Alarm Code Definitions Table 18 contains a listing of all event codes that may be reported by the transceiver.Additional alarm codes may be used in future firmware releases or are used by the factory. Table 18. Alarm Codes Alarm Code Alarm Type Description 00 01 04 08 10 12 16 Major Major Major Major Major Major Minor The network address is not programmed. Improper firmware detected for this radio model. One or more of the programmable synthesizer loops is reporting an out-of-lock condition. The system is reporting that it has not been calibrated. Factory calibration is required for proper radio operation. The DSP was unable to properly program the system to the ap-
propriate defaults. A hardware problem may exist. Receiver time-out alarm. The unit address is not programmed. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 53 Table 18. Alarm Codes (Continued) Alarm Code 17 18 29 30 31 Alarm Type Minor Minor Minor Minor Minor Description A data parity fault has been detected on the DATA connector. This usually indicates a parity setting mismatch between the ra-
dio and the RTU. A data framing error has been detected on the DATA connector. This may indicate a baud rate mismatch between the radio and the RTU. RF output power fault detected. (Power differs by more than 2 dB from set level.) Often caused by high antenna system SWR. Check antenna, feedline and connectors. The system is reporting an RSSI reading below 105 dBm. The transceivers internal temperature is approaching an out-of-tolerance condition. If the temperature drifts outside of the recommended operating range, system operation may fail. 10.2 LED Indicators The LED indicators on the transceiver board (CR3, CR-4, CR-5 and CR-6) are an important troubleshooting tool and should be checked whenever a problem is suspected. Table 19 describes the function of each status LED. Table 19. LED indicator descriptions RXD TXD DCD GP LED Name Description RXD (CR3) Receive Data TXD (CR4) Transmit Data DCD (CR5) Data Carrier Detect GP (CR6) General Purpose Serial receive data activity. Payload data from con-
nected device. Serial transmit data activity. Payload data to con-
nected device. ContinuousRadio is receiving/sending synchroni-
zation frames On within 10 seconds of power-up under normal conditions ContinuousPower is applied to the radio; no problems detected Flashing (5 times-per-second)Fault indication. See TROUBLESHOOTING on Page 52 OffRadio is unpowered or in Sleep mode 10.3 Troubleshooting Chart Table 20 provides suggestions for resolving system difficulties that may be experienced in the radio system. If problems persist, contact the factory for further assistance. Refer to the inside back cover of this guide for contact information. 54 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Table 20. Troubleshooting chart Difficulty Recommended System Checks Unit is inoperative. a.Check for the proper supply voltage at the transceiver, J3 Pins 5 and11. b.If using the Evaluation Board, the surface mount fuse may have opened. Refer to Section 4.3 below for replacement instruc-
tions. Interference is suspected. a.Verify that the system has a unique network address. Nearby systems with the same address will cause interference. No synchroniza-
tion with master, or poor overall performance. b.Check for interference and lockout any affected zone(s) using the SKIP command (Page 49). c. If omnidirectional antennas are used on remote stations, con-
sider changing to directional antennas. This will often limit inter-
ference to and from other stations. a.Check for secure interface connections at the radio and the connected device. b.Check the antenna, feedline and connectors. Reflected power should be less than 10% of the forward power reading
(SWR 2:1 or lower). c. If the remote radio is in synchronization, but performance is poor, check the received signal strength using the RSSI com-
mand (Page 47). If RSSI is low, it may indicate antenna prob-
lems, or misalignment of directional antenna headings. d.Verify proper programming of system parameters: mode, net-
work address, data interface baud rate, transmitter power, CTS delay, etc. For store-and-forward applications, also verify the following: SAF is ON; extended address is properly pro-
grammed at each extension; remotes are using the proper val-
ues for XPRI and XMAP. e.Check for alarms using the STAT command (Page 50) BER is too high. Data throughput is spotty. a.The RETRY and REPEAT commands may be increased to deal with interference, or decreased to increase throughput and reduce latency. b.Try turning on FEC. FEC on gives some coding gain, but comes at the cost of reduced throughput. Latency is too high. a.Reduce the REPEAT count. b.Turn BUFF OFF. BUFF ON insures that no gaps occur in the data, but this comes at the cost of increased latency. c. Make sure HOPTIME is set to 7. 10.4 Network-Wide Remote Diagnostics Diagnostics data from a remote radio can be obtained by connecting a laptop or personal computer running InSite diagnostics software (V6.6 or later) at any radio in the network. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 55 NOTE: The diagnostics feature may not be available in all radios. The ability to query and configure a radio via Network-wide Diagnostics is based on the feature op-
tions purchased in the radio being polled. If a PC is connected to any radio in the network, intrusive polling (polling which briefly interrupts payload data transmission) can be performed. To perform diagnostics without interrupting payload data transmission, connect the PC to a radio defined as the root radio. A radio is defined as a root radio using the DTYPE ROOT command locally, at the radio. A complete explanation of remote diagnostics can be found in the Network-Wide Diagnostics System Handbook (Part No. 05-3467A01). Table 21. Network-Wide Diagnostics Commands Command Description DLINK [xxxxx/ON/OFF]
Details, page 43 Set baud rate of diagnostics link DTYPE [NODE/ROOT]
Details, page 44 Set radios operational characteristics for net-
work-wide diagnostics 1. Program one radio in the network as the root radio by entering the DTYPE ROOT command at the radio. 2. At the root radio, use the DLINK ON and DLINK [baud rate] commands to congure the diagnostic link protocol on the RJ-11 port. 3. Program all other radios in the network as nodes by entering the DTYPE NODE command at each radio. 4. Use the DLINK ON and DLINK [baud rate] commands to congure the diagnostic link protocol on the RJ-11 port of each node radio. 5. Connect a PC on which InSite software is installed to the root radio, or to one of the nodes, at the radios diagnostics port. To connect a PC to the radios DIAG port, an RJ-11 to DB-9 adapter (Part No. 03-3246A01) is required. If desired, an adapter cable may be constructed from scratch, using the information shown in Figure 10 on Page 11. 6. Launch the InSite program at the PC. (Refer to the InSite users manual for details.) 56 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A 11.0 FIRMWARE UPGRADES From time to time, the factory releases new firmware for its radio products. An upgraded file can be installed in existing radios to take advantage of engineering improvements or additional features. 11.1 Obtaining new firmware The latest firmware for each radio type may be obtained free of charge from our website: www.microwavedata.com/service/technical/support/downloads/. Firmware is also available on disks from the factory that are bundled with an installation utility (Radio Software Upgradeupgrade.exe) for transferring the firmware file on the disk to the radio. Saving a Web-site firmware file to your PC Firmware upgrades are distributed as a plain-text (ASCII) file with a .S28 extension. Browse to find the desired .S28 file for your radio on the factory website at www.microwavedata.com. After finding your selection, use the right mouse button to select a path on your computer on which to save the file.
(If this isnt done, your browser may display the firmware file contents as text on the screen instead of downloading it to your local hard drive.) After the .S28 file has been saved to your computer, you may use either TransNET Configuration Software or Radio Software Upgrade programs to install this firmware in your radios. 11.2 Installing firmware in your radio 1. Connect a PC to radios diagnostic interface. 2. Start the TransNET Conguration Software. Open diagnostics port to the radio. The program will automatically read the radios prole. 3. From the File menu select Radio Firmware Upgrade and follow the prompts to install the new rmware into the radio. Do not press the Cancel button once the installation has started or it will leave the radio without any code. When the installation is complete, another radio may be connected to your PC and programmed. NOTE: If a firmware installation fails, the radio is left unprogrammed and inoperative. This is indicated by the PWR LED flashing slowly (1 second on/1 second off). This condition is only likely to occur if there is a power failure to the computer or radio during the installation process. The installation should be attempted again. 12.0 Security Today, the operation and management of an enterprise is becoming increasing dependent on electronic information flow. An accompanying concern becomes the security of the communication infrastructure and the security of the data itself. We take this matter seriously, and provide several means for protecting the data carried over our wireless products. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 57 Our radios address this issue primarily through the use of the following items:
1) A proprietary modem/data link layerData signals are processed using code and hardware specically designed by the manufacturer. 2) A unique Network AddressThis provides a unique identier for each radio in a network. A radio is not addressable unless this unique code is included in the data string. 3) An optional encryption value (code)Setting an encryption code requires the use of the CODE command. This command scrambles the radios hop pattern and encrypts payload data content. A radio requires the correct Network Address (ADDR) and CODE value in order to synchronize. When the CODE command is used, the same value must be programmed into all radios in the network. See CODE [NONE, 1255] on Page 42 for more details. The effective combination of CODE and ADDR discourage the use of an exhaustive search to gain access to a system. The items described above provide sufficient security for most systems. For highly-sensitive applications, system designers should consider employing application level encryption into their polling protocols to further protect their systems. Third party software tools are available for adding encryption, and these should be considered as part of any advanced encryption scheme. 13.0 Product Specifications GENERAL Frequency Hopping Range:
Hop Pattern:
Frequency Stability:
Half-Duplex Operation:
Network Addresses:
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
Primary Power:
Current Draw (typical):
Transmit:
Receive:
Sleep Mode:
Physical Dimensions:
Agency Approvals:
Up to 128 frequencies within 902928 MHz, configurable in 3.2 MHz zones Based on network address 1.5 ppm 1.6 MHz TX/RX split 65,000 40 C to +70 C
<95% at +40 C; non-condensing 13.8 Vdc (630 Vdc range) 510 mA @ 13.8 Vdc 115 mA @ 13.8 Vdc 8 mA @ 13.8 Vdc 1.81"W x 3.45"L x 0.63"H
(46 x 87.5 x 16 mm) FCC Part 15.247 (E5MDS-EL806) FCC Modular Approval Industry Canada RSS-210 and RSS-139
(CAN 3738A-MDSEL806) 58 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A DATA CHARACTERISTICS Data Interface:
Interface Connector:
Data Rate:
Data Latency:
Byte Length:
Maximum Data Transmission:
RF CHARACTERISTICS TRANSMITTER:
Power Output
(at antenna connector):
Duty Cycle:
Modulation Type:
Output Impedance:
Spurious:
Harmonics:
RECEIVER:
Type:
Sensitivity:
Intermodulation:
Desensitization:
Spurious:
Bandwidth:
Interference Ratio
(SINAD degraded by 3dB):
Time Required to Synchronize with Master Radio:
RS-232/422/485 16 pin header, female 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps asynchronous 7 ms (typical) 10 or 11 bits Continuous up to 115200 bps 1.0 Watt (+30 dBm) Max. Reference Table 7 on Page 24 Continuous Binary CPFSK 50 Ohms 60 dBc 55 dBc Double conversion superheterodyne 110 dBm 54 dB minimum (EIA) 75 dB 70 dB minimum 200 kHz Co-channel:10 dB Adjacent channel:+30 dB Two channels away:+40 dB Three channels away:+48 dB 0.5 seconds (typical)
:13.1 Detailed Pin Descriptions The tables in this section give detailed pin functions for the transceivers 16-pin header connector, J3 (see Figure 21). The tables are organized according to the available signaling configurations of the OEM transceiver.
(Figure 2 on Page 3 may be used to determine which configuration you have.) Signaling configuration is hardware fixed at the time of manufacture and will be one of the following:
TTL signaling for both Payload and Diagnostic data Payload data TTL; Diagnostic data RS-232 Payload data RS-232/RS-485 selectable; Diagnostic data RS-232 MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 59 Pin No. Input/
Output 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Figure 21. 16-pin Header Connector
(J3) on OEM Transceiver Board
(See parts list (Page18) for information on matching connector) Table 22. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts
(Payload data TTL; Diagnostic data TTL) IN OUT OUT IN IN Signal Type
Name/Description GroundConnects to ground (negative supply potential). TTL, 3 Vdc Diagnostic TXDSupplies received diagnos-
tic/administrative data to the connected device. TTL, 3 Vdc Alarm conditionA low indicates normal opera-
tion. A high indicates an alarm. (See ASENSE
[HI/LO] command for more information.) TTL, 3 Vdc Diagnostic RXDAccepts diagnostic/adminis-
trative data from the connected device.
FCC 5-25 Vdc version: DC Input (5-25 Vdc) Supply Source must be capable of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. IN TTL, 3 Vdc Non-FCC 3 Vdc version: Do not connect Sleep Mode InputA ground on this pin turns off most circuits in a remote radio. This allows for greatly reduced power consumption, yet pre-
serves the radios ability to be brought quickly back on line. See Sleep Mode Operation (Re-
mote units only) on Page 31 for details. OUT TTL, 3 Vdc Data Carrier Detect (DCD)A low indicates hop-
ping synchronization has been achieved. IN TTL, 3 Vdc
Power Supply Shutdown ControlA ground on this pin causes the OEM modules power supply to shut down. Non-FCC 3 Vdc version: DC Input (Regulated 3.3 Vdc)Supply Source must be capable of fur-
nishing at least 7.5 watts. FCC 5-25 Vdc version: Do not connect 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 60 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Table 22. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts
(Payload data TTL; Diagnostic data TTL) (Continued) 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 IN IN IN
OUT IN OUT TTL, 3 Vdc Transmitted Data (TXD)Accepts payload data from the connected device.
FCC 5-25 Vdc version: DC Input (5-25 Vdc) Supply Source must be capable of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. Non-FCC 3 Vdc version: Do not connect TTL, 3 Vdc Request to Send (RTS)A high causes CTS to follow after the programmed CTS delay time has elapsed (DCE).
ReservedDo not connect. TTL, 3 Vdc Received Data (RXD)Supplies received pay-
load data to the connected device.
GroundConnects to ground (negative supply potential). TTL, 3 Vdc Clear to Send (CTS)Goes high after the pro-
grammed CTS delay time has elapsed (DCE), or keys an attached radio when RF data arrives
(CTS KEY). Table 23. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts
(Payload data TTL; Diagnostic data RS-232) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 Input/
Output IN Signal Type
Name/Description GroundConnects to ground (negative supply potential). OUT RS-232 Diagnostic TXDSupplies received diagnos-
tic/administrative data to the connected device. OUT IN IN TTL, 3 Vdc Alarm conditionA low indicates normal opera-
tion. A high indicates an alarm. (See ASENSE
[HI/LO] command for more information.) RS-232 Diagnostic RXDAccepts diagnostic/adminis-
trative data from the connected device.
FCC 5-25 Vdc version: DC Input (5-25 Vdc) Supply Source must be capable of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. Non-FCC 3 Vdc version: Do not connect MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 61 Table 23. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts
(Payload data TTL; Diagnostic data RS-232) (Continued) IN TTL, 3 Vdc Sleep Mode InputA ground on this pin turns off most circuits in a remote radio. This allows for greatly reduced power consumption, yet pre-
serves the radios ability to be brought quickly back on line. See Sleep Mode Operation (Re-
mote units only) on Page 31 for details. OUT TTL, 3 Vdc Data Carrier Detect (DCD)A low indicates hop-
ping synchronization has been achieved. IN
IN IN IN
OUT IN OUT TTL, 3 Vdc Power Supply Shutdown ControlA ground on this pin causes the OEM modules power supply to shut down.
ReservedDo not connect. TTL, 3 Vdc Transmitted Data (TXD)Accepts payload data from the connected device.
FCC 5-25 Vdc version: DC Input (5-25 Vdc) Supply Source must be capable of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. Non-FCC 3 Vdc version: Do not connect TTL, 3 Vdc Request to Send (RTS)A high causes CTS to follow after the programmed CTS delay time has elapsed (DCE).
ReservedDo not connect. TTL, 3 Vdc Received Data (RXD)Supplies received pay-
load data to the connected device.
GroundConnects to ground (negative supply potential). TTL, 3 Vdc Clear to Send (CTS)Goes high after the pro-
grammed CTS delay time has elapsed (DCE), or keys an attached radio when RF data arrives
(CTS KEY). 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 62 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Table 24. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts
(Payload data RS-232; Diagnostic data RS-232) Input/
Output IN Signal Type
Name/Description GroundConnects to ground (negative supply potential). OUT RS-232 Diagnostic TXDSupplies received diagnos-
tic/administrative data to the connected device. OUT IN IN TTL, 3 Vdc Alarm conditionA low indicates normal opera-
tion. A high indicates an alarm. (See ASENSE
[HI/LO] command for more information.) RS-232 Diagnostic RXDAccepts diagnostic/adminis-
trative data from the connected device.
FCC 5-25 Vdc version: DC Input (5-25 Vdc) Supply Source must be capable of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. IN TTL, 3 Vdc Non-FCC 3 Vdc version: Do not connect Sleep Mode InputA ground on this pin turns off most circuits in a remote radio. This allows for greatly reduced power consumption, yet pre-
serves the radios ability to be brought quickly back on line. See Sleep Mode Operation (Re-
mote units only) on Page 31 for details. OUT TTL, 3 Vdc Data Carrier Detect (DCD)A low indicates hop-
ping synchronization has been achieved. IN
IN IN TTL, 3 Vdc Power Supply Shutdown ControlA ground on this pin causes the OEM modules power supply to shut down.
ReservedDo not connect. RS-232,
+/- 5 Vdc Transmitted Data (TXD)Accepts payload data from the connected device.
FCC 5-25 Vdc version: DC Input (5-25 Vdc) Supply Source must be capable of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. Non-FCC 3 Vdc version: Do not connect 12 IN RS-232,
+/- 5 Vdc Request to Send (RTS)A high causes CTS to follow after the programmed CTS delay time has elapsed (DCE). MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 63 Table 24. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts
(Payload data RS-232; Diagnostic data RS-232) (Continued) 13 14 15 16
OUT IN OUT
ReservedDo not connect. RS-232,
+/- 5 Vdc Received Data (RXD)Supplies received pay-
load data to the connected device.
GroundConnects to ground (negative supply potential). RS-232,
+/- 5 Vdc Clear to Send (CTS)Goes high after the pro-
grammed CTS delay time has elapsed (DCE), or keys an attached radio when RF data arrives
(CTS KEY). Table 25. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts
(Payload data RS-485; Diagnostic data RS-232) Input/
Output IN Signal Type
Name/Description GroundConnects to ground (negative supply potential). OUT RS-232 Diagnostic TXDSupplies received diagnos-
tic/administrative data to the connected device. OUT TTL, 3 Vdc Alarm conditionA low indicates normal opera-
tion. A high indicates an alarm. (See ASENSE
[HI/LO] command for more information.) IN IN RS-232 Diagnostic RXDAccepts diagnostic/adminis-
trative data from the connected device.
FCC 5-25 Vdc version: DC Input (5-25 Vdc) Supply Source must be capable of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. IN TTL, 3 Vdc Non-FCC 3 Vdc version: Do not connect Sleep Mode InputA ground on this pin turns off most circuits in a remote radio. This allows for greatly reduced power consumption, yet pre-
serves the radios ability to be brought quickly back on line. See Sleep Mode Operation (Re-
mote units only) on Page 31 for details. OUT TTL, 3 Vdc Data Carrier Detect (DCD)A low indicates hop-
ping synchronization has been achieved. IN
TTL, 3 Vdc Power Supply Shutdown ControlA ground on this pin causes the OEM modules power supply to shut down.
ReservedDo not connect. Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 64 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A Table 25. Transceiver Connector J3 Pinouts
(Payload data RS-485; Diagnostic data RS-232) (Continued) 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 IN IN IN
Differential RXD+/RXA (Transmitted Data+)Non-inverting receiver input. Accepts payload data from the connected device.
FCC 5-25 Vdc version: DC Input (5-25 Vdc) Supply Source must be capable of furnishing at least 7.5 watts. Non-FCC 3 Vdc version: Do not connect Differential RXD-/RXA (Transmitted Data-)Inverting re-
ceiver input.
ReservedDo not connect. OUT Differential TXD+/TXA (Received Data+)Non-inverting driver output. Supplies received payload data to the connected device. IN
GroundConnects to ground (negative supply potential). OUT Differential TXD-/TXA (Received Data-)Inverting driver output. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide 65 14.0 dBm-Watts-Volts Conversion Chart Table 26 is provided as a convenience for determining the equivalent voltage or wattage of an RF power expressed in dBm with 50 Ohms load. Table 26. dBm-Watts-Volts Conversion Chart Po dBm V
+53
+50
+49
+48
+47
+46
+45
+44
+43
+42
+41
+40
+39
+38
+37
+36
+35
+34
+33
+32
+31
+30
+29
+28
+27
+26
+25
+24
+23
+22
+21
+20
+19
+18
+17
+16
+15
+14
+13
+12
+11
+10
+9
+8
+7
+6
+5
+4
+3
+2
+1 100.0 200W 70.7 100W 80W 64.0 64W 58.0 50W 50.0 40W 44.5 32W 40.0 32.5 25W 20W 32.0 16W 28.0 12.5W 26.2 10W 22.5 8W 20.0 18.0 6.4W 5W 16.0 4W 14.1 3.2W 12.5 2.5W 11.5 2W 10.0 1.6W 9.0 8.0 1.25W 1.0W 7.10 800mW 6.40 640mW 5.80 500mW 5.00 400mW 4.45 4.00 320mW 250mW 3.55 200mW 3.20 160mW 2.80 125mW 2.52 100mW 2.25 2.00 80mW 64mW 1.80 50mW 1.60 40mW 1.41 32mW 1.25 25mW 1.15 1.00 20mW 16mW
.90 12.5mW
.80 10mW
.71 8mW
.64 6.4mW
.58 5mW
.500
.445 4mW 3.2mW
.400 2.5mW
.355 2.0mW
.320 1.6mW
.280
.252 1.25mW Po 1.0mW
.80mW
.64mW
.50mW
.40mW
.32mW
.25mW
.20mW
.16mW
.125mW
.10mW dBm V 0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
.225
.200
.180
.160
.141
.125
.115
.100
.090
.080
.071
.064
.058
.050
.045
.040
.0355
.001mW
.01mW dBm mV Po
-17
-18
-19
-20
-21
-22
-23
-24
-25
-26
-27
-28
-29
-30
-31
-32
-33
-34
-35
-36
-37
-38
-39
-40
-41
-42
-43
-44
-45
-46
-47
-48 31.5 28.5 25.1 22.5 20.0 17.9 15.9 14.1 12.8 11.5 10.0 8.9 8.0 7.1 6.25 5.8 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.2 2.85 2.5 2.25 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.25 1.18 1.00 0.90
.1W dBm V 2.9
-98
-99 2.51 2.25
-100 2.0
-101 1.8
-102 1.6
-103 1.41
-104
-105 1.27 1.18
-106 dBm nV 1000
-107 900
-108
-109 800 710
-110 640
-111 580
-112 500
-113 450
-114
-115 400 355
-116 325
-117 285
-118 251
-119
-120 225
.001pW
-121
-122
-123
-124
-125
-126
-127
-128
-129
-130
-131
-132
-133
-134
-135
-136
-137
-138
-139
-140 200 180 160 141 128 117 100 90 80 71 61 58 50 45 40 35 33 29 25 23 Po
.1pW Po
.01pW
.1W
.01W
.01W dBm mV Po
-49
-50
-51
-52
-53
-54
-55
-56
-57
-58
-59
-60
-61
-62
-63
-64 0.80 0.71 0.64 0.57 0.50 0.45 0.40 0.351 0.32 0.286 0.251 0.225 .001W 0.200 0.180 0.160 0.141 Po
.1nW
.01nW
.001nW dBm V 128
-65
-66 115 100
-67 90
-68 80
-69 71
-70 65
-71 58
-72
-73 50 45
-74 40
-75 35
-76 32
-77 29
-78
-79 25 22.5
-80 20.0
-81 18.0
-82 16.0
-83 11.1
-84
-85 12.9 11.5
-86 10.0
-87 9.0
-88 8.0
-89 7.1
-90
-91 6.1 5.75
-92 5.0
-93 4.5
-94 4.0
-95 3.51
-96
-97 3.2 66 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A GLOSSARY Antenna System GainA figure, normally expressed in dB, representing the power increase resulting from the use of a gain-type antenna. System losses (from the feedline and coaxial connectors, for example) are subtracted from this figure to calculate the total antenna system gain. ARQAutomatic Repeat Request. An error-correction technique whereby flawed data packets are detected and a request for re-transmission is issued. BitThe smallest unit of digital data, often represented by a one or a zero. Eight bits (plus start, stop, and parity bits) usually comprise a byte. Bits-per-secondSee BPS. BPSBits-per-second. A measure of the information transfer rate of digital data across a communication channel. ByteA string of digital data usually made up of eight data bits and start, stop, and parity bits. Decibel (dB)A measure of the ratio between two signal levels. Frequently used to express the gain (or loss) of a system. Data Circuit-terminating EquipmentSee DCE. Data Communications EquipmentSee DCE. Data Terminal EquipmentSee DTE. dBiDecibels referenced to an ideal isotropic radiator in free space. Frequently used to express antenna gain. dBmDecibels referenced to one milliwatt. An absolute unit used to measure signal power, as in transmitter power output, or received signal strength. DCEData Circuit-terminating Equipment (or Data Communications Equipment). In data communications terminology, this is the modem side of a computer-to-modem connection. By default, MDS transceivers are set as DCE devices. Digital Signal ProcessingSee DSP. DSPDigital Signal Processing. DSP circuitry is responsible for the most critical real-time tasks; primarily modulation, demodulation, and servicing of the data port. DTEData Terminal Equipment. A device that provides data in the form of digital signals at its output. Connects to the DCE device. EqualizationThe process of reducing the effects of amplitude, frequency or phase distortion with compensating networks. Extended AddressA user-selectable number between 0 and 31 that identifies a group of transceivers that are part of a common sub-network. It is recommended the Master be assigned XADDR 0 and the values of 1-31 assigned to Extension radios. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide G-1 Extension RadioA radio in a TransNET spread-spectrum network that serves as a gateway between vertically adjacent sub-networks. See Store-and-Forward. Fade MarginThe greatest tolerable reduction in average received signal strength that will be anticipated under most conditions. Provides an allowance for reduced signal strength due to multipath, slight antenna movement or changing atmospheric losses. A fade margin of 20 to 30 dB is usually sufficient in most systems. FrameA segment of data that adheres to a specific data protocol and contains definite start and end points. It provides a method of synchronizing transmissions. Frequency HoppingThe spread spectrum technique used by the transceiver, wherein two or more associated radios change their operating frequencies several times per second using a set pattern. Since the pattern appears to jump around, it is said to hop from one frequency to another. Frequency ZoneThe transceivers use up to 128 discrete channels in the 902 to 928 MHz spectrums. A group of 16 channels is referred to as a zone. The transceivers use five to eight frequency zones. Hardware Flow ControlA transceiver feature used to prevent data buffer overruns when handling high-speed data from the RTU or PLC. When the buffer approaches overflow, the radio drops the clear-to-send (CTS) line, which instructs the RTU or PLC to delay further transmission until CTS again returns to the high state. Host ComputerThe computer installed at the master station site, which controls the collection of data from one or more remote sites. LatencyThe delay (usually expressed in milliseconds) between when data is applied to TXD (Pin 2) at one radio, until it appears at RXD (Pin 3) at the other radio. MASMultiple Address System. A radio system where a central master station communicates with several remote stations for the purpose of gathering telemetry data. Master (Station)The one radio transceiver in a spread spectrum network that automatically provides synchronization information to one or more associated remote transceivers. A radio may be programmed for either master or remote mode using software commands. Multiple Address System (MAS)See Point-Multipoint System. Network AddressUser-selectable number between 1 and 65000 that is used to identify a group of transceivers that form a communications network. The master and all remotes within a given system must have the same network address. Point-Multipoint SystemA radio communications network or system designed with a central control station that exchanges data with a number of remote locations equipped with terminal equipment. G-2 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A PollA request for data issued from the host computer (or master PLC) to a remote radio. PLCProgrammable Logic Controller. A dedicated microprocessor configured for a specific application with discrete inputs and outputs. It can serve as a host or as an RTU. Remote RadioA radio in a spread spectrum network that communicates with an associated master station. A radio may be programmed for either master or remote mode using software commands. Remote Terminal UnitSee RTU. RepeaterA radio that receives RF data and retransmits it. See Store-and-Forward. RTURemote Terminal Unit. A data collection device installed at a remote radio site. SCADASupervisory Control And Data Acquisition. An overall term for the functions commonly provided through an MAS radio system. Standing Wave RatioSee SWR. Sub-NetworkA group of transceivers and the corresponding radio that they are directly synchronized to. A sub-network can be identified by Extended Address. See Store-and-Forward. Store-and-ForwardA radio that receives RF data and retransmits it. In the TransNET product line, store and forward is defined as a network that consists of vertically adjacent sub-networks that alternate communicating upstream and downstream. The transceiver performs store and forward at the internal data frame level (not the user data level) which allows the equipment to stream data with minimal latency through each Extension/Repeater radio station. SWRStanding Wave Ratio. A parameter related to the ratio between forward transmitter power and the reflected power from the antenna system. As a general guideline, reflected power should not exceed 10% of the forward power ( 2:1 SWR). TTLTransistor-Transistor Logic. A form of digital switching that utilizes bipolar transistors to sense high and low logic levels (1 and 0, respectively). ZoneSee Frequency Zone. MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide G-3 G-4 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A INDEX A Accessories (table) 6 ADDR command (set/display radio network address) 40 Alarm checking for 53 code denitions 53 codes 53 codes, table 53 major vs. minor 53 receiver timeout (RXTOT command) 48 reset output signal 41 set/display output sense (ASENSE command) 41 status (STAT command) 50 ALARM command (superseded; see STAT command) 50 AMASK command (congure alarm output signal) 41 Antenna performance optimization 23 selection 21 SWR check 23 Yagi, illustrated 22 ASENSE command (set/display alarm output sense) 41 B BAUD command (set/display data interface port attributes) 41 Baud rate setting 24 setting for RJ-11 DIAG port (DLINK command) 56 Benchtop Setup & Evaluation 7??
BUFF command (set/display received data handling mode) 41 C Cable data equipment to DATA INTERFACE connector 21, 34 data interface wiring for tail-end links 26 feedlines 22 maximum length, recommended 13, 14 CODE command (display/set encryption value) 42 Commands ADDR (set/display radio network address) 40 AMASK (congure alarm output signal) 41 ASENSE (set/display alarm output sense) 41 BAUD (set/display data interface port attributes) 41 BUFF (set/display received data handling mode) 41 CODE (set/display encryption value) 42 CTS (set/display CTS line response timer) 42 CTSHOLD (set/display CTS hold timer) 43 detailed descriptions 4051 DEVICE (set/display DCE or CTS Key behavior) 43 display operating status 36 DKEY (disable transmitter) 44 DTYPE (set radios diagnostics type) 44 FEC (Forward Error Correction) 44 HOPTIME (set/display hoptime setting) 44 how used 40 INIT (restore factory default settings) 44 MODE (display/set radio mode as master, remote, or extension) 45 most often used commands 40 network conguration 35 OWM (set/display optional owners message) 45 OWN (set/display optional owners name) 45 PORT (display/set current data port) 45 PWR (set/display RF forward output power) 46, 47 RSSI (display received signal strength) 47 RTU (enable/disable internal RTU) 48 RX (set/display test receive MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide I-1 frequency) 48 RXTOT (set/display received data timeout value) 48 SAF (store-and-forward) 48 SETUP (enter testing and setup mode) 48 SHOW (display measured power output) 49 SKIP (set/display frequency zone to skip) 49 SLEEP (display/set radios sleep mode setting) 50 SREV (display transceiver software version) 50 STAT (list alarms) 50 TEMP (display internal temperature) 50 XADDR (display or program extended address) 51 XMAP (32-bit hex list of extensions) 51 XPRI (display/program primary radios extended address) 51 XRSSI (sets minimum signal level for sync. with non-primary extension unit) 51 D Data buffer setting 23, 41 DATA INTERFACE connector pin descriptions, table 13 Data interface cable wiring for tail-end links, illustrated 26 Default settings data interface baud rate 24 factory settings reset by INIT command (table) 46 restoring (INIT command) 44 See also individual command descriptions DEVICE command (set/display DCE or CTS Key behavior) 43 Diagnostics setup mode (SETUP command) 48 using InSite software for network-wide 55 Display alarm output sense (ASENSE command) 41 alarms (STAT command) 50 CTS hold timer value (CTSHOLD command) 43 CTS line response timer value (CTS command) 42 data interface baud rate (BAUD command) 41 device behavior (DEVICE command) 43 hoptime setting (HOPTIME command) 44 network address (ADDR command) 40 operating status commands 36 owners message (OWM command) 45 owners name (OWN command) 45 received data handling mode (BUFF command) 41 received data timeout value (RXTOT command) 48 received signal strength (RSSI command) 47 RF forward output power (PWR command) 46, 47 RF power output, actual measured
(SHOW command) 49 skipped frequency zones (SKIP command) 49 software version, transceiver (SREV command) 50 temperature, internal (TEMP command) 50 test receive frequency (RX command) 48 display/set radio mode as master, remote, or extension (see MODE command) 45 DKEY command (disable transmitter) 23, 44, 49 DLINK command (set/display baud rate of diagnostics link) 56 DSP (digital signal processing) 53 DTYPE command (set radios diagnostics type) 44, 56 E Enable internal RTU (RTU command) 48 network-wide diagnostics, I-2 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A procedures 56 Setup mode (SETUP command) 48 skipped zone (SKIP command) 49 command) 43 transmitter, for antenna SWR check 23 Encryption. See CODE command Equipment List 43 Evaluation Board Documentation 1820 Extension radio. See Store-and-Forward (SAF) F Feedline selection 21, 22 G Gate (radio diagnostics type) 44 H Hoptime setting 23, 24 HOPTIME command (set/display hoptime setting) 44 I Illustrations antenna, Yagi 22 data interface cable wiring for tail-end links 26 model conguration code 3 point-to-point link 4 remote station arrangement 10 tail-end link 5 typical MAS network 4 INIT command (restore factory default settings) 44 InSite software 55 Installation 2132 connecting transceiver to data equipment 21, 34 feedline selection 22 performance optimization 23 tail-end links 25 Interference about 32 checks 24 troubleshooting 55 K Key KEY command (key transmitter) 23, 49 L LED status indicators table 17, 54 M Master Station default settings 46 MODE command (display/set radio mode as master, remote, or extension) 45 MODE command (display/set radios operating mode as master, remote, or extension) 45 Model conguration code, illustrated 3 Mounting instructions/dimensions 21 Multiple Address System (MAS) network, illustrated 4 N Network conguration commands 35 Node (radio diagnostics type) 44 O Operating Commands 3452 OWM command (set/display optional owners message) 45 OWN command (set/display optional owners name) 45 P PC connecting to radios diagnostic port 56 launching InSite application at 56 Peer (radio diagnostics type) 44 Performance optimization 23 Pins, DATA INTERFACE connector descriptions (table) 13 Point-to-point system link, illustrated 4 PORT command (set/display current data port) 45 Power (RF) set to CTS keying (DEVICE how much can be used 24 MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide I-3 Measurement 49 set/display RF forward output (PWR command) 46, 47 Procedures antenna aiming 23 antenna and feedline selection 21 antenna SWR check 23 connecting data equipment to DATA INTERFACE connector 21, 34 connecting PC and radios for network-wide diagnostics 56 installation 2132 interference check 24 mounting the transceiver 21 performance optimization 23 programming radio for network-wide diagnostics 56 troubleshooting 5255 Programming 3452 Programming radio as root or node 56 PWR command (set/display RF forward output power) 46, 47 R Radio inoperative (troubleshooting chart) 55 no synchronization with master
(troubleshooting chart) 55 poor performance (troubleshooting chart) 55 Remote radio default settings 46 Remote station typical arrangement, illustrated 10 Repeater Operation. See Store-and-Forward (SAF) Root (radio diagnostics type) 44 RSSI command (display received signal strength) 47 RTU command (enable/disable internal RTU) 48 RX command (set/display test receive frequency) 48 RXTOT command (set/display received data timeout value) 48 S SAF command (store-and-forward) 48 See also Encryption 42 Set alarm output sense (ASENSE command) 41 alarm output signal (AMASK command) 41 CTS hold timer (CTSHOLD command) 43 CTS line response timer (CTS command) 42 data interface baud rate (BAUD command) 41 DCE or CTS Key device behavior
(DEVICE command) 43 frequency zone to skip (SKIP command) 49 hoptime (HOPTIME command) 44 network address (ADDR command) 40 owners message (OWM command) 45 owners name (OWN command) 45 radio mode (see MODE command) 45 received data handling mode (BUFF command) 41 received data timeout value (RXTOT command) 48 test receive frequency (RX command) 48 testing mode (SETUP command) 48 SETUP command (enter testing and setup mode) 48 SHOW command (display power output) 49 SKIP command (set/display frequency zone to skip) 49 SLEEP command (display/set radios sleep setting) 50 Spread spectrum, basic principles of 3 SREV command (display transceiver software version) 50 STAT command (list alarms) 50 Store-and-Forward (SAF) 5, 26, 29, 35, 38, 39, 45, 48, 52 SWR (Standing Wave Ratio) performance optimization 23 Synchronization qualiers 25, 52 I-4 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A T Tables accessories 6 alarm codes 53 DATA INTERFACE connector pin descriptions 13 LED status indicators 17, 54 troubleshooting 55 Tail-end link cable wiring for, illustrated 26 illustrated 5 installation 25 Technical specications 5859 TEMP command (display internal temperature) 50 Temperature, display internal (TEMP command) 50 Transceiver connecting to data equipment 21, 34 default settings 46 mounting instructions/dimensions 21 performance optimization 23 Troubleshooting 5255 table 55 X XADDR (extended address command) 16, 25, 30, 39, 45, 46, 51, 52 XMAP command (32-bit hex entry) 51 XPRI command (display/set extended address) 51 XRSSI command (sets minimum RSSI level to maintain sync. w/non-primary extension radio) 51 MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A TransNET OEM Integration Guide I-5 I-6 TransNET OEM Integration Guide MDS 05-3946A01, Rev. A IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY... MDS products are designed for long life and trouble-free operation. However, this equipment, as with all electronic equipment, may have an occasional component failure. The following information will assist you in the event that servicing becomes necessary. CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Assistance for MDS products is available from our Customer Support Team during business hours (8:00 A.M.5:30 P.M. Eastern Time). When calling, please give the complete model number of the radio, along with a description of the trouble/symptom(s) that you are experiencing. In many cases, problems can be resolved over the telephone, without the need for returning the unit to the factory. Please use one of the following means for product assistance:
Phone: 585 241-5510 FAX: 585 242-8369 E-Mail: techsupport@microwavedata.com Web: www.microwavedata.com FACTORY SERVICE Component level repair of radio equipment is not recommended in the field. Many components are installed using surface mount technology, which requires specialized training and equipment for proper servicing. For this reason, the equipment should be returned to the factory for any PC board repairs. The factory is best equipped to diagnose, repair and align your radio to its proper operating specifications. If return of the equipment is necessary, you will be issued a Service Request Order (SRO) number. The SRO number will help expedite the repair so that the equipment can be repaired and returned to you as quickly as possible. Please be sure to include the SRO number on the outside of the shipping box, and on any correspondence relating to the repair. No equipment will be accepted for repair without an SRO number. A statement should accompany the radio describing, in detail, the trouble symptom(s), and a description of any associated equipment normally connected to the radio. It is also important to include the name and telephone number of a person in your organization who can be contacted if additional information is required. The radio must be properly packed for return to the factory. The original ship-
ping container and packaging materials should be used whenever possible. All factory returns should be addressed to:
Microwave Data Systems Product Service Department
(SRO No. XXXX) 175 Science Parkway Rochester, NY 14620 USA When repairs have been completed, the equipment will be returned to you by the same shipping method used to send it to the factory. Please specify if you wish to make different shipping arrangements. To inquire about an in-process repair, you may contact our Product Services Group at 585-241-5540 (FAX:
585-242-8400), or via e-mail at ProductServices@microwavedata.com. Microwave Data Systems Inc. 175 Science Parkway Rochester, NY 14620 General Business: +1 585 242-9600 FAX: +1 585 242-9620 Web: www.microwavedata.com A product of Microwave Data Systems Inc.
1 2 3 4 | Agent Authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 254.46 KiB |
175 Science Parkway, Rochester, New York 14620 USA
(585) 242-9600 Phone
(585) 242-9620 Fax March 29th, 2011 FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 U.S.A. Subject: Authority to Act as an Agent to FCC & IC (Industry Canada) Applicant: GE MDS LLC. Product: MDS EL806 FCC ID: E5MDS-EL806 Elliott TCB 684 West Maude Ave. Sunnyvale, CA. 94085 Gentlemen:
This is your letter of authorization to accept our appointment of Elliott Laboratories, Inc. as our Agent for GE MDS LLC, to sign applications before Elliott TCB and to make representations to you on our behalf. Elliott Laboratories, Inc. is to receive and exchange data between our company and Elliott TCB. I hereby certify on behalf of GE MDS ("Applicant") that neither Applicant nor any party to the application (officers, directors, and 5% shareholders) is subject to a denial of Federal benefits that includes FCC benefits pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988. 21 U.S.C. 853a. If you have any queries, please do not hesitate to contact me at 585 242-8440:
Yours truly, Sincerely, Dennis McCarthy Dennis W McCarthy Agency Compliance Engineer GE Digital Energy MDS T +1 (585) 242-8440 E Dennis.McCarthy2@ge.com
1 2 3 4 | Antenna Spec | Cover Letter(s) | 436.27 KiB |
SPECIFICATION SHEET MHW SERIES ANTENNAS ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATION Frequency Range Bandwidth Gain V.S.W.R. Impedance Max Power Length Connector Cable ANT-418-MHW-RPS ANT-433-MHW-RPS ANT-916-MHW-RPS 425-441 881-951 410-426 16 2dBi
<1.5 50 50W 6.9"
16 2dBi
<1.5 50 50W 6.3"
70 2dBi
<1.5 50 50W 3.9"
RP-SMA or SMA 79 or 15'
RP-SMA or SMA 79 or 15'
RP-SMA or SMA 79 or 15'
ORDERING INFORMATION PART #
DESCRIPTION ANT-xxx-MHW-***-
xxx = 418, 433 or 916 *** = RPS (RP-SMA) or SMA
= S (79") or L (15') MHW Series Antenna RP-SMA Connector Standard. Other terminations available for volume orders. Recipient understands any or all of the above specifications are subject to change without notice and proceeds with integration at own risk. For additional information, please contact Antenna Factor at 800-489-1634 Revised 3/27/03 0.36"
0.03" (Adhesive Pad) 1.30" - 916MHz 2.80" - 418MHz 1.32"
0.69"
0.27"
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 157.88 KiB |
Elliott TCB April 21, 2011 To whom it may concern:
The enclosed documents constitute a formal submittal and application for a Class II Permissive change / Reassessment for a 902-928 Spread Spectrum (modular approval) device pursuant to Subpart C of Part 15 of FCC Rules (CFR 47). The proposed changes to the existing approval are as follows:
1) Addition of a new antenna type dipole antenna with 2dBi gain. Radiated emissions test data for the device connected to this antenna is included with the application documents, along with the antenna specification sheet for the new antenna. 2) Use of module in a portable host device, specifically the body worn Control Chief Lightweight OCU. RF exposure in this specific portable exposure condition has been evaluated. SAR test data is provided with the application, in addition to an MPE calculation covering use of the module in mobile exposure conditions as permitted under the existing grants. Elliott Laboratories, as duly authorized agent prepared this submittal. A copy of the letter of our appointment as agent is included with the application. If there are any questions or if further information is needed, please contact Elliott Laboratories for assistance. Sincerely, Mark Briggs Staff Engineer Page 1 of 1
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2011-05-17 | 902.2 ~ 927.6 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2005-12-15 | 902.2 ~ 927.6 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |
3 | 2003-08-20 | 902.2 ~ 927.6 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |
4 | 2003-05-14 | 902.2 ~ 927.6 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 | Effective |
2011-05-17
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
2005-12-15
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
2003-08-20
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
2003-05-14
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
GE MDS, LLC
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0016050429
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
175 Science Parkway
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Rochester, 14620-4261
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Rochester, New York 14620-4261
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Application Email Address |
S******@ntscorp.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
h******@AmericanTCB.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
t******@timcoengr.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Grantee Code |
E5M
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Product Code |
DS-EL806
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
D******** W****** M****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Title |
Lead Agency Compliance Engineer
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
585-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
585-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
D******@ge.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
Elliott Laboratories Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
J******** M****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
684 West Maude Ave.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Sunnyvale, California 94085
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
408-2******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
408-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
d******@elliottlabs.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
Elliott Laboratories Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
J**** M******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
684 West Maude Ave.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Sunnyvale, California 94085
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
408-2******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
408-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
d******@elliottlabs.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Class | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | EL806 OEM Transnet | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Modular Equipment Type | Limited Single Modular Approval | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Single Modular Approval | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Grant Comments | Power listed is conducted. Professional installation of this product is required. This modular approval is limited to use when installed in devices approved by third-party OEMs, devices produced by the Grantee, or specific devices as shown in application under this FCC ID. The antenna(s) to be used with this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 23 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This permissive change adds a 2dBi antenna and a specific portable use host configuration. SAR compliance for body-worn operations are restricted the specific belt-clips/holsters/accessories tested for this filing. End-users must be informed of operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR value is: Body-worn 0.525 W/kg. | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Power listed is conducted. Professional installation of this product is required. This Limited Modular Approval is limited for use when installed in devices approved by third-party OEMs, devices produced by the Grantee, or specific devices as shown in applications under this FCC ID. The antenna(s) to be used with this Limited Modular Approved transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 23 cm from all persons and must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Power listed is conducted. Professional installation of this product is required. This Limited Modular Approval is limited for use when installed in devices approved by third-party OEMs, or produced by the Grantee. The antenna(s) to be used with this Limited Modular Approved transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 23 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Power listed is conducted. This Modular Approval is limited to OEM installation for mobile and fixed applications only. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 23 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This module is approved for use with the antennas and minimum length of cables as documented in this filing. Users and OEM integrators must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
National Technical Systems
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Elliott Laboratories LLC
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
UltraTech Engineering Labs Inc.
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
D******** B******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
T**** L********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
510-5********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
408-2********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
877-7********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
510 5********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
408-2********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
905-8********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
d******@nts.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
d******@elliottlabs.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
t******@ultratech-labs.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 902.20000000 | 927.60000000 | 1.0000000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 36 | 902.20000000 | 927.60000000 | 1.0000000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | CE | 902.20000000 | 927.60000000 | 1.0000000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15C | CE | 902.20000000 | 927.60000000 | 1.0000000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC